Home

Sony PDW-700 professional disc camcorder

image

Contents

1. g I amp 1 Page Num r 1 14 5 6 Insert Lock Tab Q JE IR T IY 1 Enter Delete 1 0 7 8 9 gt elete End PaUp L Poe CapsLock A 5 G J 1 4 5 lle gt Shift gt 2 X C V B N M R EB Shift n 1 2 3 lt a End V PgDn Eus Ctrl Alt Alt Gr Ctrl 0 2 45 aia Ins Del g 3 Polish Programmers Poland a x iQ I amp Page 1 e J4 5 Ile E 8 i i Je Insert Home 09 Lock W R T 1 JP P 7 8 9 a oe Delete End Down Homel Paup Caps Lock
2. On this unit you can enter any of the characters Select the corresponding language by selecting gt and symbols supported by the keyboards listed Settings gt Select USB Keyboard Language in the below Disc Menu see page 111 amp English United Kingdom T Te 1S 1 1 We IF _ I Page Num j 3 1415 Ile 19 flo I I lt Insert Home Lock Tab R T HY JU I Enter Page 7 8 9 E EG eles ER CapsLock A 5 D JH J 4 5 6 gt JD du lt gt Shift Z X C HV B IN JM lt Shift n 1 2 3 JN Ena Ctrl Alt Alt Gr Ctrl 0 ls Del English United States ie I amp Page Num 1 4 15 Ile E 8 14
3. and kanji Wt B S 3 85 el el Back Page Num Jf ARRE 4 515 TEES 8 ollo tllo bll ll x Jiepace mser Home jup Lock Tab E Y 0 1 Tl Enter ena Page 7 8 9 gt j fel wL 5j wie 4 Siete End Down Home 4 _ PaUp Caps Lock A L la 4 5 6 E 5 D aU amp Shift Z J J n 1 2 3 e all Zi ji all End Pn e ier Ctrl pos27 Alt Ctrl 0 A ao ls Del List of Supported USB Keyboards 233 xipueddy 234 Trademarks and Licenses MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG 4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR i ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG 4 VISUAL STANDARD 4 VIDEO AND OR ii DECODING MPEG 4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG 4 VIDEO NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA LLC SEE HTTP WWW MPEGLA COM MPEG LA is offering licenses f
4. o CO 2 8 Save TALLY green tally indicator Lights when the camcorder is the following states Picture Cache mode enabled Disc Exchange Cache mode enabled Recording with HDSDI REMOTE I F on the CAM CONFIG 1 page ofthe MAINTENANCE menu set to G TLY Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Flashes when the camcorder is the following states Set to Auto Interval Rec mode or the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode 1 flash per second Recording in Auto Interval Rec mode or recording in the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode 4 flashes per second Set to the single shot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode or recording in that mode 2 flashes per second BATT battery indicator This indicator starts flashing when the battery connected to the camcorder is nearly exhausted and stays lit when the battery is completely exhausted To prevent interruption during operation replace the battery as soon as this indicator starts flashing The battery power level at which the indicator starts flashing can be set on the BATTERY 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu For details see page 148 REC recording red tally indicator Lights up while camcorder is recording This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings in the same manner as the tally indicator and the camera operator tally indicator Viewfinder screen VTR SAVE indicator This indicator lights whe
5. Ta Q IR IT IY 1 P Page 7 8 9 SIP pese Bol CapsLock A D F WG J K L Dd Enter 4 5 6 d gt Shift Z 1 HC HV B lt Shift n 1 2 3 e Il d a End_ L_ _ Po0n e ie nter Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl 0 French France 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 M Verr n df die iie 31 werd S j qum Z HE HY 1 P Entr 7 8 9 Q S F JH J K JL M 4 5 6 gt Shit gt IW IX C V IB IN f 5 Shift n 1 2 3 e Fin Entr Ctrl Alt Alt Gr Ctrl 0 Inser Suppr German Germany WT I Ws ifs I We IW We gt Bid Num 1 ls 5_ 6 di db s ni Emo Pet e Lo T Z P 0 E Enter Bid 7 8 9 U PEN Entf KEnde 7 Post 11810 G H J K HL WO WA 5 6 gt Shit gt IX IV N E Shift 4 1 2 34 g B dL a Ende Bid Strg Alt Alt Gr Strg 0 m xs Einfg Entf 232 List of Supported USB Keyboards Italian Italy
6. 121 MH suonejedo 1 1 2 122 Disc Operations Checking disc properties See page 104 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Disc Properties and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Disc Properties screen appears Disc Properties User Disc ID 12345 Title One of the memories of sum gt Title2 none Total DUR 01 23 45 00 Remain 031min Rewrite 1234times Horizontal Scroll 4 User Disc ID User disc ID P 2 Title Title P Title2 Title2 P Total DUR Total recording time Remain Remaining recording time Rewrite Number of times rewritten 1 This can be specified with the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software contained on the CD ROM XDCAM Application Software 2 Titles can be displayed in European languages when the area of use see page 41 is set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a gt or 4 mark is displayed for an item you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view To return to the previous screen Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Disc Operations To edit disc information You can edit the user disc ID title D and title 2 by using a software keyboard 1 Only ASCII characte
7. appears Tocancelthe overwriting press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO To overwrite select YES and press the MENU knob When a Memory Stick is inserted You can use up to 20 pages from POI to P20 to save scene files in the Memory Stick Each page can hold up to five files Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears then press the MENU knob Select the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message STORE OK YES NO appears 8 To carry out the save select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO You can select the file information items to be displayed on each page of SCENE STORE and SCENE RECALL For details see select the file information items to be displayed on page 169 To save scene files stored in the camcorder memory to the Memory Stick The five scene files stored in the camcorder memory can be saved to the Memory Stick all in a single operation How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select SCENE STORE and press the MENU knob One of the SCENE STORE pages appears Turn the MENU knob to select the desired SCENE STORE page and press the
8. Indication Battery voltage BP GL95 GL65 IL75 M100 Anton Bauer Battery System BATTE ENNENENNJF 80 to 100 BATTE M E E E EEE 70 BATTEENNENEN 60 BATTEM EEE 50 BATTE M 40 BATT E M 30 BATTE 8 E 20 BATT E 8 10 BATTE 0 26 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls GUI screen operations section and audio control section THUMBNAIL indicator This lights when thumbnails are displayed THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK button Press this button to carry out a thumbnail search or create a clip list see page 106 When pressed the whole screen display changes to a thumbnail display Press once more to return to the whole screen display For a thumbnail search using essence marks hold down the SHIFT button and press this button see page 107 SET S SEL set scene selection button and arrow buttons Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit settings and for GUI screen operations The arrow buttons select items and change values and the SET S SEL button confirms settings Pressing this button with thumbnails displayed and the SHIFT button held down adds a sub clip to the current clip list scene selection See page 104 for more information about GUI screen operations See page 114 for more information about scene selection MENU button Displays a special menu for operations in GUI screens see page 101
9. 85 Bunooug y je1deuo 86 Total time for shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME c s s Shooting interval Time for recording on the disc REC TIME Manual Interval Rec mode settings and shooting Manual Interval Rec has the following two modes Single shot mode Each time the REC START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed the camcorder captures to memory a single shot consisting of the specified number of video frames Consecutive mode Once the REC START button or VTR button on the lens is pressed the camcorder captures consecutive shots to memory at the specified interval with each shot consisting of the specified number of video frames To make settings 1 Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select CACHE INTVAL REC and turn the MENU knob to display M INT OOSOREC FUNCTION TOP CACHE INTVAL REC M INT NUMBER OF FRAME 1 TRIGGER INTERVAL M DISC EXCHG CACHE OFF As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows OFF lt CACHE gt A INT gt M INT When M INT appears the camcorder is in Manual Interval Rec mode and the TALLY green tally indicator in the viewfinder flashes Advanced Operations for Shooting Select NUMBER OF FRAME and turn the MENU knob to select the desired number of frames to be recorded in each shot As you
10. If you press this button when the thumbnail screen is displayed the duration of the selected clip is divided into 12 and the first frame of each of the divisions is shown in a further thumbnail display expand function Each time you press this button the division is repeated to a maximum of three times with 1 728 divisions Hold down the SHIFT button and press this button to step back through the division process For details of the expand function see page 106 HOLD display hold CHAPTER chapter function button Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data displayed in the counter display section The timecode generator continues running Pressing this button again releases the hold You can use this button for example to determine the exact time of a particular shot For details of the counter display see page 24 If you press this button when the clip thumbnail screen is displayed those frames on which shot marks are recorded appear in a list chapter function Press the button once more to return to the normal thumbnail display By displaying thumbnails with shot marks attached in place of index frames you can check the contents of clips more easily and more quickly This is also useful for cueing up long clips For details of the chapter function see page 107 RESET RETURN button Resets the value shown in the time counter display According to the settings of the PRESET REGEN CLOCK
11. The disc was not recognized Try ejecting the disc and inserting it again Or exchange the disc A disc that requires salvage was inserted To record on the disc eject the disc insert it again and execute salvage processing Salvage processing failed For details see Handling of discs when recording does not end normally salvage function on page 75 The loaded disc cannot be salvaged by this unit The XXXX in the message is a code for XDCAM devices that can salvage the disc Refer to the list of device codes see page 76 and salvage the disc using one of the indicated devices The Write Inhibit tab of the disc is in the recording disabled position or salvage processing needs to be done on the loaded disc Set the tab to the recording enabled position Or eject the disc insert it again and perform salvage processing The loaded disc has a different resolution or a different system frequency To carry out recording operations exchange the disc or change the resolution or system frequency FRAME Indicates the number Salvage NG of frames recorded in one shot LOW LIGHT Depending on the setting the subject illumination is inadequate ON BOARD The backup battery of the internal Salvage BATTERY clock is empty 9 XXXX EMPTY DCP If this message continues to EEPROM appear even after the unit is DATA NG powered off and on again several DREEPROM times then the factory adjustment D
12. sss 32 Chapter 2 Preparations Preparing a Power Supply ee eeee eerte eese sees eene en sensns sensns tuae 36 Using ab ttery lence dale ee etes 36 Using AC power 3 Attaching the Viewfinder e 37 Attaching the HDVF 20A C35W 37 Adjusting the viewfinder position eese 38 Moving the viewfinder shoe up see 38 Using the BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket 39 Detaching the eyepiece ien eene get 40 Adjusting the viewfinder focus and screen sss 40 Setting the Area of Use e eeeee eerte esee sees eese ene en sensns enses esta tna tnao 41 Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock 42 Mounting the Lens eese eese eese entes tn estatus enun 43 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length eere eese ette tnnne 44 Preparing the Audio Input System eee eee esee eese ente etntnan 45 Connecting a microphone to the MIC IN connector a 45 Connecting microphones to the AUDIO IN connectors 46 Attaching a UHF portable tuner for a UHF wireless microphone c oerte ose b tr Eie esrb e re osi dott 47 Connecting line input audio equipment ees 49 6 Table of Contents
13. 1 297 517 11 ag Sony Corporation http www sony net PDW 700 Printed in Japan CE Printed on r led paper 2099 10 19 3 297 517 11 1 OM 2008 00Z Mdd H3QHOOMNVO OSIG IVNOISSJJOYd 3 29 7 6 1 7 141 PROFESSIONAL DISC CAMCORDER PDW 700 1 The supplied CD ROM includes operation manuals for the PDW 700 Professional Disc Camcorder English Japanese French German Italian Spanish and Chinese versions in PDF format For more details see Using the CD ROM manual on page 12 XDCAM HD Professional Disc System Power HAD FX EAR B OPERATION MANUAL 1st Edition Revised 2 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT This Professional Disc Camcorder is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Laser diode properties Wavelength 400 to 410 nm Emission duration Continuous Laser output power 135 mW max of pulse peak 65 mW max of CW Standard IEC60825 1 2001 Egenskaber for laserdiode Belgeleengde 400 til 410 nm Str lingsvarighed Kontinuerlig Afgivet lasereffekt 135 mW maks str letoppunkt 65 mW maks ved kontinuerlig str ling Standard IEC60825 1 2001 Tekniska data f r laserdiod Vaglangd 400 till 410 nm Emissionslangd Kontinuerlig Laseruteffekt 135 mW max f r pulstopp 65 mW max f r kontinuerlig vag Standard IEC60825 1
14. LOAD OUT OF USER OFF ON Selects whether to load data for items on pages not registered in the USER menu when USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF ON Selects whether to load data for items on the pages beyond USER FILE in the USER menu when USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed USER LOAD WHITE OFF ON Selects whether to load white balance data when USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed 03 ALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD Load ALL file ALL FILE SAVE Save ALL file FID Blank up to 16 characters Name ALL file ALL PRESET EXEC Return all items to preset values STORE ALL PRESET EXEC Save the current settings of all items as preset values CLEAR ALL PRESET EXEC Clear the preset values of all items 3SEC CLR PRESET OFF ON Turns the following function on and off When the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch is held on the CANCEL PRST side for three seconds clear the preset values of each item NETWORK DATA OFF ON Selects whether or not to read in the network related data Menu List sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 JajdeyD 159 pejreijeq pue s ejds q 9 4 2 160 No Page Item Settings Description 04 SCENE FILE 1 STANDARD 2 STANDARD 3 STANDARD 4 STANDARD 5 STANDARD STANDARD SCENE RECALL
15. 1e1deu 111 MH suonejedo 1 1 2 112 2 Doone of the following To confirm the edit and then exit the software keyboard Press the Tab key to move to OK and then press the Enter key To discard the edit and then exit the software keyboard While Cancel is selected press the Enter key To continue editing Press any key except the Enter key the Esc key and the Tab key Setting clip flags You can set three types of clip flags OK NG KP KEEP during recording or playback Setting these flags in each clip that you record makes it easy for editors and other colleagues to find and select the clips they need See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip where you want to set a flag Display the Thumbnail Menu Select Set Clip Flag The clip flag setting screen appears Thumbnail Menu fim Set Clip Flag gt Return to Upper Menu NG KP KEEP none 4 Select the clip flag that you want to set OK NG KP KEEP A clip flag icon see page 98 appears for clips that have clip flags set To clear clip flags Carry out steps 1 to 3 selecting a clip that has a flag set and then select in step 4 You can also use switches to set and clear clip flags For details see Setting clip flags with switches page 81 Thumbnail Operations Locking write pro
16. The audio signal from the front microphone is recorded The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector is recorded W The audio signal of the wireless microphone is recorded CH 4 switch OF Same as with the CH3 switch QR The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector is recorded Ow Same as with the CH3 switch When the LINE AES EBU MIC switch is set to LINE or MIC the audio signals recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 are not affected by the XLR automatic detection function They are determined by the settings of the AUDIO IN CH 3 and CH 4 switches Adjusting the audio recording levels To adjust automatically Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to STREO or MONO To adjust manually 1 SetAU CH34 AGC MODE on the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to OFF 2 Set AUDIO CH3 LEVEL for audio channel 3 and AUDIO CH4 LEVEL for audio channel 4 on the AUDIO 3 Adjusting the Audio Level page of the MAINTENANCE menu to FRONT The levels of audio channels 3 and 4 can now be adjusted with the MIC LEVEL control To set to a fixed value In step 2 of the previous procedure adjust manually set the menu items to FIX Setting the Time Data Setting the timecode The timecode setting range is from 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 29 hours minutes seconds frames for the PDW 700 RESET RETURN DISPSEL HOLD Dis Lav
17. Clip List Move TC 00 04 35 12 TC 00 04 57 10 TC 00 05 41 05 00 08 03 03 TC 00 06 25 00 00 064627 TC00070825 pare amp mME 08 AUG 2007 11 50 00 13 48 24 Scene Selection Clip List Editing su 199 ND ul suoneiedo 1e1deu 117 MH suonejedo 1 1 2 118 6 7 To adjust the In and Out points of sub Move the I cursor to the point where you want to move the selected thumbnails Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The sub clips are moved to the I cursor position Repeat steps 1 to 5 as required Save the clip list see page 119 clips trim Proceed as follows to define the range of a scene by changing the positions of the In and Out points See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the clip list thumbnail screen select a thumbnail Display the Thumbnail Menu Select Trim Sub Clip and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Clip List Trim screen appears 001 034 Clip List Trim Total 00 13 48 24 pur 00 00 21 27 Ww 01 17 33 08 Bm 01 17 55 05 TCR 01 17 33 08 cur 019 035 OK Cancel Like the clip playback screen this screen allows you to play and search all clips on the disc To display a list of In and Out point operations that you can perform Press the MENU button When you find the point that you want to make the start point select IN and then
18. FORMAT SETTING NTRY 2NOT SELECTED M LINE 1080 m o nn ND nn Uu 5 E S A E LI E FORMAT E TURN OFF ONCE Setting the Area of Use 41 suonejedeJjg 2 iajdeup 42 Turn the MENU knob to display the desired area of use Setting Area of use NTSC J AREA NTSC area Japan NTSC AREA NTSC area for areas other than Japan b PAL AREA PAL area The composite signal output from this unit is an NTSC signal with no black setup The system frequency is 59 94i b The composite signal output from this unit is an NTSC signal with a black setup 7 5 IRE The system frequency is 59 941 c The composite signal output from this unit is a PAL signal The system frequency is 50i Change the SYSTEM LINE video resolution setting as required Setting Resolution horizontal x vertical 1080 1080 lines 1920 x 1080 720 720 lines 1280 x 720 Set the POWER switch to OFF then once again to ON The unit is now ready for use Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock You can set or change the date and time of the internal clock The date and time set are reflected in the timecode How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu and press the MENU knob For de
19. POWER switch If there is condensation inside the VDR section the message HUMID appears in the status display on the color LCD If this happens wait until the indicator goes off before going on to step 2 2 Press the EJECT button This opens the lid of the disc compartment EJECT button 3 D Insert the disc in the V direction and close the disc compartment lid manually Handling Discs Y indication on the outside The disc is loaded To insert the disc correctly make sure that the camcorder is in the upright position the grip upside the bottom downside To unload a disc With the power supply on press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid and eject the disc then remove the disc If you are not going to insert another disc close the disc compartment lid To unload a disc when the power supply is off If the battery is exhausted it is not possible to remove the disc by pressing the EJECT button In such cases use the following emergency procedure to remove the disc manually 1 Turnoff the POWER switch 2 Carry out the operation shown in the following figure Open this rubber cover Using a screwdriver or similar implement slide the black metal plate visible inside in the direction of the rear of the camcorder The disc compartment lid opens A red Phillips screw is visible inside the rubber cap 8 Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the screw counterclockwise
20. The following names cannot be assigned Clips 0000 Clip lists E0000E01 SMI E0100E01 SMI to E9999E01 SMI E0000 SMI E0100 SMI to E9999 SMI The following names should be avoided Clips C5000 MXF to C9999 MXF Clip lists E0001 SMI to E0099 SMI To assign clip names on this unit The title assigned to a clip is also used as the name of that clip or the file name 6 6 TITLEOO001 When sub item AUTO NAMING is set to aee TITLEOO001 MXF 6 6 When sub item AUTO NAMING is set to TITLE m Advanced Operations for Shooting How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Before starting set TITLE on the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu to ENABL and set a title see page 89 For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Display the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu Select NAMING FORM and then press the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to display FREE and then press the MENU knob You can now enter a user defined name 0280F ILE NAMING NAMING FORM e AUTO NAMING 5 Turn the MENU knob to select AUTO NAMING and then press the MENU knob 6 Turn the MENU knob to display TITLE and then press the MENU knob The same name will now be given to newly recorded clips An FTP client software that supports UTF 8 is requi
21. flashes on the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on the white balance and black balance memory contents have been lost Adjust the white balance and black balance again Contact a Sony representative if this message continues to appear even after the white balance and black balance have been adjusted again For details refer to the Maintenance Manual Setting the Electronic Shutter Shutter modes The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed below Standard mode Select this mode for shooting fast moving subjects with little blurring SYSTEM System Shutter speed LINE setting frequency unit seconds 1080 59 941 fioo 17195 10550 1000 2000 501 160 17125 150 1 1 500 1000 2000 29 97P 149 120 125 I5 15 171000 2000 25P Is 150 100 1125 J250 500 171000 2000 720 Seta hoo 125 1 50 SCAN aye MODE 500 1000 2000 59 9P 59 94P 135 Mag Uso SCAN DM MODE loe 1125 1250 23 9P 1500 1000 gt 2000 50P 160 17125 50 1 1 1500 1000 2000 ECS Extended Clear Scan mode Select this mode for obtaining images with no horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects such as monitor screens Setting the Electronic Shutter Bunooug 104 suyas pue sjueunsn py e 61 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e Ja deyo
22. 62 SYSTEM System Shutter speed LINE setting frequency unit Hz 1080 59 941 60 00 to 4300 50i 50 00 to 4700 29 97P 30 00 to 2700 25 25 00 to 2300 720 59 94P 60 00 to 4300 SCAN MODE 59 9P 59 94P 24 00 to 2200 SCAN MODE 23 9P 50P 50 00 to 4700 SLS slow speed shutter mode Select this mode for shooting subjects in low level lighting conditions SYSTEM LINE Shutter speed unit setting frames 1080 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 720 2 4 6 8 16 SLS mode cannot be selected when SCAN MODE is set to 23 9P Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing shutter speed When the automatic iris is used the iris opens wider as the shutter speed increases thus reducing the depth of field Under artificial light particularly fluorescent or mercury lamps the light intensity may appear to be constant but the red green and blue intensities are actually changing in synchronization with the frequency of the power supply causing flicker Using an electronic shutter under such lighting could make the flicker even worse Color flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power supply frequency is 60 Hz However if the power frequency is 50 Hz setting the shutter speed to 1 100 can reduce this flicker When bright object is shot in ECS mode in such a manner that it fills the screen the upper edge of the picture
23. A remote computer can be connected to this unit and used to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data files such as video and audio data files There are two ways to connect a remote computer FAM connection Connect the i LINK S400 connector on this unit to the i LINK IEEE1394 connector on the remote computer using an i LINK cable see page 200 FTP connection Connect the network connectors on this unit and the remote computer using a network cable see page 204 Directory structure The following figure shows the directory structure of discs visible to a remote computer This structure is not the same as the actual structure recorded on the disc root HS INDEX XML 9 DISCMETA XML E MEDIAPRO XML SYSPRO XML E cip C0001 MXF C0001M01 XML c0001M02 KLv C0002 MXF Co002M01 XML Coo02M02 KLv 2 c0003 MXF 23 1 2 7 Edit 0001E01 SMI E0001M01 XML 0002E01 SMI 0002M01 XML E Sub C0001S01 MXF C0002S01 MXF C0003S01 MXF i UserData 1 Pe 2 Continued a Root directory b Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE Overview suoneiedo e 4 8 1e1deuj 195 suoneledo 9 4 1 2 196 Continued AZ To PROAV ALIAS XML
24. COMPLETE appears when the transfer finishes The message FILE NOT FOUND appears if no list of title prefixes is found Check the location where the file is stored on the Memory Stick To select a prefix from the title prefix list How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 Advanced Operations for Shooting 2 Select SELECT PREFIX and then press the MENU knob A list of up to 20 title prefixes appears TITLE PREFIX ESC Tennis Basketball Skiins 1 Skiing_2 Athletics Aquatics Cycling Softball Fencing Sailing When no list of title prefixes has been transferred to the internal memory of this unit only the initial value TITLE appears Select the desired title prefix from the list and then press the MENU knob The CLIP TITLE page appears again and the selected prefix appears in the PREFIX field To enter a title prefix directly How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the CLIP TITLE page on the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 Select PREFIX and then press the MENU knob A prefix string appears 027 CLIP TITLE TOP TITLE ENABL SELECT PR
25. Je deup 107 SU88J9S MD 8 Ja deyuD 108 THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK button with the SHIFT button held down The Select Essence Mark screen appears The names of essence marks that are not recorded on the disc are displayed in gray Select Essence Mark Shot Rec Start Cut 2 Select the essence mark that you want and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The essence mark thumbnail screen see page 100 displays a list of frames where the selected essence mark is set Playing the scene you have found After finding a clip with one of the methods explained in the previous section Searching with thumbnails page 106 you can cue up and play the clip that you have found To search for a thumbnail position and cue it up See page 104 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Select the thumbnail that you want to cue up Clip C0010 010 041 d lE TC 00 23 00 25 00 23 40 07 TC 00 24 45 11 TC 00 25 06 14 T ED 9 mug Ue SE TC 00 26 22 10 TC002719 4 TC00275108 Pa 8 TC00280809 1000282202 00233418 nare amp TME 30 NOV 2005 13 40 num 0 00 04 14 TC 00 23 54 22 2 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To play clips with the SET S SEL button In the Disc Menu set Settings gt SET Key on Thumbnail to Cue up amp Play Play begins from the selected frame when you press th
26. Memory Stick and AA are trademarks of Sony Corporation e Memory Stick Duo and Memory STICK Duo are trademarks of Sony Corporation Memory Stick PRO and Memory STICK PRO are trademarks of Sony Corporation Memory Stick PRO Duo and Memory STICK PRO Duo are trademarks of Sony Corporation Memory Stick ROM and Memory STICK ROM are trademarks of Sony Corporation MagicGate Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation MagicGate and MAGICGATE are trademarks of Sony Corporation About a Memory Stick Index Symbols warning indicator 32 48V OFF switches 30 Numerics 10BASE T 100BASE TX 29 5600K function 180 A AC power 37 ACCESS indicator 22 Accessories 230 Additional equipment 228 ALARM knob 19 ALL menu 127 Area of use setting 41 Arrow buttons 27 ASSIGN switches 19 28 assigning functions 179 ATW Auto Tracing White Balance 20 Audio control section 27 Audio format 24 AUDIO IN CHI CH2 connectors 30 AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switch es 28 Audio input system 45 Audiolevel 34 adjusting playback level 19 adjusting recording level 66 AUDIO LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 knobs 27 Audio level indicators 24 AUDIO OUT connector 30 AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches 28 AUTO W B BAL switch 18 BATT indicator 32 Battery attachment shoe 16 Battery pack 36 Black balance adjusting 56 BRIGHT button 23 BRIGHT control 31 Built in speaker 21 C CA camera adapter connector
27. Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 1 2 157 pue s ejds q 9 4 2 158 No Page Item Settings Description 23 UP UP CON FIELD ADPT Selects the conversion source picture when SD is CONVERTER PROCESS upconverted to HD FIELD Use the field picture ADPT Optimize the ratio of conversion from the frame or field picture UC DETAIL 99 to 99 Adjusts the sharpness of edge enhancement by the LEVEL upconverter UC CRISPENING 8 to 7 Sets the amplitude width at which the upconverter does not emphasize low amplitude signals UC DETAIL 99 to 99 Sets the maximum level of edge enhancement by LIMIT the upconverter UC LV DEPEND 8 to 7 Sets the luminance of edge enhancement by the LVL upconverter UC DTL 3 2M 4 5M Sets the center frequency and frequency properties FREQUENCY 5 0M 4 0M of edge enhancement by the upconverter 3 2M 3 2 1 1 MHz 4 5M 4 5 1 4 MHz 5 0M 5 0 0 7 MHz 4 0M 4 0 2 0 MHz UC DTL H V 3 to 4 Sets the horizontal vertical ratio of edge RATIO enhancement by the upconverter The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of Other BEFORE END when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER b The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of Other END when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER c When TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 pag
28. REC FUNCTION ASSIGNABLE SW POWER SAVE VF DISP 1 r VF DISP 2 r VF DISP 3 r LED MARKER 1 MARKER 2 GAIN SW VF SETTING AUTO IRIS SHOT ID SHOT DISP SET STATUS WHITE SETTING OFFSET WHT SHT ENABLE LENS FILE FORMAT SOURCE SEL UMID SET CLIP TITLE m FILE NAMING SELECT FUNCTION r SW STATUS WHITE Tr BLACK FLARE GAMMA BLACK GAMMA I KNEE DETAIL 1 DETAIL 2 SD DETAIL SKIN DETAIL MTX LINEAR MTX MULTI V MODULATION SATURATION NOISE SUPPRESS SCENE FILE D MAINTENANCE menu MAINTENANCE 7 WHITE SHADING BLACK SHADING LEVEL ADJUST BATTERY 1 BATTERY 2 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 WRR SETTING TIMECODE ESSENCE MARK CAM CONFIG 1 CAM CONFIG 2 PRESET WHITE WHITE FILTER DCC ADJUST AUTO IRIS 2 GENLOCK COMP AUTO SHADING APR NETWORK UP CONVERTER E FILE menu FILE r USER FILE M USER FILE 2 ALL FILE SCENE FILE REFERENCE LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE 2 LENS FILE MEMORY STICK F DIAGNOSIS menu DIAGNOSIS T1 HOURS METER TIME DATE ROM VERSION 1 m ROM VERSION 2 ROM VERSION DEV STATUS OPTION TOP menu and top level menus The TOP menu appears when with no menu displayed you hold down the
29. SCENE STORE FID STANDARD For details see Saving and Loading Scene Files on page 190 05 REFERENCE REFERENCE STORE EXEC Save reference file saved in the Memory Stick in internal memory REFERENCE CLEAR EXEC Clear reference file REFERENCE LOAD EXEC Load reference file REFERENCE SAVE EXEC Save reference file to Memory Stick FID Blank up to 16 characters Enter reference file name SCENE WHITE DATA OFF ON Selects whether to load white balance data when SCENE RECALL or STANDARD on the SCENE FILE page is executed Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 06 LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL EXEC Load lens file LENS FILE STORE EXEC Save lens file EID No Offset up to 16 characters Sets the name of the last selected lens file SOURCE MEMORYI Displays the number of last loaded lens file LENS NO OFFSET EXEC Clear lens file LENS AUTO RECALL OFF ON S No Specifies whether to automatically load the lens file of a lens that supports serial communications OFF Do not use the lens file function ON Load the lens file corresponding to the lens model name and reflect the contents of the file S No If the lens can communicate its serial number load the lens file corresponding to the lens model name and serial number and reflect the contents of the file If the lens serial
30. The message COMPLETE appears and the settings for all items in the USER menu are reset to the standard settings Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor This section explains the menu settings for the display of the viewfinder screen These settings are also used for the display of the LCD monitor in the same way Selecting the display items To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder screen with the viewfinder DISPLAY of the DISPLAY ASPECT switch set to ON and the LCD monitor use the VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 and VF DISP 3 pages of the OPERATION menu How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 or VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select the desired setting item and press the MENU knob On the VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 and VF DISP 3 pages you can select any of the following items to turn its display on or off VF DISP 1 page Item Description VF DISP Turning on or off the viewfinder display VF DISPLAY Selecting the display MODE mode P DISP EXTENDER Extender indicator DISP FILTER Types of the ND filter DISP WHITE White balance memory indicator DISP GAIN Gain indicator DISP SHUTTER Shutter speed and ECS mode indicator DISP AUDIO Audio level indi
31. UPI COSE SSi Iris switch Automatic Q Zoom selector SERVO MAN VDR SAVE STBY switch SAVE GAIN selector Set as low as possible OUTPUT DCC switch BARS Q WHITE BAL switch A or B Testing the viewfinder Adjust the position of the viewfinder Check that the color bars are displayed on the viewfinder screen and adjust the BRIGHT CONTRAST and PEAKING controls to give the best color bar display Check each of the following operations The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page changes to the next page Press the MENU knob and check that settings of each item of the selected page are displayed Turn the MENU knob and check that moves within the page Press the MENU knob and check that placed before the item changes to and placed before the setting of the item changes to Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of the selected item changes Set the OUTPUT DCC switch to CAM and change the FILTER selector position in the sequence of 1 2 3 and 4 Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder screen displays the correct numbers Carry out of the following operations and check that the indicator lights if the corresponding item has been turned on on the LED page of the USER menu Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using the GAIN selector and the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu Set the SHUTT
32. pue s ejds q 9 4 2 182 a Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu the ASSIGN 2 switch allows you to display or not to display all markers b The optional CBK SC02 Analog Composite Input Board is required for VBS signal input The optional CBK HD01 HD SD SDI Input Board is required for SD SDI HD SDI signal input c Video momentarily becomes black and audio is momentarily muted when the digital extender is switched on and off d This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2 slide type switch you cannot change those settings using other menus The function assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch takes precedence over the menu setting Select the desired function and press the MENU knob The function is assigned and the ASSIGNABLE SW page appears again Operation of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches when UA01 to UA10 are assigned When an on off switchable function or menu item is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches each time the switch is pressed toggles the function on or off When another type of menu item is assigned pressing the switch displays the item and its setting value on the viewfinder screen You can then change the setting by pressing and turning the MENU knob The viewfinder screen display disappears approximately three seconds after the last operation Setting power savin
33. 1 Display the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select MS IN gt JUMP TO and press the MENU knob The MS IN gt JUMP TO page allows you to select one of the following settings Setting Description OFF Disables this function Menu pages do not change when a Memory Stick is inserted USER Jumps to the USER FILE page ALL Jumps to the ALL FILE page SCENE Jumps to the SCENE FILE page LENS Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page REFER Jumps to the REFERENCE page USER 1 Jumps to the USER 1 FILE page Turn the MENU knob until the name of the desired file page appears then press the MENU knob In the following cases jumping to the target page is impossible When the power is turned on after you insert a Memory Stick When OFF is selected on the MS IN JUMP TO page Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory Stick geq sn pue 7 When any of the following menu pages is already displayed A file related page such as the USER FILE page of the FILE menu MEMORY STICK ALL FILE SCENE FILE LENS FILE REFERENCE or ROM VERSION page geq 1 sn pue unes 194 Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory Stick chapter Overview
34. Hyper gamma This enables a wide dynamic range without using the Knee function by smoothly compressing the high luminance range Supports new digital wireless microphone system The new digital wireless microphone system offers high quality superior resistance to noise and simultaneous multi channel operation Installation of the DWR SO1D Digital Wireless Receiver enables simultaneous reception of two channels 1 These products are not available in countries where they are prohibited by radio frequency regulations 3 5 inch color LCD monitor The 3 5 inch color LCD monitor displays easy to read audio meters menus disc and battery capacity indications and thumbnails of clips stored on disc Inherits unique features of XDCAM series The unit inherits the workflow features of the XDCAM series including thumbnail display and metadata management and improves them by introducing an improved man machine interface Metadata includes new user settable clip flags OK NG KEEP in addition to the existing Rec Start essence marks The new metadata types enable more efficient workflows when clips recorded on this unit are edited on nonlinear editing systems Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls M Q 1 2 Power supply LIGHT switch Determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT connector see page 17 is turned on and off AUTO When the POWER switch of the video light is i
35. Input an external video signal When the optional CBK SC02 Analog Composite Input Board is installed the unit can record analog composite video signals that are input to this connector TC IN timecode input connector BNC type To apply an external lock to the timecode of this unit input the reference timecode For details of timecode see Setting the timecode on page 69 TEST OUT connector BNC type This connector outputs the video signal for a video monitor The output signal can be selected from composite video HD Y R G B anda composite video signal like that displayed in the LCD monitor To switch output signals use the TEST OUT SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu If the output signal is set to one of R G or B then this setting changes to HD Y when the camcorder is powered off and on again Depending on menu settings menus timecode and shot data can be superimposed on the image on the monitor This connector can also be used to synchronize the timecode of an external VTR with the timecode of the camcorder TC OUT timecode output connector BNC type To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the timecode of this unit connect this connector to the external VTR s timecode input connector Rear TALLY back tally indicator red Lights up during recording It will not light if the TALLY switch is set to OFF This indicator also flashes to indicate
36. RAR ATTENTION L emploi d instruments optiques avec ce produit augmentera les risques pour les yeux L emploi de commandes ou ajustements ou l ex cution de proc dures autres que celles sp cifi es ici peut provoquer une exposition dangereuse au rayonnement Pour les clients en Europe Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme la Directive sur la compatibilit lectromagn tique EMC mise par la Commission de la Communaut europ enne La conformit cette directive implique la conformit aux normes europ ennes suivantes EN55103 1 Interf rences lectromagn tiques mission EN55103 2 Sensibilit lectromagn tique immunit Ce produit est pr vu pour tre utilis dans les environnements lectromagn tiques suivants E1 r sidentiel E2 commercial et industrie l g re E3 urbain ext rieur et E4 environnement EMC contr l ex studio de t l vision Le fabricant de ce produit est Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku Tokyo Japon Le repr sentant autoris pour EMC et la s curit des produits est Sony Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70327 Stuttgart Allemagne Pour toute question concernant le service ou la garantie veuillez consulter les adresses indiqu es dans les documents de service ou de garantie s par s CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT Dieses Ger t ist als CLA
37. SHIFT up arrow or F REV Go To End go to the last item SHIFT NEXT Go To Top go to the first item SHIFT PREV Select Multi Clip select multiple clips SHIFT right arrow or SHIFT left arrow Exit exit the current thumbnail screen THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK a If Settings gt SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu is set to Cue up amp Play then play starts as soon as cueup is ready b If Settings gt SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu is set to Cue up amp Play then pressing the SET S SEL button has the same effect Shortcut List su 199 N9 ul 125 pue shejdsiq 9 1 2 126 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Menu Organization The following chart shows the organization of menus in this camcorder TOP MENU ALL USER A USER MENU CUSTOMIZE OPERATION B PAINT C MAINTENANCE D FILE E DIAGNOSIS F A USER menu USER Menu Organization r OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 SUPERIMPOSE LCD REC FUNCTION ASSIGNABLE SW VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 LED MARKER 1 GAIN SW VF SETTING AUTO IRIS SHOT ID SHOT DISP SET STATUS LENS FILE USER FILE B OPERATION menu OPERATION C PAINT menu PAINT 7r OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 m SUPERIMPOSE LCD
38. Scene Selection Clip List Editing Scene Selection Clip List Editing What is scene selection Scene selection is a function which allows you to select material clips from the material recorded on a disc and perform cut editing You can do this by operating on this unit only Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut editing in the field and in other offline situations In scene selection you create a clip list editing data Since the material itself is not affected you can repeat this any number of times You can play back the edit list created by scene selection on this unit In scene selection you can add whole clips or add parts of a clip You can add scenes using chapters change the playback sequence and amend or delete In and Out points of these operations can be carried out easily on this unit Clip lists editing data created with the scene selection function can be used on XPRI and other full feature nonlinear editing systems Clips Material recorded with this unit is managed in units called clips A clip contains the material from a recording start point to a recording end point Clips have numbers beginning with C for example C0001 Recording Recording start point end point of clip 2 of clip 2 Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Clip 4 C0001 C0002 C0003 C0004 You can also assign titles to your clips and use the titles to manage them instead of the clip numbers For more informat
39. To counter problems with very bright highlights If the subject is too bright the iris may close too much leaving the overall image dark or the highlights may be blown out In such cases setting the highlight clip function on reduces the luminance range avoiding problems from the automatic iris correction In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu set the CLIP HIGH LIGHT item to ON Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment Bunoous 104 suyas pue sjuswysnipy e Je deyo 65 104 pue sjuewjsnipy e Ja deyo 66 Adjusting the Audio Level Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches to AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2 You can also adjust the audio level manually For audio channels 3 and 4 menu settings allow you to select automatic adjustment manual adjustment or fixed Target audio level for automatic audio level adjustment Make adjustment using 20 dB as the target level If the audio level meter shows a maximum level of 0 dB then it indicates that the input audio level is excessive Excessive input level LETT mimis NEIN Target input level 4 23 Manually adjusting the audio levels of the audio inputs from the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector t
40. Tripod Mounting eee eee esee eee ee seen 50 Connecting a Video Light eee eee eee esee esent tatnen enses tn tnann 51 Using the Shoulder Strap eere eee eee eese tenete eene na enata ata enaenue 51 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad 52 Connecting the Remote Control 53 Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting Setting the Recording Format eerie eee eese etes tentata entusiasta 55 Setting the system frequency 55 Setting the video recording format sss 56 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 56 Adjusting the black balance eee 56 Adjusting the white balance sees 57 Setting the Electronic Shutter eere eee eee esee entente enses en tnan 61 Shutter modes cres rn ct RE E ERRER 61 Selecting the shutter mode and shutter speed 62 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment Adjusting the Audio Level eeeee Manually adjusting the audio levels of the audio inputs from the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors eee 66 Manually adjusting the audio level of the MIC IN connector 67 Recording audio on cha
41. gt Local Area Connection in the control panel 2 In the Local Area Connection Properties uncheck the Internet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 and then click the OK button Turn MENU knob to scroll to the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu then press the MENU knob FTP File Operations UO7OPOWER SAVE TOP gt ETHERNET USB DSABL iLINK FAM DSABL REC AUDIO OUT EE Move to ETHERNET USB then press the MENU knob 5 Turn the MENU knob to select ENABL then press the MENU knob Making FTP connections FTP connections between this unit and a remote computer can be made with either of the following The command prompt FTP client software This section explains how to use the command prompt For more information about using FTP client software refer to the documentation of the FTP client software on your system To log in Ifthis unit is connected to a remote computer with aFAM connection first exit file operations on the FAM connection see page 201 1 Load a disc into this unit and put the unit into the following state Recording playback serch and other disc operations Stopped THUMBNAIL indicator Off Disc access by clip deletion disc formatting or other operation Stopped Picture Cache function and Interval Rec function Off MENU ON OFF switch OFF Unsaved current clip list Save or clear Login is not possible unless the unit is in the state
42. gt 4300K 5600K 6300K 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required To switch between electrical CC filters with an ASSIGN switch You can assign the function that switches between electrical CC filters to an ASSIGN switch This allows you to switch between color temperatures 3200K 4300K 5600K 6300K that have been assigned to up to four positions A to D with each press of the ASSIGN switch Regardless of assignments to ASSIGN switches you can also switch between the color temperatures assigned to each position from a remote control unit P 1 When the RM B150 B750 MSU 900 950 or RCP 750 75 1 920 921 is connected 1 Display the WHITE FILTER page of the MAINTENANCE menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 2 Select the position to which to assign a CC filter by selecting one of ELECTRICAL lt gt to ELECTRICAL CC lt D gt and then turn the MENU knob to select the desired color temperature As you turn the MENU knob the color temperature changes as follows 3200K gt 4300K 5600K 6300K To set no color temperature Select with ELECTRICAL lt gt or D selected When the ASSIGN switch is pressed the setting for that position is not displayed For example if is set for one position then switching between the remaining three positions is carried out 3 Re
43. 4 switches REAR XLR OFF ON Turns the XLR connection automatic detection on AUTO or off FRONT MIC REF 60dB 50dB Sets the reference level of the front microphone 40dB REAR MIC REF 60dB 50dB Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN CHI 40dB connector is set to MIC MIN ALARM OFF SET Volume of the monitor speaker alarm tone when it VOL is turned all the way down OFF Almost inaudible SET Faintly audible SP ATT LEVEL OFF 3dB 6dB Lowers the volume of the monitor speaker Has 9dB effect on earphone volume HEADPHONE MONO STREO Selects whether to make the rear earphone OUT monaural or stereo 07 AUDIO 2 AU DATA LEN 16bit 24bit For details see Setting the Recording Format IMX page 55 When the CBKZ MDO is installed AU REF LEVEL 20dB 18dB Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal 16dB 12dB EBUL AU REF OUT 0dB 4dB Sets the output reference level 3dB EBUL AU CHI2AGC MONO STREO Selects whether to perform automatic input level MODE adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 1 and 2 independently for each channel or in stereo mode AU CH34 AGC MONO STREO Selects whether to perform automatic input level MODE OFF adjustment of analog audio signals to be recorded on channels 3 and 4 independently for each channel or in stereo mode or not at all OFF AU AGC SPEC 6dB 9dB AGC saturation level setting 12dB 15dB 17dB AU LIMITER OFF 6dB For manual audio input le
44. A 5 lit If Enter 4 5 e 41 gt Shift Z WX C V B N M lt gt Shift 1 2 3 e IU a End PgDn EU Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl 0 1 Ins Del Russian Russia e amp 2 m Page Num e 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 n Insert Home Up Lock Tab Q W HE R HY JU 1 Enter Detetel Ena Page 7 8 9 nal ul vi KIL EIL rib SiL 4 Down Homel _ 4 Capslok A 5 ID HIF IG K L E EF 4 5 6 ej AJ noll ell oj al allow alho gt Shift Z B M lt gt Shift n 1 2 3 I all uL cl uL TIL bib oll fL End Pn ae Ctrl Alt Alt Gr Ctrl 0 s Spanish Spain amp R Bl JH ba ll4 l5 le JE o 11 Ji serio pag Num Tab Q W JE R T Y U 1 P i Enter Supr Fin AV 8 9 gt Ub P limbi Bloq S D F K B 4 5 6 May s 4 gt shit gt 12 Ix iv IN IM E Shift n 1 2 Ws Fin J HAV P g intro Control Alt Alt Gr Control FS ar 0 Ins Supr When the area of use is set to NTSC J AREA The keyboard is fixed as the Japanese keyboard Notes The keyboard language cannot be changed It is not possible to enter Japanese hiragana katakana
45. All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules If you have any questions about this product you may call Sony Customer Information Service Center 1 800 222 7669 or http www sony com Declaration of Conformity Trade Name SONY Model PDW 700 Responsible party Sony Electronics Inc 16530 Via Esprillo San Diego CA 92127 U S A Telephone Number 858 942 2230 Address This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation For the State of California USA only Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Perchlorate Material Lithium battery contains perchlorate For the customers in Europe This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC Directive issued by the Commission of the European Community Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the following European standards EN55103 1 Electromagnetic Interference Emission EN55103 2 Electromagnetic Susceptibility Immunity This product is intended for use in the following Electromagnetic Environments E1 residential E2
46. Bl If it does not replace the battery pack with a fully charged one Check that there no obstructions such as cables near the disc compartment lid Then press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid D After checking that the disc is not write protected see page 73 load it and close the disc compartment lid Basic procedure for shooting from adjusting the black balance and white balance to stopping recording Switch settings After turning on the power and loading a disc set the switches and selectors as shown below and begin operation DISPLAY ON Iris Automatic Q Zoom Automatic OUTPUT DCC CAM DCC ON Q F RUN SET R RUN F RUN or R RUN set as needed Q AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 AUTO Basic Procedure for Shooting y 77 Bunooug y e1deuo 78 Shooting 5 6 4 1 Flick the AUTO W B BAL switch to BLK to adjust the black balance For details of black balance adjustment see page 56 Select the CC filter and ND filter to match the lighting conditions and adjust the white balance For details see Adjusting the white balance on page 57 Aim the camera at the subject and adjust the focus and zoom If necessary set the electronic shutter for an appropriate mode and speed For details see Setting the Electronic Shutter on page 61 To start recording press the REC START button or the
47. For details see File operation restrictions page 196 Syntax RMD lt SP gt lt path name gt lt CRLF gt Extended commands In the command syntax column lt SP gt means a space entered by pressing the space bar and lt CRLF gt means a new line entered by pressing the Enter key SITE REPF Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to the remote computer This command allows you to specify a segment in the body of the MXF file composed of video and audio data for transfer of the required segment only A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified This command cannot be used when the path name contains a space Use the SITE REPFL command instead FTP File Operations Syntax SITE SP path name SP start frame SP lt transfer size gt lt CRLF gt lt start frame gt specifies an offset from the start of the file Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset the first frame is 0 lt transfer size gt specifies the number of video frames to transfer specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file Input example SITE Clip C0001 MXF 5 150 Transfer C0001 MXF Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to frame 150 SITE REPFL Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to the remote computer This command allows you to specify a segment in the body of the MXF file composed of video and audio data for transfer of
48. Only files which can be written by XDCAM f When the C part of a C MXF file name is changed a C MOI XML file or a C M02 KLV file with the same name in the C part is also changed automatically g When a C MXF file is created a C MO1 XML file with the same name in the C part is created automatically Overview suonejedo 4 8 2 197 h When a C MXF file is deleted the C M01 XML file or a C MO2 KLV file with the same name in the C part is also deleted automatically Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory Edit directory File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write E E01 SMI 9 Clip list file Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0001 to 0099 E MO01 XML 9 0001 to 0099 Metadata file generated automatically Yes Yes No No when E E01 SMI file is created Other files Files other than the above No No a The E part can be changed to a user defined name b Only files which can be written by XDCAM Partial writing is not possible c Only files which can be written by XDCAM d When the E part of a E E01 SMI is changed an E MOI XMI file with the same name in the E part is also changed automatically Sub directory When an E E01 SMI file is created an E MO1 XML file with the same name in the E part is also generated automatically f When an E
49. TX1 Channel 1 TX2 Channel 2 WRR DELAY OFF ON Enables or disables the delay compensation comp D function for wireless audio input OFF Disables the function ON Enables the function the audio in all EE output is delayed by about 8 ms TX channel Displays the name of the transmitter whose signals number 9 are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT TX AUDIO PEAK Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter PEAK channel whose signals are being received on the channel number P selected by WRR CH SELECT is over the peak TX INPUT MIC LINE Displays whether the input level of the transmitter LEVEL channel whose signals are being received on the channel number 9 selected by WRR CH SELECT is set to MIC or LINE TX ATT Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals LEVEL channel are being received on the channel selected by WRR number 9 CH SELECT the permissible setting range may vary depending on the transmitter device TX LCF Sets the Low Cut Filter frequency of the transmitter FREQ channel whose signals are being received on the channel number 9 selected by WRR CH SELECT the permissible setting range may vary depending on the transmitter device TX SYSTEM AUTO When WRR DELAY COMP is set to ON sets the DELAY 0 0ms 8 0ms amount of audio delay for the channel selected by channel number WRR CH SELECT AUTO Automatically adjusts the amount of delay so that
50. The unit supports a variety of HD formats including formats with 720 lines of resolution 1 The MPEG 2 422P HL codec performs 4 2 2 sampling and records at a video bit rate of 50 Mbps 2 Image compression uses the MPEG 2 Long GOP system 3 The PDW HD1500 supports recording of up to eight channels in MPEG HD422 format Features MeIAJOAQ JE deUD 13 MeIAJOAQ Je deuo 14 Format compatibility with earlier models The unit is capable of recording in the MPEG 2 MP HL 35 25 Mbps formats used by earlier XDCAM HD devices These formats offer longer recording times than the MPEG 2 422P HL 50 Mbps format The optional CBKZ MD01 SD Record and Playback Software D can be installed to enable recording and playback in the MPEG IMX 50 40 30 Mbps and DVCAM 25 Mbps formats 1 A verification key is required to use the CBKZ MD01 software after installation For details contact a Sony service representative Rich selection of interfaces HDSDI and SDSDI output connectors Allow free combination of HDSDI and SDSDI signals Timecode and other text data can be superimposed on signals from one of the two interfaces Composite signal output connector Selectable video input connectors The unit is designed to support recording in every type of environment including reporting by pool coverage teams The optional CBK HD01 HD SD SDI Input Board or CBK SC02 Analog Composite Input Board can be installed to enable selection of HD SDI
51. Therefore processing takes longer than for a quick salvage about 30 seconds although it depends on the state of the disc Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage 1 Insert the disc on which recording did not end normally The following salvage message appears SALVAGE TO RECORD ON THE DISC IT IS NECESSARY TO EXECUTE SALVAGE SALVAGE OK YES N0 N Turn the MENU knob to move to YES and press the MENU knob Salvage processing starts and the message EXECUTING appears A results message appears when the processing finishes If the salvage succeeded the message COMPLETED appears If the salvage failed the message INCOMPLETED appears Clips for which recording did not end normally are lost To exit without salvaging Select NO in step 1 to exit without performing salvage processing However the status of the disc does not change Salvage is still required to recover the clips for which recording did not end normally The salvage message will appear again when that disc is inserted again or when the camcorder is powered on again f salvage processing is not done sections which were recorded normally can be played back but no new recording can be done on the disc Full salvage of discs recorded by this camcorder can be performed with the PDW HD1500 or PDW 700 Full salvage cannot be performed with any other XDCAM device The following message may appear when you inse
52. USER FILE LOAD EXEC USER FILE SQUE EXEC unpnnnnuunnunnmnuuu EXEC F 1D USER PRESET To set a file ID for the data to be saved Set the file ID before going to step 2 For details on setting the file ID see To set the file ID on page 188 Saving and Recalling User Files geq sn Buipeo pue 7 geq 1es pue 2 188 2 Select USER FILE SAVE and press the MENU knob The USER SAVE page appears Up to 20 pages from to P19 can be used to save user files to the Memory Stick Each page can hold up to five files Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears and press the MENU knob 4 Select the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message SAVE OK YES NO appears If a file number is followed by NEW FILE this means that the file is empty If data is stored in the file the file number is followed by the file name 5 To carry out the save select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO The access indicator lights When the saving is completed the message COMPLETE appears and the access indicator goes off If no Memory Stick has been inserted The message NO MEMORY STICK will appear Insert a Memory Stick and carry out the operation once again If you select a file number
53. VAR variable IRIS WINDOW OFF ON Turns on and off the function which displays a IND frame marker for the auto iris detection window IRIS LEVEL 99 to 99 Adjusts the level of the auto iris target value IRIS APL RATIO 99 to 99 Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris detection peak value and average value IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 240 to 479 Adjusts the width of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS VAR 20 to 135 to 269 Adjusts the height of detection frame when the HEIGHT auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS VAR H POS 460 to 0 to 459 Adjusts the horizontal position of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS VAR V POS 250 to 0 to 249 Adjusts the vertical position of detection frame when the auto iris detection window is set to VAR IRIS SPEED 99 to 99 Adjusts the auto iris speed CLIP HIGH OFF ON Turns on and off the function which during auto LIGHT iris adjustment ignores very bright areas by dulling the reaction to high luminescence 18 GENLOCK GENLOCK OFF ON Turns genlock on and off GL HD H PHASE 99 to 99 Sets the HD output H phase for genlock operation GL SD H PHASE 99 to 99 Sets the SD output H phase for genlock operation REFERENCE INTERNAL Displays the type of reference signal used by this GENLOCK unit SDI IN 19 ND COMP ND OFFSET OFF ON Turns on and off the mode which sets ND neutral ADJUST density filter
54. When the whole screen is displayed pressing this button has no effect and the operation is invalid F RUN SET R RUN free run set recording run switch Selects the operating mode of the internal timecode generator The operating mode is set as explained below depending on the position of the switch F RUN Timecode keeps advancing regardless of the operating state of the VDR Use this setting when synchronizing the timecode M Q 1 2 with an external timecode SET Sets the timecode or user bits R RUN Timecode advances only during recording Use this setting to have a consecutive timecode on the disc For details see Setting the timecode on page 69 and Setting the user bits on page 69 AUDIO LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 audio channel 1 2 recording level knobs Adjusts the audio levels to be recorded on channels 1 and 2 when the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches are set to MANUAL SUB CLIP indicator This lights when using a clip list for playback El SUB CLIP DISC MENU button Press this to play back according to a clip list You can play back a particular clip or sequential clips or carry out a search of the selected clip list To display the Disc Menu which allows you to carry out operations such as saving recalling or deleting a clip list hold down the SHIFT button and press this button E SHIFT button Use this in combination with other buttons PRESET REGEN regeneration CLOCK switch S
55. and press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the EDIT PAGE screen appears Menu Operations The EDIT PAGE appears UnU ACC 4 CCDAL VOO Amueuzc CC D a A 7E Y Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 0 1 OXDONOUISQN Press the MENU knob Then select the position where you want to add the page and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears 5 Select INSERT and press the MENU knob The CONTENTS page appears 6 Select the desired page and press the MENU knob The number and name of the page selected in step 6 is added above the item selected in step 4 To cancel adding a page Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6 select ESC at the top right of the screen and press the MENU knob The EDIT PAGE screen appears again To delete a page by using the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in To add a page page 170 2 Press the MENU knob Then select the page that you want to delete Flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST position The message DELETE PAGE OK appears Flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST position again To delete a page by using the menu 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in To add a page page 170 2 Press the MENU knob Then select the page that you want to delete and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears Select DELET
56. button 3 5 O O Set the DISPLAY switch to TC 2 Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET The first leftmost digit of timecode flashes 4 Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit Repeat until all digits are set To reset the timecode value to 00 00 00 00 Press the RESET RETURN button 5 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN or R RUN F RUN Free run The timecode generator keeps running R RUN Recording run The timecode generator runs only while recording To set the drop frame mode non drop frame mode You can select the drop frame DF mode or non drop frame NDF mode on the TIMECODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu To make the timecode consecutive When the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set to R RUN recording a number of scenes on the disc normally produces consecutive timecode However once you remove the disc and record on another disc the timecode will no longer be consecutive when you use the original disc again for recording In this case to make the timecode consecutive set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to REGEN Saving the real Time in the Timecode Setting the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode When it is necessary to set the actual time use the TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu For deta
57. output level Loosen the fixing screws on the F f or ring flange focal length adjustment ring Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto D Point the camera at the chart by turning the focus ring and focus on it Set the zoom ring to wide angle Turn the Ff or ring until the chart is in focus being careful not to disturb the focus ring 8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus all the way from wide angle to telephoto Tighten the F f or ring fixing screws Preparing the Audio Input System Connecting a microphone to the MIC IN connector You can attach the 6805 stereo microphone not supplied to the microphone holder of the HDVF 20A viewfinder not supplied suonejedeJjg z je1deuj 1 Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder clamp Microphone holder clamp 2 Place the microphone in the microphone holder Place the microphone in the holder so that UP is at the top 2 Close the microphone holder 3 Tighten the screw On how to perform this operation refer to the operation manual for the microphone Preparing the Audio Input System 45 ejdeuj 46 3 Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector then set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel on which you want to record the audio from this microphone to FRONT for CH 1 CH 2 or F for CH 3 CH 4 Secure the microphone
58. set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON to display the menu on the viewfinder screen and the LCD monitor If this is the first time the menu has been used after the camcorder has been powered on the USER menu is displayed If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears When the menu is not displayed on the LCD monitor Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button below the LCD monitor to select the CHAR display To clear the menu display from the screen Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF When the cover of the menu operating section is closed this switch is automatically set to OFF When the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY ASPECT switch on the viewfinder is set to ON the display Menu Operations indicating the current status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen For details see Selecting the display items on page 172 To display the TOP menu With no menu displayed on the screen hold down the MENU knob and set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON Depending on the internal switch settings display of the TOP menu may be disabled For details refer to the Maintenance Manual Basic menu operations By pressing and turning the MENU knob you can set various menu items In the remainder of this section the LCD monitor is generally shown as an example of the menu display but a similar display also appears on the viewfinder screen To select the setting items and values on the menu Turn the MENU knob to s
59. setting as required When SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 59 9P you can set the camera shooting frequency SCAN to either 59 9 Hz or 23 9 Hz Set SCAN MODE to either as required Setting the Recording Format Bunoous 104 sBunjes pue sjueunsn py e 55 Bunooys 10 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e Ja deyo 56 When you set SCAN MODE to 23 9P the video output signals and video recording signals of this unit are 59 9 Hz signals after 2 3 pulldown Setting the video recording format 1 Display the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select REC FORMAT and turn the MENU knob to select the desired recording format As you turn the MENU knob the recording format changes as follows HD422 50 gt HD420 HQ HD420 SP IMX 50 gt IMX 40 P lt IMX 30 gt DVCAM P 1 When the optional CBKZ MD01 SD Record and Playback Software is installed To set the aspect ratio when IMX 50 IMX 40 IMX 30 or DVCAM is selected Select ASPECT RATIO SD on the FORMAT page and turn the MENU knob to select the desired aspect ratio As you turn the MENU knob the aspect ratio changes as follows 16 9 4 3 024OFORMAT TOP SYSTEM LINE 1080 SYSTEM FREQUENCY 59 91 REC FORMAT 50 16 8 16bit NTSC J AREA ASPECT RATIO SD AU DATA LENCIMX COUNTRY The unit ignores
60. 110 minutes 100 lt 110 to 100 minutes 90 100 to 90 minutes 90 85 90 to 85 minutes 85 80 85 to 80 minutes 20 15 20 to 15 minutes 15 10 15 to 10 minutes 10 5 10 to 5 minutes 5MIN flash 5 minutes 4MIN flash 4 minutes 3MIN flash 3 minutes 2MIN flash 2 minutes 1MIN flash 1 minutes OMIN flash 0 minutes Remaining clips display Displays the remaining number of clips that can be recorded The display flashes once per second when the number of remaining clips is less than 10 Iris setting auto iris override Indicates the F value iris setting of the lens Auto iris override is shown by an indicator made up of two segments each on the upper and lower sides For details see Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment on page 64 External input status When the REC VIDEO SOURCE item on the SOURCE SEL page of the OPERATION menu has been set to EXT then EXT and the signal type HDSDI SDSDI or VBS flashes when a valid signal is input to this unit For details see Recording video from external devices on page 94 Setting change and adjustment progress message display area For details see Change confirmation adjustment progress messages on page 173 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls MeIAJOAQ 1e1deuo 35 ejdeuj 36 Preparing a Power Supply For safety use only the Sony battery packs and AC adaptors listed below
61. 2001 Egenskaper for laserdiode B lgelengde 400 til 410 nm Str lingsvarighet Uavbrutt Utgangseffekt for laser 135 mW maks av pulsheyde 65 mW maks av CW Standard IEC60825 1 2001 This label is located inside the outside panel of the unit For USA CAUTION Laser radiation when open and SURE seam ON Denna etikett finns pa CLASS 2 LASER RADIATION apparatens ovansida WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM ATTENTION Denne maerkat sidder EX EU apparatets overste VORSICHT Mansi aue panel SPERREN AUSSER FUNKTION NICHT IN DEN STRAHL SEHEN ARSEL LASERSTRALING AF KLASSE 2 VED ABNING OG OMGAELSE AF LASEANORDNINGER STIR IKKE IND LYSSTRALEN kyltti sijaitsee laitteen yl pinnalla ADVARSEL LASERSTR LING KLASSE 2 DEKSELET ER PENT OG LASENE UTE AV FUNKSJON IKKE STIRR INN STR LEN Dette merket er ONING ia plassert p oversiden av produktet VARO n SEN CAUTION The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure VAROITUS LAITTEEN KAYTTAMINEN MUULLA KUIN TASSA KAYTTOOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KAYTTAJAN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTAVALLE NAKYMATTOMALLE LASERSA
62. AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector 4 Switch the input level to match the sensitivity of the microphone used Switch the input level by changing the REAR MIC REF setting on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu factory default setting is 60 dB For details see page 150 XLR connection automatic detection function With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector the input from that connector is automatically selected for audio recording regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch The XLR connection automatic detection function can be switched on or off on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu with the REAR XLR AUTO item If the input level on this unit is not at an appropriate setting for the microphone sensitivity loud sounds may be distorted and the signal to noise ratio may be affected In order for the AUDIO IN CH 1 and CH 2 connectors on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V power supply female XLR connectors 3 pin are fitted If the microphone cable has a female connector use an adaptor When you detach a CAC 12 Microphone Holder once you have attached to the camcorder be careful not to lose the two screws fixing the CAC 12 in step 1 After detaching the CAC 12 be sure to put the two screws back into their original places Attaching a UHF portable tuner
63. BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S Lithium ion Battery Pack AC power using the AC DN2B DN10 AC adaptor Using a battery pack When a BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S Battery Pack is used the camcorder will operate continuously for the time shown below Model name Operating time BP GL95 Approx 120 minutes BP GL65 Approx 75 minutes BP L60S Approx 75 minutes BP L80S Approx 100 minutes The battery pack operating time depends on the frequency of use of the battery pack and the ambient temperature when used Before use charge the battery pack with a charger suitable for each battery For details on the battery charging procedure refer to the battery charger operation manual Note on using the battery pack A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged To attach the battery pack 1 Pressthe battery pack against the back of the camcorder aligning the line on the side of the battery pack with the matching line on the camcorder Preparing a Power Supply BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S Align these lines 2 Slide the battery pack down until its LOCK arrow points at the matching line on the camcorder Wm Q EX c Qe Sn LOCK arrow Matching line on the camcorder If the battery pack is not attached correctly the terminal may be damaged To detach the battery pack Holding the release button in pull the battery pack up Release button
64. CHAPTER button to display the chapter thumbnail screen 4 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The thumbnail selection is confirmed and an I cursor appears at the bottom of the Clip List Add screen in the Scene Selection window The I cursor indicates the location where the currently selected sub clips will be inserted To display the total duration after addition of the selected clips Press the SHIFT button D In the Scene Selection window move the I cursor to the location where you want to insert the clip The existing thumbnails arrange themselves to the left and right of the I cursor 6 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The sub clips are added at the I cursor position and you return to the clip list thumbnail screen You can check the results of the addition in that screen 1 Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add more clips 8 Save the clip list see page 119 In step 1 you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the SET S SEL button with the SHIFT button held down To reorder sub clips See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip list thumbnail screen select the thumbnails of the sub clips that you want to move multiple selections possible 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Move Sub Clips and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Clip List Move screen appears 006 001 034 EmM TC 00 04
65. Deteriorating playback conditions Deteriorating playback may be due to the following causes Scratches and dust on the disc surface This includes fingerprints dust from the air tar from cigarette smoke and so on Scratches and soiling which occur before recording are not a problem because they are registered in advance as defects and recording avoids them However scratches and soiling which occur after recording can lead to deteriorating playback conditions Aging of disc recording layers Over several decades the recording layers of optical discs can age and cause deteriorating playback conditions Deteriorating laser diodes performance The performance of the laser diodes used in optical heads can worsen with age leading to deteriorating playback conditions Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an approximate guide to when it is time to replace optical heads To prevent playback conditions from deteriorating Pay attention to the following points when handling discs Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs directly with your hands Do not store for long periods in locations which are dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans Do not store for long periods under high temperatures or in locations exposed to direct sunlight Basic Procedure for Shooting If playback conditions have deteriorated Read errors occur when playback conditions continue to deteriorate When a read error occurs the mess
66. During recording and playback while the ACCESS indicator is lit be careful never to remove the battery pack Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing the battery pack Using AC power When using the AC DN10 AC adaptor Mount an AC DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as a battery pack then connect to the AC power supply The AC DNIO can supply up to 100 W of power To AC outlet T Attaching the Viewfinder When the viewfinder is attached do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun Direct sunlight can enter through the eyepiece be focused in the viewfinder and cause fire The viewfinder is supplied separately suonejedeJjg z 1e1deuj Attaching the HDVF 20A C35W Note When attaching the viewfinder make notes of the following points Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling the viewfinder connector to the camcorder s VF connector If you make this connection when the camcorder power is on the viewfinder may not function properly Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the camcorder s VF connector If the coupling is loose noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not operate properly For more information about the connection of the viewfinder and camcorder contact a Sony service representative 1 Loosen the viewfinder left to right positioning ring attach the viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting shoe and 8 tighten
67. E01 SMI file is deleted an E MO1 XML file with the same name in the part is also deleted automatically Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write C S01 MXF 9 Proxy AV data MXF file generated Yes No No No No9 automatically when a C MXF file is created 0001 to 9999 Other files Files other than the above a The C part can be changed to a user defined name b When the C part of a C MXF file name is changed a C S01 MXF file with the same name in the C part is generated automatically c When a C MXF file is created a C SO1 MXF file with the same name in the part is generated automatically d When a C MXF file is deleted the C SO1 MXF file with the same name in the part is also deleted automatically Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory suoneJedo e l4 8 saideyo 198 Overview UserData directory File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write Any file Yes Yes Yes 9 Yes Yes a UTF 8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length Depending on the character type file names including extension may be limited to 21 characters General directory The following directory operations are possible in the UserData directory Directory creation up to
68. Fitting the fog proof filter Replace the protecting filter on the packing ring with the fog proof filter Be sure to correctly assemble the fog proof filter the packing ring and the eyecup so that the reassembled eyepiece is waterproof When cleaning the fog proof filter wipe it very gently with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti fogging coating Note about the battery terminal The battery terminal of this unit the connector for battery packs and AC adaptors is a consumable part The unit may not operate properly if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or deformed by shock or vibrations or if they become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use If you notice bending deformation or surface corrosion contact your dealer or a Sony service representative as soon as possible to have the battery terminal replaced Periodic inspections are recommended to keep the unit working properly and to prolong its usable lifetime Contact your dealer or a Sony service representative for more information about inspections Maintenance eoueuejure N 6 1 215 6 1 2 216 Operation Warnings If a problem occurs when the camcorder is powered or is being operated a warning is issued by various visible and audible indicators These visible and audible indicators are n the status display on the LCD monitor a warning message in the Layout of the table of warning
69. GAMMA TABLE STD HG Selects the gamma type STD Standard gamma HG Hyper gamma GAM TABLE STD 1to5to6 Selects the standard gamma type 1 Corresponds to SD camcorder 2 x 4 5 gain 3 x 3 5 gain 4 Corresponds to SMPTE 240M 5 Corresponds to ITU R709 6 x 5 0 gain GAM TABLE HG 1to4 Selects the hyper gamma type 1 32596 to 10096 2 460 to 100 3 325 to 109 4 460 to 109 Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 1 2 141 pejreijeq pue s ejds q 9 4 2 142 No Page Item Settings Description 05 BLACK BLACK GAMMA OFF ON Turns the black gamma GAMMA correction on or off BLACK GAM RANGE LOW L MID H MID Sets the range affected by black HIGH gamma MASTER BLK 99 to 99 Adjusts the master black gamma GAMMA RBLACK GAMMA 99 to 99 Sets the correction curve of the R black gamma G BLACK GAMMA 99 to 99 Sets the correction curve of the G black gamma B BLACK GAMMA 99 to 99 Sets the correction curve of the B black gamma TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the output signal of TEST OUT connector 06 KNEE KNEE OFF ON Turns the knee correction circuit on or off KNEE POINT 50 0 to 95 0 to Sets the knee point level 109 0 KNEE SLOPE 99 to 99 Set the knee slope level KNEE SATURATION OFF ON Turns the knee saturation function on or off KNEE SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets
70. MENU ON OFF switch OFF Unsaved current clip list Save or clear 2 If this unit is connected to a remote computer by FTP log out from the FTP session see page 205 3 Connect the p LINK S400 connector on this unit to the i LINK IEEE1394 connector on the remote computer using an i LINK cable Windows recognizes this unit as a removable disc and displays one of the following icons on the remote computer s taskbar Windows XP 5 Windows Vista al The remote computer is now able to perform file operations when a disc is inserted into this unit You will not be able to log in if you put the unit into the state described in step 1 after connecting the cable To log in disconnect the cable put the unit into the state described in step 1 and connect it again When you make your first FAM connection The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog appears when you connect this unit to your computer Select Install the software automatically Recommended and then click the Next button Click the Finish button when the software installation finishes Operation limitations during FAM connections With the exception of the EJECT button recording buttons and playback control buttons are disabled VDR of this unit cannot be controlled from devices connected to the REMOTE connector 8 pin and i LINK S400 connector Operating on files 1 Start Explorer Check that a drive letter has been assigned to this unit The dr
71. MENU knob to display EXT 3 Select EXT VIDEO SOURCE and turn the MENU knob to select the desired signal to be recorded As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows HDSDI D SDSDI lt gt 2 1 HDSDI cannot be selected when an SD recording format is selected 2 Does not appear when the optional CBK SC02 Analog Composite Input Board is not installed After you complete this setting you can record the video signals of external devices by inputting the SDI signals selected in step 3 to the SDI IN OPTION connector Recording analog composite signals with the CBK SCO02 installed When the optional CBK SCO2 Analog Composite Input Board is installed in this unit you can record analog composite signals input to the GENLOCK IN connector When an HD recording format MPEG HD422 50 or MPEG HD420 HQ SP is selected analog composite signals are upconverted to HD signals before recording Even if the GENLOCK item on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to OFF the unit automatically genlocks to external video signals that are input to the GENLOCK IN connector When GENLOCK is set to OFF the genlock is cancelled when the input of external video signals stops and the unit switches to camera shooting 1 Display the SOURCE SEL page of the OPERATION menu 2 Select REC VIDEO SOURCE and turn the MENU knob to display EXT 3 Select EXT VIDEO SOURCE and turn the MENU knob to disp
72. Playback clip list 115 freeze frame 79 normal 79 Index 239 240 search result 108 Plug 31 Power saving function 182 Power source voltage battery remaining ca pacity 34 Power supply 36 POWER switch 15 PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch 27 PREV button 22 Protection cover of the audio control section 22 Protection cover of the GUI screen operations section 22 R REC indicator 32 REC START button 18 Recording using memory cache 82 Recording format 55 Recording review 78 Red tally indicator 32 Remaining battery capacity indicator 26 Remaining clips display 35 Remaining disc capacity 34 Remaining disc capacity indicator 26 REMOTE connector 30 Remote control unit connecting 53 RESET RETURN button 23 Resolution 24 Retake function 88 Scene editing 114 finding 106 107 playback 108 Scene file loading 192 saving 190 Scene selection 114 Scrollbar 98 SDIIN OPTION connector 28 SDI OUT 1 connector 30 SDI OUT 2 connector 30 SET S SEL button 27 Setting change and adjustment progress mes sage display area 35 Index SHIFT button 27 Shooting advanced operations 81 basic procedure 77 Shortcut list 125 Shot data recording 175 Shot ID setting 176 Shot mark recording 81 Shoulder pad 17 adjusting position 52 Shoulder strap fitting 16 Shoulder strap using 51 Shutter mode 61 SHUTTER selector 18 Shutter speed 34 62 Skip scroll 105 Slow shutter function 63 SLS Slow Speed Shutt
73. S on the lens For details refer to the lens operation manual 1 Hunting Repeated brightening and darkening of the image resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot be made If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed normally an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen Possible messages are listed below Error message Meaning WHITE NG The white video level is LOW LEVEL too low Either open the lens iris or increase the gain WHITE NG The color temperature is COLOR TEMP too high HIGH WHITE NG The color temperature is COLOR TEMP LOW too low WHITE NG Adjustment could not be TIME LIMIT completed within the standard number of attempts WHITE NG The white area could not POOR WHITE be checked AREA WHITE NG The white video level is OVER LEVEL too high Either stop down the lens iris or change the ND filter If any of the above error messages is displayed retry the white balance adjustment If the error message occurs again an internal check is necessary For information about this internal check refer to the Maintenance Manual Bunoous 104 suyas pue sjueunsn py e If you have no time to adjust the white balance Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST This makes it possible to automatically set the white balance to 5600K factory default value by p
74. When the disc exchange cache function is enabled the following procedure allows you to exchange discs while continuing to record 1 Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording The REC recording red tally indicator lights in the viewfinder and the tally indicator lights 2 Press the EJECT button with the unit still in the recording state Advanced Operations for Shooting Dunoous y 87 Bunooug y je1deuo 88 The REC recording red tally indicator in the viewfinder and the tally indicator flash once per second and the disc is ejected If the message DISC FULL appears You can continue recording because video and audio continue to be saved to internal memory Press the EJECT button and continue to step 3 Do not stop recording before pressing the EJECT button If you stop recording the unit will stop storing video and audio in internal memory and this function will not work 3 Quickly remove the disc insert a formatted blank disc and close the cover When the disc is loaded the REC recording red tally indicator in the viewfinder and the tally indicator change to lit and recording continues If the REC indicator and tally indicator begin flashing rapidly during the disc exchange If the indicators change to flashing twice per second that means that the unit s internal memory is almost full Complete the disc exchange quickly Recording may
75. a file in the specified path on this unit to the current directory on the remote computer Syntax RETR SP path name lt CRLF gt Input example RETR Clip C0001 MXF STOR Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on the remote computer to the current directory on this unit Depending on the type of file transferred the following items are created C MXF file gt C MOI XML file metadata C MO2 KLV file user metadata C S01 MXF file proxy AV data ForC MXF files the UMID of the copy source file is not saved However it is saved if an immediately preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been issued E EOLSMI file 2 9 E MOI XML file metadata 1 0001 to 9999 2 0001 to 0099 3 The unit can handle files with user defined names in the C and E parts For C MXF files some data such as file header metadata may be missing Depending on the transfer destination directory and the file type transfer may not be possible For C MXF files the UMID of the copy source file is not saved However it is saved if an immediately preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been issued For details see File operation restrictions page 196 Syntax STOR SP lt path name gt lt CRLF gt Input example STOR Edit E0001E01 SMI RNFR RNTO Rename a file Specify the file to be renamed with the RNFR command and specify the new name with the RNTO command Always fo
76. can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the front microphone input The correspondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows MIC CH1 LEVEL Audio recording level of channel 1 Setting Control SIDEI LEVEL CH 1 control on the left FRONT MIC LEVEL control F S1 LEVEL CH 1 control linked with MIC LEVEL control MIC CH2 LEVEL Audio recording level of Bunoous 104 suyas pue sjuswysnipy e Je deyo channel 2 Setting Control SIDE2 LEVEL CH 2 control on the right FRONT MIC LEVEL control F S2 LEVEL CH 2 control linked with MIC LEVEL control When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control and LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls linked together if the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls are set to 0 the audio signals on channels and 2 cannot be recorded Check the position of the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls before adjusting the MIC LEVEL control Recording audio on channels 3 and 4 Selecting the recorded audio You can select the audio recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches or you can have the selection made automatically as follows Adjusting the Audio Level 67 10 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e Ja deyo 68 To automatically select the same audio as on channels 1 and 2 On the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu setthe AUDIO CH3 4 MODE item to 1 2 CH 3 switch
77. changed COLOR TEMP B Displays reference color Sets the color temperature of temperature WHITE B C TEMP BAL B 99 to 99 Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN B 99 to 99 Only the value of R GAIN is changed B GAIN B 99 to 99 Only the value of B GAIN is changed Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 03 BLACK FLARE MASTER BLACK 99 to 99 Adjusts the master black level R BLACK 99 to 99 Adjusts the R black level B BLACK 99 to 99 Adjusts the B black level MASTER FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the flare level of the master R FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the R flare level G FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the G flare level B FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the B flare level FLARE OFF ON Turns the flare correction circuit on or off TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the output signal of TEST OUT connector 04 GAMMA GAMMA OFF ON Turns the gamma correction function on or off STEP GAMMA 0 35 to 0 45 to 0 90 Sets the gamma correction curve by steps MASTER GAMMA 99 to 99 Sets the master gamma correction curve RGAMMA 99 to 99 Sets the R gamma correction curve GGAMMA 99 to 99 Sets the G gamma correction curve B GAMMA 99 to 99 Sets the B gamma correction curve TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the output signal of TEST OUT connector
78. changed reference value is retained until the power of the camcorder is turned off Even if the reference value is changed it reverts to the standard value every time the power is turned on To make the iris more open Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camera The iris stop indicators as shown in the following table appear in the upper part to the left of the F number in the iris indication Iris stop Indicator 0 25 0 5 0 75 1 To stop down the iris Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camera The iris stop indicators as shown in the following table appear in the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris indication Iris stop Indicator 0 25 0 5 0 75 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment 6 Opening the lens iris Iris opened by 1 stop two e c EB F5 6 segments Iris opened by 0 5 stop one segment Stopping down the lens iris Iris stopped down by 1 stop two r3 F5 i 6 segments Iris stopped down by 0 5 stop one segment When the RM B150 Remote Control Unit is connected The IRIS control knob of the RM B150 can be used for lens iris setting In this case the indicator is not displayed To set the automatic iris window 1 Follow the procedure of
79. color compensation values CLEAR ND EXEC Clear ND filter color compensation values OFFSET Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 20 AUTO AUTO BLK EXEC Executes the auto black shading correction SHADING SHADING function RESET BLK SHD EXEC Clear black shading compensation values TEST OUT VBS Y R G B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT SELECT LCD connector MASTER 6dB 3dB 0dB Temporarily sets the master gain value GAIN TMP 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB 21 APR APR EXEC Suppresses white flecks by executing the automatic pixel noise reduction function APR SLS EXEC Suppresses white flecks in SLS Slow Speed Shutter mode by executing the automatic pixel noise reduction function The execution time for this function is about 30 minutes More time may be required when temperatures inside the unit are low APR PRESET EXEC Deletes white flecks data that was added by execution of the APR and automatic black balance adjustment functions 22 NETWORK DHCP ENABLE Selects whether to enable automatic acquisition of DISABLE the IP address from a DHCP server IP ADDRESS XXX XXX XXX XXX Sets the IP address 192 168 1 10 SUBNET MASK xxx xxx xxx xxx Sets the subnet mask 255 255 255 0 DEF GATEWAY xxx xxx xxx xxx Sets the default gateway 0 0 0 0 LINK SPEED AUTO 10Mbps Sets the communications speed 100Mbps DUPLEX AUTO FULL Sets the duplex mode HALF
80. commercial and light industrial E3 urban outdoors E4 controlled EMC environment ex TV studio The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku Tokyo Japan The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70327 Stuttgart Germany For any service or guarantee matters please refer to the addresses given in separate service or guarantee documents For the customers in Taiwan only n AVERTISSEMENT Cette tiquette est plac e l int rieur du panneau ext rieur de l appareil EUR For USA Laser radiation when open and Interlock defeated DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM For EUROPE CAUTI CLASS 2 LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM ATTENTION RADIATIONS LASER DE CLASSE 2 EN CAS DOUVERTURE ET DE DESACTIVATION DES VERROUS NE PAS REGARDER LE FAISCEAU VORSICHT KLASSE 2 LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN GEOFFNET UND SPERREN AUSSER FUNKTION NICHT IN DEN STRAHL SEHEN ADVARSEL LASERSTR LING AF KLASSE 2 VED ABNING OG OMGAELSE AF LASEANORDNINGER STIR IKKE IND LYSSTRALEN RSEL LASERSTRALING I KLASSE 2 NAR DEKSELET ER APENT OG L SENE AV FUNKSJON IKKE STIRR INN STRALEN VARNING KLASS 2 LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPNAD SPARRMEKANISMER AR FRIGJORDA TITTA INTE IN LASERSTRALEN VARO 2 LASERSATEILYA ALA KATSO SATEESEEN
81. connector 17 Lens file selecting 183 Lenslockinglever 17 Lens mount 17 Lens mountcap 17 Lens mount securing rubber 17 Lens mounting 43 Lid of the disc compartment 28 LIGHT connector 17 Light fitting shoe 16 LIGHT switch 15 LINE AES EBU MIC selectors 30 Line input audio equipment connecting 49 Live amp Play function 79 Maintenance 214 MAINTENANCE menu 128 146 Marker display setting 174 Memory Stick 235 handling 186 jumping to file related menu page 193 loading saved data 189 saving user menu data 187 Memory Stick compartment 21 Menu disc menu 103 setting menu list 129 setting menu operations 164 setting menu organization 126 thumbnail menu 101 MENU button 27 MENU knob 18 MENU ON OFF switch 21 Message changeconfirmation adjustmentprogress 173 operation alarm 219 warning 217 MIC IN 48 V connector 17 MIC LEVEL control 19 Microphone holder 32 Microphone connecting 45 MONITOR knob 19 MONITOR switches 19 Monochrome LCD 22 status display 23 xepu ND filter 18 Network connector 29 NEXT button 22 Noise suppression function 145 0 OPERATION menu 127 129 Operation alarm message display area 34 Optional components 230 Output signal selecting 179 OUTPUT DCC switch 20 Ownership information 185 P PAINT menu 127 140 PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software 231 PEAKING control 31 Picture Cache function 82 Pixel noise reduction function 157 Planning metadata 93 122 PLAY PAUSE button 22
82. decrease in inverse proportion V V DTL only enabled 09 SD DETAIL SD DETAIL OFF ON Turns the SD detail correction on or off SD DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the general level of the SD detail signal SD CRISPENING 99 to 99 Sets the SD crispening level SD DTL WHT LIMIT 99 to 99 Sets the SD detail white limiter SD DTL BLK LIMIT 99 to 99 Sets the SD detail black limiter SD LEVEL DEPEND OFF ON Turns the SD level depend function on or off SD LV DEPEND LVL 99 to 99 Sets the level of the SD level depend SD DTL FREQUENCY 99 to 99 Sets the frequency of the SDH detail signal SD DTL RATIO 99 to 99 Sets the level of the SD V detail signal SD CROSS COLOR When NTSC AREA or NTSC AREA is selected on the FORMAT page 99 to 99 Sets the SD cross color reduction level Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsig 9 1 2 143 pue s ejds q 9 4 2 144 No Page Item Settings Description 10 SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL OFF ON Turns on or off all of channels 1 2 and 3 for the color detail function SKIN DETECT Moves to color detection page Executes the color detail function SKIN AREA IND OFF ON Turns on and off the function that displays a zebra pattern where color was detected SKIN DTL SELECT 1 2 3 Selects the type of the color de
83. defined names to clips and clip lists The following standard format names are assigned automatically to clips and clip lists that are created or recorded by XDCAM devices Clips C0001 MXF to C9999 MXF Clip lists E0001E01 SMI to E0099E01 SMI When you record or create clips and clip lists you can assign user defined names instead of the standard format names Assigning meaningful names to clips and clip lists can facilitate file management Limitations Letters numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2 0 character set can be used However the following control characters and symbols cannot be used Control characters U 0000 to U 001F U 007F Symbols lt gt Advanced Operations for Shooting y 91 Bunooug y je1deuo 92 Depending on the character type the length of name part may be limited to 14 characters The limit for ASCII characters is 56 characters file name extensions are converted automatically to uppercase Titles are used as user defined clip names on this unit Therefore the available characters are limited to those supported by the title function Files generated along with clips and clip lists are assigned the same names the C or E part of the following file names Clips Metadata files C MO0I XML user metadata file C M02 KLV proxy AV data files C S01 MXF Clip lists Metadata files E MOI XML
84. described above 2 Start the command prompt Enter ftp lt SP gt IP address gt and press the Enter key lt SP gt refers to a space For example if the IP address of this unit is set to 192 168 001 010 enter ftp 192 168 1 10 Refer to the Windows help for more information about the FTP command If the connection succeeds you are prompted to enter a user name 4 Enter the user name admin and press the Enter key When the user name is verified your are prompted to enter a password D Enter the password and press the Enter key The password is set to pdw 700 when the unit is shipped from the factory The login is complete when the password is verified See Command list page 205 for the protocol supported by this unit If the connection times out This unit terminates FTP connections if no command is received within 90 seconds of the last command If this occurs log out see the next section and repeat steps 2 to 4 If you power this unit off during an FTP connection the data transferred thus far is discarded To log out To log out after finishing file operations enter QUIT at the command prompt and press the Enter key Command list This unit supports standard protocol see the next section and extended protocol see page 208 To execute FTP commands you must install application software such as PDZ 1 on your computer The commands supported by applicat
85. details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 7OSHOT ID gt I I I I 1 D D D D gt 4 Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor 2 Select one of ID 1 to ID 4 and press the MENU knob A Wi mark appears over the first character position in the string and characters can now be input 017OSHOT ID 110 1 a ooo00000 OOOO00000 oo00000000 H 7 amp 0 x 012345678 9 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ARSTUUWXYZE labcdefshisk lImnorarstuvuxyz INS DEL RET ESC END Enter or change the shot ID When you are entering the whole shot ID go to Q Turn the MENU knob to move the Bii mark to the character which you want to change then press the MENU knob oooooooo0 ooOooo000 oo0000000 HS amp k 012345678 9 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOP GRSTUUUXYZ x Tabcdefshijk 1mnoprarstuuuxsSz INS DEL RET ESC END 2 Turn the MENU knob until the Bl mark moves to the character position that you want to select then press the MENU knob 7OSHOT ID TOP 1 OOOOO0000000 ooo0000000000 4 amp 7012345678 9 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOP GRSTU UUXYZ X Tabcdefshi3k 1mnoprarstuuuxsSsz INS DEL RET ESC END 1 D 1 D 2 D 3 000000000000 D 4 IH 4 Repeat step 3 for each of the
86. for the lens 1 Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens mount cap from the lens mount 2 Align the center pin on the lens with the center slot in the lens mount and insert the lens into the mount 3 Holding the lens in place push the lens locking lever down to lock the lens Tf the lens is not firmly locked it may come off while the camcorder is being used This could cause a serious accident Make sure the lens is firmly locked It is recommended that the lens mount Mounting the Lens suonejedeJjg z 1e1deuj 43 suonejedeJjg 2 14 1 2 44 securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as illustrated above Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps Adjusting the Flange Focal Length Adjusting the Flange Focal Length If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom from telephoto to wide angle adjust the flange focal length the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane Make this adjustment after mounting or changing the lens The position of the controls for adjusting the flange focal length vary somewhat from lens to lens Check the identification of the various controls in the lens manual S SE m gt A Set the iris to manual 2 Open the iris Place the flange focal length adjustment chart about 3 m 10 ft away from the camera lit well enough to provide a satisfactory video
87. items 172 setting 175 status display 32 Viewfinder cable 32 Viewfinder fitting shoe 16 Viewfinder front to back positioning knob 17 Viewfinder front to back positioning lever 16 Viewfinder left to right positioning ring 16 VTR SAVE indicator 32 xepu W WARNING indicator 22 Warning indicator area 25 Warnings 216 WHITE BAL switch 20 White balance adjusting 57 specifying offset 183 White balance memory 34 Wireless microphone reception level 33 X XLR connection automatic detection function 47 Z ZEBRA switch 31 Zoom position 33 Index 241 242 Index The material contained in this manual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation
88. may be substandard If defects are detected repeatedly exchange the disc Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY indication indicator xt b e e gt x b Problem VDR operation Action to take Condensation on the optical pickup Recording playback continues but stops when an error occurs on the drive Stop recording playback turn off the power then turn it on again and wait until the HUMID indicator disappears Before Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY indication indicator DISC flash 0 se gt E Problem VDR operation Action to take Disc almost full Operation continues Be prepared to exchange the disc Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator se S as only when recording the 300th clip Problem VDR operation Action to take Nine or fewer clips remain until the upper limit of 300 is reached Operation continues Be prepared to exchange the disc Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator DISC andE 8 35 9 5 9 Problem VDR operation Action to take Disc full Recording stops Exchange the disc Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator EX rod 5 Sabre a Problem VDR opera
89. memory and up to 100 scene files in a Memory Stick For example first adjust the settings to shoot a rehearsal of a particular scene and then save them as a scene file Then load that file before the actual shooting so that you can quickly recreate setup conditions of the rehearsal Reference files Reference files save the reference values that are set when STANDARD is executed in the SCENE FILE page of the PAINT menu You can save one reference file in the internal memory of the unit and one in a Memory Stick Lens files Lens files save the setting data used to compensate for the characteristics of lenses such Menu Organization as flare white shading and auto iris gain You can save up to 32 lens files in the internal memory of the unit and up to 100 lens files in a Memory Stick DIAGNOSIS menu This menu shows the digital hours meter the ROM version and information about the internal device status of the camcorder Menu List Tips The bold faced numbers designate the pages that have been registered in the USER menu at the factory The following lists include items and settings that appear only when an option board or separately sold software is installed The bold faced settings are the factory default settings The initial value of items with a setting range of 99 to 99 is 0 When the setup value in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses the value is a relative value Th
90. messages below and a warning indication Layout of the table of warning messages The WARNING indicator on the side panel of the camcorder C and a warning sound from the speaker and earphones D In the viewfinder a warning message and an indicator above or below the viewfinder screen The volume of the warning sound can be adjusted with the ALARM knob Set the ALARM knob to the minimum position to suppress the sound Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALY BATT indication indicator B C D E E Problem VDR operation Action to take The operation of the WARNING indicator and the indicators in the viewfinder is represented by graphic symbols as follows X Continuous 3 1 flash s Je 4 flashes s The warning sounds are represented by graphic symbols as follows Continuous beep 1 beep s 4 beeps s Operation Warnings Warning messages ILL REC Verify ERR Cache Full Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT E indication indicator 3 xt o MO x m Problem VDR operation Action to take 2 9 Recording error Recording stops Turn off the power and El consult a Sony service a8 representative Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY indica
91. not start immediately if you insert an unformatted disc or a disc that already contains a large number of clips As a result the video and audio may be interrupted Retaking the most recent clip A retake function is available making it easy to erase and retake the most recently recorded clip To use the retake function you need to assign it to one of the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switches or COLOR TEMP button in advance For details see Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches on page 179 Example After recording clip 3 you want to delete it and record a new clip 3 after clip 2 Clip 1 Clip 2 Clips New clip Advanced Operations for Shooting To retake the most recent clip With recording paused or after the end of a recording review see page 78 proceed as follows 1 Hold down the button to which the retake function has been assigned While the button is held down the last frame of the recorded clip and the message PUSH RET FOR CLIP DELETE appears 2 Inthis state press the RET button The message DELETING LAST CLIP appears and the processing for deleting the last recorded clip begins When the deleting has finished the message LAST CLIP WAS DELETED appears If an operation other than recording review which is not a retake operation is carried out after the last clip has been recorded the retake function does not work even when the camcorder is in the recording pause st
92. not use the EJECT button to eject discs Always eject discs from the computer Do not disconnect the i LINK cable during a FAM connection Doing so may result in unstable operation Always eject any loaded disc before disconnecting the i LINK cable Operating on files 1 Start the Finder Check to be sure that a drive has been assigned to this unit 2 Operate from the Finder on the files on the disc in this unit You can operate in the same way that you operate on local drives and files on network computers If you power this unit off during a FAM connection the data transferred thus far is discarded All file operations are not possible for some types of files For details see File operation restrictions page 196 To eject discs from a remote computer Click the eject button to the right of the icon for this unit in the Finder or drag the icon for this unit from the Finder to the Trash Exiting file operations Note Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 and 2 1 Eject the disc by clicking the eject button to the right of the icon for this unit in the Finder or by dragging the icon for this unit from the Finder to the Trash 2 Disconnect the i LINK cable as required To make a reconnection To reconnect after exiting file operations do one of the following depending on whether an 1 LINK cable is connected i LINK cable is not connected Connect this unit and a remote computer
93. number cannot be communicated load the lens file corresponding to the lens model name same as the ON setting LID EXEC Display the name of the connected lens that supports serial communications L MF EXEC Display the manufacturer of the connected lens that supports serial communications 07 LENS FILE 2 LENS M VMOD 9 99 to 99 Adjusts the lens file V SAW shading compensation LENS CENTER H 480 to 0 to 479 Compensates the horizontal position of lens file center marker LENS CENTER V 9 270 to 0 to 269 Compensates the vertical position of lens file center marker TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector LENS R FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the lens file flare R LENS G FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the lens file flare G LENS B FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the lens file flare B LENS W R OFST 99 to 99 Adjusts the white balance R compensation value of the lens file LENS W B OFST 99 to 99 Adjusts the white balance B compensation value of the lens file Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 JajdeyD 161 pue s ejds q 9 4 2 162 No Page Item Settings Description 08 LENS FILE3 SHADING CH SEL R G B TEST Selects the channel adjusted by this menu If TES
94. or the MENU knob Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required Save the clip list see page 119 To play the clip list See page 104 for more information about GUI screen operations To play using GUI screens 1 m the clip list thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the sub clip where you want to start play To start play from the start of the clip list Select the thumbnail of the first sub clip 2 Press the PLAY PAUSE button To play using the clip list playback screen 1 Display the clip list playback screen 2 Press the PREV button or the NEXT button to display the sub clip that you want to play To start play from the first sub clip Press the SHIFT PREV buttons to move to the start of the clip list 3 Press the PLAY PAUSE button To change the starting timecode of clip lists The timecode of clip lists is continuous timecode unrelated to the timecode of the original clips By default the timecode LTC of the start of the clip list is 00 00 00 00 but it can be set to any value See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Thumbnail Menu 2 Select Set Start Time Code and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Set Start Time Code screen appears Set Start Time Code TC MIN M Preset TC 00 00 00 00 OK Cancel Press the left or right arrow button to select the digit that you want to c
95. other data How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 SelectF ID and press the MENU knob A character table appears FO1OUSER FILE USER FILE LORD USER FILE SAVE eF ID 8 iH S amp 0 012345678 9 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP BRSTUUUXYZIYlabcdefshiJk 1mnorarstuuuxSz INS DEL RET ESC END Follow steps 3 and 4 described in Setting the shot ID on page 176 to enter characters 4 when you have finished entering the file ID turn the MENU knob to move B to END and press the MENU knob The entered file ID is now displayed USER 2USER FID USER File ID that has been set appears When you carry out a user file save operation see page 187 the set file ID is saved to the Memory Stick together with the data To select the file information items to be displayed You can select the user file information items to be displayed on the USER FILE SAVE page and USER FILE LOAD page P00 to P19 that are the pages used to save and call up the data to and from Memory Stick How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display a USER FILE LOAD page or USER FILE SAVE page of the USER FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu o
96. page of the SCENE FILE menu For details about item selection see the description of step 2 and following of To select the file information items to be displayed on page 189 Loading scene files How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 To load the scene file stored in the camcorder select the desired file number and press the MENU knob on the left of the file number changes to Wi The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file FO4OSCENE FILE SCENE 25 OS 5 OSTANDARD To cancel the selected scene file Turn the MENU knob to move to W and press the MENU knob again changes to O The camcorder returns to the settings before selecting this scene file To load a scene file saved in the Memory Stick Saving and Loading Scene Files Select SCENE RECALL and press the MENU knob The SCENE RECALL page appears 2 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears then press the MENU knob 8 Select the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message RECALL OK YES NO appears 3 To carry out the recall select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO When the loading is comp
97. power of the camcorder off Using the CD ROM manual The supplied CD ROM includes versions of the Operation Manual for the PDW 700 in English Japanese French German Italian Spanish and Chinese in PDF format Preparations The following program must be installed on your computer in order to read the Operation Manual contained on the CD ROM Adobe Reader Version 6 0 or higher If Adobe Reader is not installed you can download it from the following URL http www adobe com Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated the United States and or other countries To read the CD ROM manual To read the Operation Manual contained on the CD ROM do the following 1 Insert the CD ROM in your CD ROM drive A cover page appears automatically in your browser Foreword If it does not appear automatically in the browser double click on the index htm file on the CD ROM 2 Select and click on the Operation Manual that you want to read This opens the PDF file of the Operation Manual The files may not be displayed properly depending on the version of Adobe Reader In such a case install the latest version you can download from the URL mentioned in Preparations above If you have lost or damaged the CD ROM you can purchase a new one to replace it Contact a Sony service representative Features New 2 3 inch full HD PowerHAD FX CCDs IT Interline Transfer 2 4 inch prog
98. press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view To return to the previous screen Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To clear planning metadata See page 104 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Clear Planning Metadata and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to clear the planning metadata 3 Select and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The planning metadata is cleared from this unit s memory Disc Operations su 199 ND ul 1e1deu 128 SueeJog MH suonejedo 1 1 2 124 To switch the title display in the viewfinder When planning metadata is loaded into this unit you can select the format of the title to display in the viewfinder See page 104 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Settings and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob 3 Select Planning Clip Name in Clip Info Area and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob See page 33 for more information about the Clip Info Area 4 Select one of the following and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Off Do not display a title
99. recorded and press the MENU knob to display ON 3 Repeat the step 2 as necessary To record shot mark 1 2 When the camcorder is in recording or playback mode operate the lens RET button as follows Shot mark 1 Press the RET button once Shot mark 2 Press the RET button twice in rapid succession ShotMark1 or ShotMark2 appears in the viewfinder screen for about one second near the timecode display If the SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2 recording function has been assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switches and COLOR TEMP button you can also use that switch to record a SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2 essence mark On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches see page 179 Setting clip flags with switches You can set three types of clip flags OK NG KEEP during recording immediately after recording or during playback Setting these flags in each clip that you record makes it easy for editors and other colleagues to find and select the clips they need You can use switches on the unit to set these flags But before you can do so you need to assign the corresponding flag functions to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switches the COLOR TEMP button or the RET button on the lens see page 179 To set a clip flag During recording immediately after recording or during playback including search and still picture playback press the button to which the flag function has been assigned Press the button once at
100. recording regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch The XLR connection automatic detection function can be switched on or off on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu with the REAR XLR AUTO item Preparing the Audio Input System suonejedeJjg z e1deuj 49 gsajdeyo 50 Tripod Mounting 1 Attach the VCT 14 tripod adaptor not supplied to the tripod Tripod adaptor Camera mount 2 Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor Slide the camcorder forward along the groove in the adaptor until it clicks To remove the camcorder from the tripod adaptor Hold down the red button and pull the lever in the direction of the arrow Tripod Mounting The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position even after the camcorder is removed If this happens press the red button against the lever a second time and move the lever as shown above until the pin returns to the stowed position If the pin remains in the engaged position you will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor Connecting a Video Light With this camcorder you can use the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light powered by 12 V with maximum power consumption of 50 W f you connect the video light to the LIGHT connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT switch to AUTO you can turn the light on and off automatically as you start and stop the VDR operation
101. sampling 1080 1080 lines 1920 x 1080 frequency 720 720 lines 1280 x 720 24bit 24 bits 48 kHz 16bit 16 bits 48 kHz Video format Indicates the format of video being currently played back or recorded Indication Format Bit rate HD422 50 MPEG HD422 50 Mbps HD420 HQ SP MPEG HD420 35 25 18 Mbps Lp9 IMX 50 40 30 MPEG IMX 50 40 30 Mbps DVCAM DVCAM 25 Mbps LP is playback only System frequency Indicates the system frequency of video being currently played back or recorded If NTSC AREA is selected Indication Field or frame Scan mode rate 59 0i 59 94 fields per Interlace second 59 9P 59 94 frames per Progressive second Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Audio level indicators Indicates the audio recording or playback levels of channels 1 to 4 3 Status display PB Appears during playback NDF Appears when non drop frame timecode is selected EXT LK Appears when the internal timecode generator is locked to an external signal input to the TC IN timecode input connector HOLD Appears when the internal timecode generator is stopped Time counter display Switches displays of time counter timecode and user bits depending on the position of the DISPLAY switch When the HOLD CHAPTER button is pressed to hold the timecode value the timecode is displayed in the format shown below When the HOLD CHAPTER button is pressed again to release the hold the tim
102. screen in display mode 3 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 3 Place a white test card under the same lighting conditions as for the subject to be shot and zoom up to it Alternatively any white object such as a cloth or a wall can be used The absolute minimum white area is as follows Rectangle centered on the screen The lengths of the sides are 70 of the length and width of the screen The white object must be within the rectangle and have an area of at least 10 of the screen Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle Adjust the lens iris Manually adjusted lens set the iris to an appropriate setting Lens with automatic iris set the automatic manual switch on the lens to automatic Flick the AUTO W B BAL switch to WHT and then release the switch AUTO W B BAL switch The switch returns to the center position and the adjustment is executed During adjustment the message WHITE OP is displayed on the viewfinder screen in display mode 2 or 3 The white balance adjustment ends in about one second with the message shown in the following figure and the adjustment setting is automatically stored in the memory A or B that was selected in step 1 Approximate color temperature of the subject If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris the iris may hunt D during the adjustment To prevent this adjust the iris gain knob indicated as IG IS or
103. sort planning metadata You can sort planning metadata by operating in the same way as in sort clip lists page 121 However in step 3 select Sort Planning Metadata by The planning metadata will be displayed in the specified order the next time you load planning metadata To check planning metadata properties You can check the properties of the planning metadata that is loaded into this unit s memory including the date and time of creation and the clip titles See page 104 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Planning Metadata Properties and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Planning Metadata Properties screen appears Planning Metadata File Name LatestNews0034 AssignID Projections of world economic gt Created 21 FEB 2008 09 14 08 00 Modified 21 FEB 2008 09 14 08 00 Modified by Guillermo Arduino Title Clip 00006 Title2 none Material Gp 008 Horizontal Scroll 4 File Name Planning metadata file name Assign ID Assign ID Created Date and time of creation Modified Date and time of most recent modification Modified by Name of person who modified the file Title Title P Title2 Title 2 Material Gp Material group name 1 This can be set as the clip name see page 93 To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When gt or 4 mark is displayed for an item you can
104. switch see page 27 and the F RUN SET R RUN switch see page 27 this button resets the display as follows To reset Counter to 0 00 00 00 Settings of switches DISPLAY switch COUNTER DISPLAY switch TC PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch PRESET F RUN SET R RUN switch SET DISPLAY switch User bits data to 0000 00 U BIT 00 PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch PRESET F RUN SET R RUN switch SET Timecode to 00 00 00 00 a Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the disc those bits which can be used to record useful information for the user such as scene number shooting place etc For details see Setting the Time Data on page 69 This button returns to the previous screen when pressed during thumbnail display For details see GUI screen operations on page 104 DISPLAY switch This cycles the data displayed in the counter display through the sequence COUNTER TC and U BIT COUNTER Display the elapsed recording playback time hours minutes seconds frames TC Display timecode U BIT Display user bit data For details see Status Display on the LCD monitor and monochrome LCD on page 23 BRIGHT brightness button Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor backlight and turns the backlight of the monochrome LCD on and off Each press of the button selects the next setting in the order shown in the following table Sett
105. system on the disc to which you are trying to record Exchange or format the disc An A V phase error occurred during playback Stop the disc The lid of the disc compartment does not open Check the lid The lid of the disc compartment is not closed Close it securely There are no clips recorded on the disc Exchange for a recorded disc There is no disc loaded Insert a disc and try the operation again The operation is not possible while the disc is being played or recorded Stop the disc An operation was attempted while a disc was loading or unloading Wait for the disc to finish loading or unloading and try again The operation is not possible because the disc is at the top or end The disc is being automatically formatted Wait until the format ends The unit is writing to the file system Wait until writing finishes Cache REC Disc Exchag SB CLP mode No SEL List No List No SUB Clip SUB Clip NG SB CLP CL OVER DUR FAN Stopped DR FAN Stop NVRAM NG Update Err Unknown USB An attempt was made to perform an operation that cannot be performed when the picture cache function is enabled The operation will be ignored An attempt was made to perform an operation that cannot be performed when the disc exchange cache function is enabled The operation will be ignored An essence mark or clip flag operation was attempted wh
106. the AUDIO IN CH 3 and CH 4 switches To fit the WRR 862 when using a BP GL65 GL95 L60S L80S Battery Pack 1 Attach the WRR tuner fitting not supplied service part number A 8278 057 B to the back of the camcorder Use a Phillips type screwdriver to tighten the four screws placed in the tuner fitting For three of these screws insert the screwdriver through the corresponding hole and tighten the screw Make sure that all four screws are fully tightened Loosen the adjustment screws on the tuner fitting 3 Adjust the tuner fitting position for a BP GL65 GL95 L60S L80S Battery Pack to be attached and tighten the adjustment screws to fix its position 2 Attach the mount plate supplied with the WRR 862 About the WRR tuner fitting service part number A 8278 057 B contact a Sony service or sales representative Preparing the Audio Input System BP GL65 GL95 L60S L80S Adjustment screws Mount plate supplied with WRR 862 Phillips type screwdriver Attach the battery pack On how to attach the battery pack see To attach the battery pack on page 36 Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner fitting WRR 862 Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT connector of the camcorder and theaudio output cable to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector Set the switches as follows Set the LINE AES EBU MIC switch for the channel to which the audio output cable is attache
107. the clip thumbnail screen The thumbnails shown in the clip list thumbnail screen the expand thumbnail screen and the chapter thumbnail screen cannot be changed To select a clip index picture while viewing the video See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip whose index picture you want to change 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Select Index Picture Select Index screen appears Select Index Navigating sibling relati 018 036 TCR 01 09 16 13 OK You can play and search with this screen 4 Use the PLAY PAUSE button or F REV F FWD buttons to display the frame you want You can also perform a jog operation by turning the MENU knob D Press the up arrow button to select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To select index pictures by using the expand and chapter functions After using the expand function see page 106 or chapter function see page 107 to find a frame you can set that frame as the index picture of the clip The following example explains how to do so from the expand thumbnail screen See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the expand thumbnail screen select the thumbnail to set as the index picture 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Set Index Picture A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to set the curren
108. the delay in the audio received from the wireless receiver is zero 0 0ms 8 0ms Sets the amount of anticipated wireless system delay for cases in several wireless systems are being used over a device such as an audio mixer Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 10 TIMECODE TC OUT AUTO GENE Selects the timecode signal output AUTO Outputs the timecode generator output during recording and outputs the timecode reader output during playback GENE Outputs the timecode generator output during recording and playback DF NDF DF NDF Sets DF or NDF mode When SYSTEM DF Drop frame mode FREQUENCY is NDF Non drop frame mode set to 59 941 EXT LK DE NDF INT EXT Selects either internal setting or external setting for When SYSTEM DF NDF FREQUENCY is INT Internal set to 59 94i EXT External EXT LK UBIT INT EXT Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks to an INT or an EXT source when the timecode is locked to an external source INT Internal lock EXT External lock LTC UBIT FIX TIME Sets the data to be recorded in U BIT of LTC FIX Records the data that is set by the user TIME Records the present time VITC UBIT SD FIX TIME Sets the data to be recorded in U BIT of VITC When the CBKZ FIX Records the data that is set by the user MDO is installed TIME Records the present time WATCH AUTO OFF ON Matches the time of the internal clock with the time ADJ data of the u
109. the direction shown on the rubber cap This ejects the disc 4 Close the rubber cover firmly You need not return the screw to its original position after taking out the disc Turning on the power makes the disc compartment mechanism operable again Do not touch the disc or try to forcibly remove it until it has been completely ejected Formatting a disc When using a new disc An unused disc requires no formatting operation The disc is automatically formatted so that it is ready to use when loaded into this unit To format a disc on which material is recorded See page 124 for details of formatting a disc When a recorded disc is formatted all the data on the disc is erased Even locked clips see page 112 are also erased Handling of discs when recording does not end normally salvage function Recording processing does not end normally if for example the battery pack is removed during recording or if the power cord is disconnected during recording Because the file system is not updated video and audio data recorded in real time is not recognized as files and clip contents recorded up to that point are lost However this unit has a salvage function which can hold losses to the minimum by reconstructing clips on such discs Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when the POWER switch is set to OFF and when battery exhaustion is detected because the unit does not become powered off until aft
110. the knee saturation level WHITE CLIP OFF ON Turns the white clipping function on or off WHITE CLIP LEVEL NTSC 90 0 to Adjusts the white clipping level 108 0 to 109 0 PAL 90 0 to 105 0 to 109 0 07 DETAIL 1 DETAIL OFF ON Sets the detail correction function on or off APERTURE OFF ON Turns the aperture correction function on or off DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the general level of the detail signal APERTURE LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the aperture correction level DTL H V RATIO 99 to 99 Sets the level of the V detail signal CRISPENING 99 to 99 Sets the crispening level LEVEL DEPEND OFF ON Turns the level depend function on or off LEVEL DEPEND LVL 99 to 99 Sets the level of the level depend DETAIL FREQUENCY 99 to 99 Sets the frequency of the H detail signal Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 08 DETAIL 2 KNEE APERTURE OFF ON Turns the knee aperture function on or off KNEE APT LVL 99 to 99 Sets the knee aperture level DETAIL LIMIT 99 to 99 Sets the both detail black and white limiters DTL WHTLMT 99 to 99 Sets the detail white limiter DTL BLK LMT 99 to 99 Sets the detail black limiter DTL V BLK LMT 99 to 99 Sets the V detail black limiter V DTL CREATION NAM G R G Y Selects the source signal of the V DTL signal H V CONTROL MODE H V V Selects the operation mode of DTL H V RATIO on the DETAIL 1 page H V H and V increase and
111. the position where you want to set the flag The specified flag is set and ClpFlg OK NG or KEEP appears near the timecode display in the viewfinder for about three seconds To clear a clip flag During recording or playback press the button to which the flag function has been assigned Press the button twice in rapid succession The flag is cleared and ClpFlg DEL appears for about three seconds You can also set and clear clip flags from a GUI screen For details see Setting clip flags page 112 Advanced Operations for Shooting y 81 Bunooug y je1deuo 82 Setting the thumbnail image at recording time When you record a clip you can specify which frame to use as the clip thumbnail image see page 96 The factory default setting is to use the first frame in the clip as the thumbnail For example if all clips have the same image in their first frames you can specify a frame a few seconds after the start of the clip so that all thumbnails will not show the same image How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select INDEX PIC POS and press the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired time Press MENU knob St
112. the required segment only A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified Syntax SITE REPFL SP lt path name gt SP start frame SP lt transfer size gt lt CRLF gt lt path name gt specifies the path name of the file to transfer Enclose the path name in double quotation marks lt start frame gt specifies an offset from the start of the file Data is transferred from the video frame at the offset the first frame is 0 lt transfer size gt specifies the number of video frames to transfer specify 0 to transfer to the end of the file Input example SITE REPFL Clip sakura 0001 MXF 5 150 Transfer sakura 0001 MXF Body data is transferred only from frame 6 to frame 150 SITE FSTS Acquires the system status of this unit One of the following status codes is sent 0 Initial state or no disc is loaded 1 File system mount is OK 3 File system mount is not OK Syntax SITE FSTS lt CRLF gt SITE MEID Acquires the media ID of the disc loaded in this unit Syntax SITE MEID lt CRLF gt SITE FUNC Acquires the function and version of the expanded commands Information is sent in the following format main function SP branch function SP branch function version For XDCAM sent in a format like 200 MXF DISK 1 200 is a response code Syntax SITE FUNC lt CRLF gt SITE UMMD When C MXF file is sent with the STOR the copy source UMID is saved i
113. the viewfinder left to right positioning ring Attaching the Viewfinder 37 ejdeuj 38 Viewfinder left to right positioning ring Stopper 2 Couple the viewfinder connector to the VF connector VF connector Detaching the viewfinder You can carry out this by following the attaching procedure in reverse order but there is an additional action to take when detaching the viewfinder from the fitting shoe pull up the stopper Adjusting the viewfinder position To adjust the viewfinder left right position loosen the left right positioning ring and to adjust the front back position loosen the front to back positioning knob Attaching the Viewfinder Viewfinder left to right positioning ring Viewfinder front to back positioning knob Moving the viewfinder shoe up 1 Loosen the front to back viewfinder positioning levers and the front to back viewfinder positioning knobs and then pull the viewfinder slide assembly forward Using a 2 5 mm diameter hexagonal wrench detach the viewfinder slide assembly and handle front cover Handle front cover Bolt with hexagonal hole Viewfinder slide assembly 3 Attach the handle front cover with the bottom edge up To attach the viewfinder atthe top To attach the viewfinder at the bottom factory default Attach the viewfinder slide assembly reversing the steps of the removal procedure Us
114. this message continues to appear even after the black balance and white balance have been adjusted again For details refer to the Maintenance Manual Adjusting the white balance 1 Set the switches and selectors as shown in the figure below Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance Bunoous 104 suas pue sjueunsn py e 57 10 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e Ja deyo 58 FILTER selector GAIN selector Set as low as possible OUTPUT DCC switch CAM WHITE BAL switch A or B a White balance setting values are stored in memory B only when the WHITE SWITCH B item is set to on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE BAL switch is changed a message reporting the new setting position appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen Set the FILTER selector to suit the lighting conditions as follows The possible settings of the FILTER selector and their corresponding filters to be selected are listed below FILTER selector inner knob ND filter setting 1 CLEAR 2 T ND 3 1716 ND 4 ND If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed a message reporting the setting appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder
115. to lt 1 gt ASSIGN 1 push type switch ASSIGN SW Assigns the function to lt 2 gt ASSIGN 2 slide type switch ASSIGN SW Assigns the function to lt 3 gt ASSIGN 3 push type switch ASSIGN SW Assigns the function to lt 4 gt ASSIGN 4 push type switch ASSIGN SW Assigns the function to RET lt RET gt button on the lens COLOR TEMP Assigns the function to SW COLOR TEMP button Select the desired switch or button and press the MENU knob A selection screen for the selected switch or button appears You can use these screens to assign one of the following functions Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 push type switch COLOR TEMP button or RET button on the lens Function Description OFF Assigns no function FRONT MIC Assigns the function that switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected PICTURE Assigns execution of CACHE recording in picture cache mode SUPER Assigns a mixing switch VFDISP amp function that selects mixing MENU or no mixing of superimposed viewfinder and menu text data into the video signals output from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT connector when SDI OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu are set to ON Function Description MARKER Assigns the function that displays or hides all markers RETAKE Assigns the function that deletes the
116. to the standard settings Depending on the setting item in some cases only the function to return to the standard setting is valid 1 Betore pressing the MENU knob in step 6 of the above procedure flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST position The message CANCEL DATA OK appears 2 Flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST position again The message CANCEL DATA appears to indicate that the change has been cancelled 3 To return to the standard settings after pressing the MENU knob in step 6 of the above procedure flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST position The message PRESET DATA OK appears on the screen Flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST position again This returns to the standard settings To move to another page UOSeREC FUNCTION CACHE INTVAL REC DISC EXCHG CACHE When appears in front of the page number Turn the MENU knob to switch pages Menu Operations When nothing appears in front of the page number Turn the MENU knob to move to the page number and press the MENU knob Then turn the MENU knob to switch pages Editing the USER menu The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and items that you need by adding deleting or replacing the pages To add a new page The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add a new page to the USER menu Whi
117. turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows 1 3 gt 6 when SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and REC FORMAT is set to HD422 50 HD420 HQ or HD420 SP 2 6 12 Select TRIGGER INTERVAL and turn the MENU knob to select the desired trigger mode or length of interval As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows ISEC 2SEC 4 3SEC gt 4SEC 5SEC gt 6SEC 7SEC 8SEC gt 9SEC gt 10SEC gt I5SEC 20SEC 30SEC lt gt 40SEC 50SEC gt IMIN gt 2MIN 4 3MIN 4MIN lt gt 5MIN gt 6MIN gt TMIN 8MIN gt 9MIN gt 10MIN gt 15MIN 20MIN lt 30MIN gt 40MIN gt 50MIN gt gt 2H gt gt 4H 6H lt gt 12H lt gt 24H Here SEC means seconds 5SEC is 5 seconds and MIN means minutes 1 MIN is one minute M The single shot mode recording only one shot after one operation In the viewfinder the TALLY green tally indicator flashes twice per second A setting value other than The consecutive mode recording shots repeatedly after one operation In the viewfinder the TALLY green tally indicator flashes four times per second When a setting value other than M the consecutive mode is selected in step 4 select PRE LIGHTING and turn the MENU knob to select the lighting on time before recording starts as required As you turn the MENU knob t
118. unit to set the items on this menu this menu is effective when using the camcorder by itself outdoors Menu Organization sBumes pojrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 1 2 127 pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 128 MAINTENANCE menu This menu contains items for making settings for audio timecode essence marks and battery FILE menu This menu is for saving the adjusted data in the camcorder memory or in a Memory Stick The following files can be saved User files User files save the setting items and setting data of customized USER menus You can save up to 100 user files in a Memory Stick Once you save a user file in a Memory Stick you can easily set the USER menu to your preference by loading the file For details on user files see Saving and Recalling User Files on page 187 ALL files ALL files save the setting data of all of the menus You can save up to 100 ALL files in a Memory Stick Once a camcorder is set up according to your preferences and you save an ALL file in a Memory Stick you can easily set other camcorders to those settings by loading the data from the Memory Stick Device specific data output levels and shading that requires adjustment for the specific device is not saved Scene files In the scene file the setting values of PAINT menu items set to shoot a particular scene are saved You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder
119. viewfinder see page 38 E Fitting for optional microphone holder Fit an optional CAC 12 Microphone Holder see page 46 Shoulder pad Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever to adjust the position in the front to rear direction Adjust the position for maximum convenience when operating the unit on your shoulder For details of the adjustment see Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position on page 52 LIGHT video light connector 2 pin female A video light with a maximum power consumption of 50 W such as the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent can be connected see page 51 Lens cable clamp Clamp a lens cable MIC IN microphone input 48 V connector XLR type 5 pin female Connect a stereo microphone to this connector The power 48 V is supplied via this connector LENS connector 12 pin Connect a lens cable to this connector When connecting the lens cable to this connector power off this unit first Tripod mount When using the unit on a tripod attach the tripod adaptor optional Lens mount special bayonet mount Attach the lens Consult a Sony representative for information about available lenses Lens locking lever After inserting the lens in the lens mount rotate the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position After locking the lens be sure to use the lens mount securing rubber to prevent the lens from becoming detached Lens mount cap Remove by pushing
120. 0 U 6 Add the items as follows Press the MENU knob scroll the page until the desired item appears and then press the MENU knob again 2 Press the MENU knob again select the desired item and then press the MENU knob The EDIT USER 9 page appears again displaying the newly added item 1 Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add the remaining items You can add up to 10 items on one page To delete items from a page by using the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in add a new page page 168 Press the MENU knob Then select the item that you want to delete Flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE Switch to the CANCEL PRST position The message DELETE ITEM OK appears Flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the CANCEL PRST position again To delete items from a page by using the menu 1 4 Follow steps 1 to 3 in add a new page page 168 Press the MENU knob Then select the item that you want to delete and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears Select DELETE and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again and the message DELETE OK YES NO appears Select YES and press the MENU knob To replace items on a page 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in add a new page page 168 Press the MENU knob Then select the item that you want to replace and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears Select MOVE and press th
121. 0S 28 30S function on page 82 and Time TAKE TOTAL TIME 8MIN IOMIN ISMIN video d 20MIN 30MIN 40MIN P ction on page 83 SOMIN 1H 2H 3H 4H 5H 7H 10H 15H 20H 30H 40H 50H 70H 100H REC TIME 5SEC 10SEC 15SEC 20SEC 30SEC 40SEC SOSEC IMIN to 85MIN PRE LIGHTING OFF 2SEC SSEC 10 NUMBER OF FRAME When SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and REC FORMAT is set to HD422 50 HD420 HQ or HD420 SP 2 6 12 When either SYSTEM LINE or REC FORMAT is set to another setting 1 3 6 TRIGGER INTERVAL M ISEC to 10 15SEC 20SEC 30SEC 40SEC SOSEC IMIN to 1OMIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 40MIN SOMIN 1H 2H 3H 4H 6H 12H 24H DISC EXCHG CACHE OFF ON 06 ASSIGNABLE ASSIGN SW 1 For details see Assigning SW ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt functions to ASSIGN switches on ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt paged 72 ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt ASSIGN SW lt RET gt COLOR TEMP SW ZOOM SPEED 0 to 20 to 99 RETURN VIDEO OFF ON 07 POWER SAVE ETHERNET USB DSABL ENABL For details see Setting power i LINK FAM DSABL ENABL saving functions on page 182 REC AUDIO OUT EE SAVE TEST OUT SAVE OFF ON Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 JajdeyD 131 No Page Item Settings Description 08 VFDISP 1 VF DISP OFF ON For details see Selecting the VF DISP MODE 1 2 3 display items on page 172 DISP EXTENDER OFF ON DISP FILTER OFF ON DISP WHITE OFF ON DISP GAIN OFF ON DISP SHUTTER OFF ON DISP AUDIO OFF ON
122. 100000 PROAV directory This directory displays individual files on the disc To enable display of the PROAV directory set PROAV DISPLAY on the CAM CONIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to ENABL Overview suonejedo e 8 2 199 suoneiedo e 4 8 200 File Operations in File Access Mode for Windows File access mode operating environment Operating system requirements for file operations by file access mode called FAM below are as follows Computer operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2 or higher or Microsoft Windows Vista Business Ultimate 32 bit 64 bit editions of Windows Vista are not supported Preparations Install the FAM driver on the remote computer To install the FAM driver Insert the supplied CD ROM XDCAM Application Software into the CD ROM drive of your computer navigate to the FAM Driver directory and run the installer in the directory for your operating system then follow the installation instructions For details refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD ROM disc Use Version 2 10 or higher of the FAM driver The FAM driver on the supplied CD ROM is Version 2 10 or higher If a FAM driver is already installed on your computer check the version see the next section To check the FAM driver version For Windows XP Select Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs gt ProDisc and click on Click here for support inform
123. 17 Camera operator tally indicator 31 CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch 21 CC 5600K function 180 Chapter thumbnailscreen 100 Chapter function 107 Clip 114 assigning user defined name 91 assigning user defined title 88 changing index picture 109 deleting 113 duration 98 finding 106 locking 112 properties 109 thumbnail screen 97 unlocking 113 Clip flag setting 81 112 Clip information 33 Clip list 115 assigning user defined name 91 clearing 120 creating and editing 115 deleting 121 loading 120 playback 115 saving 119 sorting 121 thumbnail screen 99 Clip list editing 114 Color LCD 21 status display 23 COLOR TEMP button 19 Color temperature 33 changing 59 60 setting manually 182 Condensation 224 CONTRAST control 31 Controlling external device 34 Cover 21 Current clip list 115 xepu Index 237 238 Customization assigning functions to ASSIGN switches 179 D Date setting 42 DCIN connector 16 DC OUT 12V connector 16 DCC Dynamic Contrast Control 20 DIAGNOSIS menu 128 162 Digital extender function 181 Digital hours meter 162 Diopter adjustment ring 31 Directory structure 195 Disc capacity 73 formatting 75 124 loading and unloading 74 operations 122 playback conditions 80 playback start position 79 properties 122 restoring lost data 75 salvage function 75 unloading manually 74 write protecting 73 Disc Exchange Cache function 87 Disc Menu 103 DISP SEL EXPAND button 22 DISPLAY switch 23 DISPLA
124. 2 4 5600K 6300K when the ND filter is switched page 59 ELECTRICAL 3200K 4300K Select the color temperatures selected by electrical CC lt A gt 5600K 6300K CC filter switching when the electrical CC filter ELECTRICAL 3200K 4300K switching function is assigned to an ASSIGN CC lt B gt 5600K 6300K Switch ELECTRICAL 3200K 4300K For details see To switch between electrical CC CC C 5600K 6300K filters with an ASSIGN switch page 60 ELECTRICAL 3200K 4300K CC lt D gt 5600K 6300K Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 JajdeyD 155 pejreijeq pue s ejds q 9 156 No Page Item Settings Description 16 DCC ADJUST DCC FUNCTION DCC FIX Enables or disables automatic knee point SEL adjustment when the OUTPUT DCC switch is set to CAM DCC ON DCC Automatically adjust the knee point according to the luminance of the subject FIX Set the knee point to a fixed value DCCDRANGE 400 450 Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT DCC 500 550 switch is set to CAM DCC ON 600 DCC POINT 99 to 99 Adjusts the DCC minimum knee point DCC GAIN 99 to 99 Adjusts the gain to DCC detected value DCC DELAY 99 to 99 Adjusts the DCC reaction speed TIME DCC PEAK 99 to 99 Adjusts the response sensitivity to the peak of the FILTER DCC detected value 17 AUTOIRIS2 IRIS WINDOW 1 2 3 4 5 6 Selects the auto iris detection window
125. 3 WARNING indicator Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs in the VDR section For details about the meaning of the states of the WARNING indicator see Operation Warnings on page 216 E ACCESS indicator This lights when data is written to or read from the disc Protection cover of the audio control section Open to access the audio control section see page 27 al Protection cover of the GUI screen operations section Open to access the GUI screen operations section see page 27 Monochrome LCD This shows the remaining battery capacity remaining disc capacity time data and so on For details see Status Display on the LCD monitor and monochrome LCD on page 23 EJECT button and indicator Press this button to insert a disc or eject the disc The indicator flashes while the disc is being ejected E REV fast reverse button and indicator This plays back at high speed in the reverse direction The indicator lights during high speed playback in the reverse direction PLAY PAUSE button and indicator Press this button to view play back video images using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor The indicator lights during playback Press this button again during playback to pause outputting a still image At this time the indicator flashes This unit is equipped with an image search function at approximately four times normal playback speed for easy checking of recorded mate
126. 62 levels including the UserData directory Deletion and renaming of directories File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write Any file Yes Yes Yes 9 Yes Yes a UTF 8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length Depending on the character type file names including extension may be limited to 21 characters The following directory operations are possible in the General directory Directory creation up to 63 levels including the General directory Deletion and renaming of directories The maximum number of files that can be created on one disc including directories is 5000 for a single layer disc and 6000 for a dual layer disc File names and directory names can use letters numbers and symbols from the Unicode 2 0 UTF 8 character set P However the following control characters and symbols cannot be used Control characters U 0000 to U 001F U 007F Symbols lt gt To create a new directory in the General directory first create a directory on the desktop and rename it using only characters that can be used on this unit Then drag it from the desktop and drop it in the General directory 1 The following character codes cannot be used by FAM connections U 010000 U 020000 U 030000 U 040000 U 050000 U 060000 U 070000 U 080000 U 090000 U 0A0000 U 0B0000 U 0C0000 U 0D0000 U 0E0000 U 0F0000 U
127. AREA 9 80 90 92 5 95 96 14 GAIN SW GAIN LOW 6dB 3dB O0dB 3dB For details see Setting gain 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB values for the GAIN selector 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB positions on page 178 GAIN MID 6dB 3dB OdB 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB GAIN HIGH 6dB 3dB OdB 3dB 6dB 9dB 12d B 18dB 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB GAIN TURBO 6dB 3dB OdB 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB TURBO SW IND OFF ON SHOCKLESS GAIN OFF ON Does not appear when the SCAN MODE item on the FORMAT page is set to 23 9P Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 Jajdeyo 133 pue s ejds q 9 4 2 134 No Page Item Settings Description 15 VF SETTING ZEBRA OFF ON For details see Setting the ZEBRA SELECT 1 2 BOTH viewfinder on page 175 ZEBRA1 DET LVL 20 to 70 to 107 ZEBRA1 APT LVL 1 to 10 to 20 ZEBRA2 DET LVL 52 to 100 to 109 VF DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 VF ASPECT SD AUTO 16 9 When the REC FORMAT item is set to IMX50 IMX40 IMX30 or DVCAM 16 AUTO IRIS IRIS OVERRIDE OFF ON For details see Changing the IRIS SPEED 99 to 99 Reference Value for Automatic CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF ON Iris Adjustment on page 64 IRIS WINDOW 1 2 3 4 5 6 VAR IRIS WINDOW IND OFF ON IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 240 to 479 IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 135 to 269 IRIS VAR H PO
128. ASCII Clip Name Display the ASCII format title see page 93 Clip Name Display the UTF 8 format title see page 93 Formatting discs See page 104 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Format Disc and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A message appears asking you to confirm the format Format Disc All Clips Clip Lists and Non AV Data General Files will be Deleted Format OK 3 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Disc Operations To cancel the format Select Cancel and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To continue by formatting another disc Exchange the disc select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To exit the formatting screen Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob with Exit selected To disable the Format Disc command To prevent inadvertent disc formatting resulting in the loss of recorded data you can disable the Format Disc command See page 104 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Settings and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob 3 Select Disable Format Disc and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob 4 Select Disable and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Shortcut List You can access many functions from the keyboard wi
129. ATA NG data is invalid Contact a Sony DCP DR service representative EEPROM REC INHI DATA NG a Contact a Sony service representative to replace the battery VDR operation messages are displayed in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen see 1080 50i page 35 Take the actions listed in the following 1080 25P table 1080 59 94i 1 29 97P ILL Disc A disc that cannot be used by this seb PAR Bien Insert another 720 59 94 rofessional Disc 625 50i ILL Index Index file or file system error 525 59 94i No FS Exchange or format the disc Unknown FS No Support A recorded clip cannot be handled by this unit Exchange or format the disc FORMAT The disc could not be formatted NG automatically Exchange the disc 220 Operation Warnings HD422 1080 HD422 720 HD420 1080 HD420 720 IMX50 Clip IMX40 Clip IMX30 Clip DVCAM 8CHx16 Clip 4CHx24 Clip 2CHx16 Clip Index File File System ILL PLAY Lid Closed Lid Open No Clip No Disc STOP ONCE REC mode Loading Unloading Disc Top Disc End Formatting Recording No EM Space EM Full The loaded disc has a different recording format To carry out recording operations exchange the disc or change the recording format There is an unsupported index file on the disc to which you are trying to record Exchange or format the disc There is an unsupported file
130. ATION menu Setting menus timecode or shot data can be superimposed on the camera output video depending on the menu settings and you can view them on the monitor screen AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 audio channel 1 and channel 2 input connectors XLR type 3 pin female These are audio input connectors for channels 1 and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment or a microphone When the LINE AES EBU MIC selector is set to AES EBU the connector is used for channel 1 and 2 inputs and the CH2 connector for channel 3 and 4 inputs AUDIO OUT connector XLR type 5 pin male Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4 The audio signals are selected by the MONITOR switch G LINK S400 connector 6 pin TEEE1394 compliant Use an i LINK cable DV cable to connect the camcorder to a computer for File Access Mode file operations For details see File Operations in File Access Mode for Windows on page 200 When you connect the camcorder and other equipment such as a hard disk drive with an i LINK interface to a computer with i LINK connectors turn off the power of the computer the other equipment and the camcorder before connecting them using the i LINK cable DV cable If a bus powered type D hard disk drive or similar equipment is connected while the computer is powered electric current flows into the camcorder because of the high voltage ca
131. B 03 LEVEL VBS VIDEO 99 to 99 Adjusts the composite signal video level ADJUST LEVEL HD Y LEVEL 99 to 99 Adjusts the Y level of the HD component signal TEST OUT VBS Y R G B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT SELECT LCD connector Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 1 2 147 pue s ejds q 9 4 2 148 04 BATTERY 1 Item Settings Description Info BEFORE 5 10 Used when a BP GL65 GL95 Battery Pack is used END 1596 9596 Sets the remaining power 46 value of the battery 10096 at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Info END 0 1 2 3 Used when a BP GL65 GL95 Battery Pack is used 496 596 Sets the remaining power 46 value of the battery at which the END warning should be issued Sony BEFORE 11 5V to 17 0V Used when a BP L60S L80S Battery Pack is used END 0 1V steps Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Sony END 11 0V to 11 5V Used when a BP L60S L80S Battery Pack is used 0 1V steps Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued b Other BEFORE 11 5V to 11 8V Used when a battery pack other than a Sony battery END to 17 0V in pack is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at 0 1V steps which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Other END 9 11 0V to 14 0V Us
132. Code see page 119 operation with no sub clips in the current clip list An attempt is made to execute a Delete Clip List operation see page 121 when there are no clip lists on the disc Move is Invalid Shot Mark does not Exist Chapter does not Exist Rec Start cannot be Deleted Rec Start cannot be Moved Command Disabled Clip is Locked Clips are Locked Clips are Unlocked A File with the Name you Specified Already Exists Specify a Different Name Set NAMING FORM to free An attempt is made to execute a Move Sub Clips operation see page 117 when there are no sub clip in the current clip list or when there is only one An attempt is made to execute a Delete Shot Mark see page 107 operation on a clip with no shot marks recorded in An attempt was made to display a nonexistent chapter An attempt is made to delete a Rec Start with a Delete Shot Mark operation Only Shot Mark1 and Shot Mark2 essence marks can be deleted An attempt was made to move a Rec Start essence mark with a Move Shot Mark operation Only Shot Mark1 and Shot Mark2 essence marks can be moved An attempt was made to execute the Format Disc command with Disable Format Disc set to Disable An attempt is made to delete a clip set the clip thumbnail or delete a shot mark when the clip is locked An attempt is made to execute a Lock All Clips
133. DETAIL LEVEL DETAIL LEVEL R B GAIN R B BLACK Been R B BLACK Non volatile memory Hardware of the camera section o o RM B150 connected o o RM B150 not connected Connecting the Remote Control Unit Thus when a remote control unit is connected to the camcorder the effective data region is switched to the remote control data region and the settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled The settings of the absolute value rotational controls P and absolute value switches 2 are overwritten by those on the remote control unit after the remote control unit is connected When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder the independent data region becomes effective Thus the camcorder will return to the settings that were in effect before the remote control unit was connected 1 Absolute value rotational controls The data corresponding to the angular position of controls is output Rotational controls for which the data corresponding to the amount of their rotation is output are called relative value controls 2 Absolute value switches Like toggle switches or slide switches except momentary switches the switches or knobs whose positions must coincide with their functions are called absolute value switches When RM COMMON MEMORY is set to ON on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu you can use settin
134. DI Output SD SDI SDI OUT2 Selects whether to superimpose SUPER ON or not superimpose OFF text information on the signal output from the SDI OUT2 connector TEST OUT Selects the output signal from SELECT the TEST OUT connector VBS Output composite video signal When you select VBS connect to the VIDEO IN connector of your monitor Y Output HD Y signal R G B Output HD RGB signal LCD Output a signal like the display in the LCD monitor TEST OUT Selects whether to superimpose SUPER ON or not superimpose OFF text information on the signal output from the TEST OUT connector Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches You can assign the desired function to any of the ASSIGN switches How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the ASSIGNABLE page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob Adjustments and Settings From Menus sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsig 9 JajdeyD 179 pejreijeq pue s ejds q 9 4 2 180 For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 You can assign functions by using the following items Item Description ASSIGN SW Assigns the function
135. DISP DISC OFF ON DISP IRIS OFF ON 09 VFDISP2 DISP ZOOM OFF ON DISP COLOR TEMP OFF ON DISP BATT REMAIN INT VOLT AUTO DISP DC IN OFF ON DISP 16 9 4 3 ID OFF ON When the CBKZ MDO is installed DISP WRR RFLVL OFF ON DISP REC FORMAT OFF ON DISP CLIP NO PB OFF ON DISP TIMECODE OFF ON 10 VFDISP3 LOW LIGHT OFF ON LOW LIGHT LEVEL 99 to 99 BATT WARNING 1096 2096 ABSOLUTE VALUE OFF ON 11 LED GAIN lt gt OFF ON For details see Indicators on SHUTTER lt gt OFF ON page 32 WHT PRESET lt gt OFF ON ATW RUN lt gt OFF ON EXTENDER lt gt OFF ON FILTER lt gt OFF ON OVERRIDE lt gt OFF ON pue s ejds q 9 4 2 132 MenuList No Page Item Settings Description 12 MARKER 1 MARKER OFF ON For details see Setting the CENTER OFF ON marker display on page 174 CENTER MARK 1 2 3 4 SAFTY ZONE OFF ON SAFTY AREA 8096 90 92 5 95 ASPECT OFF ON ASPECT SELECT 15 9 14 9 13 9 4 3 1 85 2 35 ASPECT MASK OFF ON ASPECT MASK LVL 0 to 12 to 15 100 MARKER OFF ON 13 MARKER2 USER BOX OFF ON USER BOX WIDTH 3 0 240 to 479 USER BOX HEIGHT 3 to 135 to 269 USER BOX H POS 477 to 0 to 476 USER BOX V POS 267 to 0 to 266 CENTER H POS 480 to 0 to 479 CENTER V POS 270 to 0 to 269 ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF ON ASPECT SAFE
136. E and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again and the message DELETE OK YES NO appears at the upper right 4 Select YES and press the MENU knob To replace pages 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in add a page page 170 2 Press the MENU knob Then select the page that you want to move and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears Select MOVE and press the MENU knob The previous screen appears again 4 Selectthe position to which you want to move the page and press the MENU knob The page selected in step 2 is moved to the position To rename pages The names of pages USER 1 to USER 19 created with EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19 can be changed The maximum name length is 15 characters The ASSIGN ITEM SEL page cannot be renamed 1 Display the EDIT PAGE NAME or EDIT PAGE NAME2 of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu EDIT PAGE NAME To rename USER1 to USERIO EDIT PAGE NAME2 To rename USER11 to USERI9 E220EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP gt D R R R R R R R R R R OONOUIBWN CCCCCCCCCC NNNNNNNNNW mmnm 707070707070707070 70 OONODUIAWN USE USE USE USE USE USE USE USE USE USE For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 USER 1 to USER 19 and press the MENU knob A character table appears E220EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP eu U U U U 9 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOP BRSTUUUXYZIX1labcdefshiJk
137. EA or PAL AREA To display the clip title Settings gt Display Title in the Disc Menu needs to be set to On Displaying menus Thumbnail Menu The Thumbnail Menu displays menu items that are valid for the currently displayed thumbnail screen To display the Thumbnail Menu To display the Thumbnail Menu press the MENU button with a thumbnail screen displayed To return to the original screen press the MENU button again or press the RESET RETURN button RESET RETURN button MENU button DISPSEL HOLD RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT Clip Navigeting sibiling relati 018 036 TC 00 29 19 23 TC 00 2 TC 00 29 50 04 TC ah AR TC 00 09 43 14 TC 00 24 24 29 em TC 00 30 40 13 00 24 34 27 TC 00 24 46 22 TC 00 25 42 08 00 25 49 07 DATE amp TIME NOV 2005 14 14 0 23 22 26 Thumbnail Menu Select Index Picture Clip Properties Add Sub Clips SHIFT SET SHIFT RESET SHIFT STOP Delete Clip Lock Unlock Clip Set Clip Flag gt Skip Scroll Thumbnail Search Ld Thumbnail Menu P Clip thumbnail screen b Thumbnail Menu of the clip thumbnail screen Overview IMD suonejedo 101 SueeJog MD ui 1 2 102 Shortcut operations Shortcut button names are displayed next to the menu items of commands that have shortcuts see page 125 Shortcuts displayed within paren
138. EC defined clip titles automatically When the TITLE item on page 88 is set to ENABL CLEAR NUMERIC EXEC When the TITLE item is set to ENABL LOAD PREFIX DATA EXEC When the TITLE item is set to ENABL PREFIX TITLE up to 10 When the TITLE item characters is set to ENABL NUMERIC 00001 to 99999 When the TITLE item is set to ENABL 28 FILENAMING NAMING FORM For details see Assigning user AUTO NAMING C TITLE PLAN defined names to clips and clip When the NAMING lists on page 91 FORM item is set to FREE Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 29 SELECT LETTER BOX DISABLE ENABLE FUNCTION Enable the selection of LETTR LETTER BOX in the DOWN CON MODE item on the OUTPUT 2 page Breakup may occur in output signals and in the video and audio of this unit for about 5 to 10 seconds immediately after this setting is changed FOCUS MAG DISABLE ENABLE Enable the assignment of the FOCUS MAG function to the ASSIGN switches Breakup may occur in output signals and in the video and audio of this unit for about 5 to 10 seconds immediately after this setting is changed HD SD PHASE Display only DELAYED Appears when LETTER BOX is set to ENABLE or when FOCUS MAG is set to ENABLE In these states the phases of HD output and SD output from this unit do not match REF HD Y PHASE Dis
139. EFIX CLEAR NUMERIC LOAD PREFIX DATA EXEC EXEC EXEC PREFIX TITLE H Z amp 0123456789 ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUU UXYZI1 abcdefshiJklmnoP arstuvwxyz INS DEL RET ESC END Move Bil onto the character you want to change and then press the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to move Bl onto the desired character in the list of selectable characters and then press the MENU knob 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the remaining characters 6 when you have finished entering the prefix turn the MENU knob to move Bl to END and then press the MENU knob The camcorder exits prefix input mode and the original CLIP TITLE page appears To set the initial value of the clip title serial number You can set the initial value of the clip title serial number to 00001 default or to any 5 digit value To return the initial value to 00001 How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the CLIP TITLE page on the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select CLEAR NUMERIC and then press the MENU knob The message CLEAR OK 9 YES NO appears Select YES and then press the MENU knob The value in the NUMERIC field returns to 00001 To set the initial value to any number How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the CL
140. EL button or the MENU knob The selected clip is inserted as a subclip and a mark appears on the thumbnail in the Scene Selection window To check the addition results Move the cursor Press RESET RETURN button This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen 1 Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add more clips 8 Save the clip list see page 119 In step 1 you can hold down the SHIFT button when you press the SET S SEL button This is a shortcut that displays the Add Sub Clip screen immediately You can also save the clip list immediately in step 5 by executing the Save Clip List command in the Disc Menu Adding sub clips from the clip list thumbnail screen See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu 2 Select Add Sub Clips and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Clip List Add screen appears Clip List Add 002 lt 017 035 8 7 00304013 01 012825 00 09 4314 TC00242429 TC00243427 TC00244622 TC 00 24 56 24 00 13 48 24 2 Lem Scene Selection gt 3 Select the sub clips that you want to add from the upper part of the screen the part where 8 thumbnails are displayed multiple selections possible To select from expanded thumbnails Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button to display the expand thumbnail screen To select from chapter thumbnails Press the HOLD
141. ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu become invalid when the RM B150 or another remote control unit is connected to the camcorder Display the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 02205 ENABLE SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER Turn the MENU knob to move to the shutter mode or shutter speed you want then press the MENU knob on the left of the selected item changes to and on the left of the setting changes to 2 Turn the MENU knob until ON appears then press the MENU knob on the left of the selected item changes to and on the left of the setting changes to e To set another mode or speed return to step 2 Bunoous 104 suyas pue sjueuusn py e Note that only the shutter speeds set to can be selected with the SHUTTER selector To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating section The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen Setting the Electronic Shutter 63 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy Ja deyo 64 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic lris Adjustment The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be changed to aid the shooting of clea
142. ER selector to ON Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST Use the lens extender Set the reference value of the auto iris to other than the standard value Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT repeatedly and check that the shutter setting changes on the viewfinder screen Pointing the camera at a suitable subject focus the camera and check the picture on the viewfinder screen Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT and check that when sound is input to a microphone connected to the MIC IN connector on the front of the camcorder the audio level indicators appear on the viewfinder screen 9 Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to ON and OFF makes the zebra pattern appear and disappear on the viewfinder screen The results of checking in steps 3 to 9 may not be as expected depending on the settings relating to the viewfinder display function In this case set the desired items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER menu For details see Selecting the display items on page 172 Testing the iris and zoom functions 1 Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that the power zoom operates correctly 2 Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the zoom functions manually Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO and point the camera at objects of different brightness Check that the automatic iris adjustment operates correctly Set the iris switch on the lens to MANUAL and
143. European languages when the area of use see page 41 is set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When a gt or 4 mark is displayed for an item you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view To display the properties of the previous or the next clip Press the PREV button or the NEXT button To return to the clip thumbnail screen Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To edit clip information You can edit the name D title and title 2 of a clip by using a software keyboard 1 The NAMING FORM item on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu must be set to FREE see page 138 The only characters that can be entered are the alphanumeric characters and symbols that appear on the software keyboard and European language characters displayed on the keyboards illustrated in List of Supported USB Keyboards page 232 Japanese kanji cannot be entered Thumbnail Operations Names and titles must be within the specified character length limits Some symbols cannot be used in clip names The keys for those symbols are disabled when you are editing a clip name See page 104 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Clip Properties screen turn the MENU knob to select the item you want to edit Name Title P or Ti
144. Extended UMID You have to enter a country code organization code and user code Set the country code referring Adjustments and Settings From Menus to the ISO 3166 table and set the organization code and user code independently For details see About UMID ownership information page 185 Functions of UMID data The UMID data enables the followings Adda globally unique ID to every clip of audio visual material The unique ID is used to detect the material source and to link it with the original source material Distinguishing between original material and copied material 00 is added to the Instance Number for original material Recording based on the UTC The UTC is used when recording the UMID This enables uniform control of source material recorded all over the world based on the universal timecode Calculating the date difference among source materials The source material is recorded based on the MJD Modified Julian Date which enables easy calculation of date difference among source materials To set UMID ownership information How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the UMID SET page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Setthe following item Item Contents COUNTRY CODE Country code ORGANIZATION Organization code USER CODE User code
145. FFSET WHITE A OFF ON For details see Specifying an WARM COOL A Displays reference color offset for the auto white balance temperature setting on page 183 WARM COOLBAL 99 to 99 lt A gt OFFSET WHITE lt B gt OFF ON WARM COOL lt B gt Displays reference color temperature WARM COOL 99 to 99 lt B gt 22 SHT ENABLE SHUTTER ECS OFF ON The items which can be set differ SHUTTER SLS OFF ON depending on the setting of the SHUTTER 1 32 OFF ON SYSTEM FREQUENCY item on the FORMAT page For details SHUTTER 1 33 OFF ON see Setting the Electronic SHUTTER 1 40 OFF ON Shutter on page 61 SHUTTER 1 48 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 50 OFF ON When SCAN MODE is set to SHUTTER 1 60 OFF ON 23 9P more shutter speeds can be SHUTTER 1 96 OFF ON selected and the SHT ENABLE 2 page appears to display them SHUTTER 1 100 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 120 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 125 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 250 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 500 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 1000 OFF ON SHUTTER 1 2000 OFF ON Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejds q 9 1 2 135 pue s ejds q 9 4 2 136 No Page Item Settings Description 23 LENS FILE LENS FILE SELECT 1to32 For details see Selecting the EID Display only lens file on page 183 L ID Display only L MF Display only 24 FORMAT SYSTEM LINE 1080 720 The selectable SYSTEM SYSTEM 59 91 29 9P 50i 25P FREQUENCY set
146. IO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors W WIRELESS Audio input signals from the portable tuner not supplied if it is installed Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Left side and upper section ASSIGNABLE 3 4 switches You can assign the desired functions to these switches on the ASSIGNABLE page of the OPERATION menu Nothing is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory equivalent to a selection of OFF in the menu For details see Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches on page 179 Lid of the disc compartment This opens when the EJECT button on the top panel is pressed Press the side of the lid to close SDI IN OPTION connector BNC type This is an input connector for the optional CBK HD01 HD SD SDI Input Board When the CBK HD01 is installed the unit can record HD SDI or SD SDI signals that are input to this connector GENLOCK IN genlock signal input connector BNC type This connector inputs a reference signal when the camera is to be genlocked or when timecode is to be synchronized with external equipment Use the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock H phase phase of horizontal sync signal This connector also inputs a return video signal You can display the HD Y 10801 signal in the viewfinder screen while holding the RET button down with RETURN VIDEO set to ON on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu
147. IP TITLE page on the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select NUMERIC and then press the MENU knob 3 onto the digit you want to change and then press the MENU knob 4 Turn the MENU knob to move lil onto the desired digit in the list of selectable digits and then press the MENU knob 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the remaining digits 6 When you have finished entering the value turn the MENU knob to move li to END and then press the MENU knob The camcorder exits numeric input mode and the original CLIP TITLE page appears To check clip titles Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen and select the clip whose title you want to check The title of the selected clip appears in the upper left of the screen See Clip thumbnail screen page 97 for more information about the thumbnail screen It is not possible to specify 00000 as the initial value Even if you enter 00000 the value is reset to 00001 when the camcorder exits numeric input mode The value of the serial number is incremented by 1 every time a title is generated When the value reaches 99999 the next number restarts from 00001 Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the serial number after recording several clips or the same is true depending on the value setting Care should be taken when setting the serial number Assigning user
148. Imnorparstuvwxyz INS DEL RET ESC END Follow steps 3 and 4 described in Setting the shot ID on page 176 to enter characters 4 when you have finished entering the name turn the MENU knob to move W to END and press the MENU knob The entered name is now displayed E220EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP gt iD IAL ITEM USER USER2 USERS USER4 USERS USERG USER USERS USERS USER1 CCCCCCCCCO NNNNNNNUNUT mmnm 707070 7070707070701 DOONAN Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings You can return all settings in the USER menu to standard settings How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item Menu Operations Select the page that you want to rename sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 JajdeyD 171 pue shejdsiq 9 1 2 172 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 FO IeUSER FILE USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE F ID OOOOO000000000000 USER PRESET EXEC TOP EXEC EXEC 2 Press the MENU knob then select USER PRESET and press the MENU knob The message PRESET OK YES NO appears FO1OUSER FILE PRESET USER FILE LOAD EXEC USER FILE SAVE EXEC F ID oo00000000000000 D EXEC TOP YES2NO 2USER PRESET 3 Select YES and press the MENU knob
149. KER E all markers set to switch has b t one C ON EE CENTER the center marker When the shutter SHUTTER NYY CENTER zd 2 speed and mode 1 100 or 1 125 ut C Eco ob ine setting has been 1 250 1 500 1 changed 1000 1 2000 dax the safety zone set o eee DE SAFETY Selects the safety zone range i ne a3 AREA 80 90 92 5 or 95 een adjuste J ASPECT To display the aspect marker a This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the set to ON SHUTTER selector is set to ON ASPECT Selects the aspect mode 15 9 SELECT 14 9 13 9 4 3 1 85 2 35 Changing the display mode ASPECT To make the areas out of the MASK selected aspect marker dimmer 1 Display the VF DISP 1 page of the set to ON 9 OPERATION menu and press the ASPECT set the mask level when the E MENU knob MASKLVL i MASK is set to o For details on menu operations see Basic 100 To display the effective pixel menu operations on page 164 MARKER area set to g 2 Select VF DISP MODE and press the a The ASPECT MASK setting affects the MENU knob viewfinder and LCD monitor display In the 2 following cases it also affects the signal 3 Select the desired display mode and When TEST OUT SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 a press the MENU knob page is set to VBS g 2 2 6 o Ed o 92 5 95 of th TEST OUT connector Dror OUO ME screen area TEST OUT SELECT on the OUTPU
150. LINK S400 6 complies with IEEE 1394 zi network RJ 45 type 100BASE TX Complies with TEEE802 3u 10BASE T Complies with IEEE802 3 USB 2 0 HOST Type A 4 pin for maintenance Supplied accessories Shoulder strap 1 Microphone cable for converting 3 pin connector to two 5 pin connectors 1 Operation manuals English version 1 Japanese version 1 CD ROM manual 1 XDCAM Application Software CD ROM 1 Recommended additional equipment Power supply and related equipment BP GL65 GL95 L60S L80S Battery Pack BC M150 L500 L70 Battery Charger AC DN10 DN2B AC Adaptor Viewfinder and related equipment HDVF 20A 200 C35W Viewfinder BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket Contact a Sony service representative for information about the viewfinders able to use the BK W 401 Specifications Equipment for remote control RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit Memory Stick Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO 4 GB or less Memory Stick Duo Memory Stick PRO Duo Audio equipment ECM 680S Stereo Monaural Microphone 678 674 Monaural Microphone CAC 12 Microphone Holder DWR S01D Digital Wireless Receiver WRR 855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit WRR 860A 861 862 UHF Synthesized Diver sity Tuner WRT 850 860 UHF Synthesized Transmitter DWT B01 Digital Wireless Transmitter DMX P02 Portable Digital Mixer Expansion boards and upgrade software CBK HD01 HD SD SDI Input Board CBK SC02 Ana
151. MAINTENANCE FILE and DIAGNOSIS menus move to the menu that contains the desired item in the TOP menu and then press the MENU knob 2 Turnthe MENU knob until the desired page appears UOSeREC FUNCTION CACHE INTVAL REC DISC EXCHG CACHE Press the MENU knob and appear UOSOREC FUNCTION gt CACHE INTVAL REC e DISC EXCHG CACHE Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item and then press the MENU knob changes to and changes to 5 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting Depending on the direction of turning the knob the setting value increases decreases switches between ON and OFF and so on To interrupt changing the settings Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF By setting the MENU ON OFF switch to ON again the values that were displayed when you interrupted the setting operations will reappear so you can continue making settings 6 Press the MENU knob changes to and changes to The selection is confirmed To continue setting other items on the same page repeat steps from 4 to 6 Menu Operations sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 1e1deu 167 pejrejeq pue s ejdsig nua 9 Ja deyo 168 8 To end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen To cancel a change or return
152. MENU knob Select SFILE SAVE MEM1 5 and press the MENU knob The message STORE OK YES NO appears 5 To carry out the save select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO When the save is completed the message COMPLETE appears If files have been saved in the page selected in step 3 those files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder memory For example files from 001 to 005 are replaced by the above procedure To set the file ID You can set an file ID before you save your data as a scene file This will help you identify the scene file quickly The file ID that has been set is saved together with the data You can carry outa scene file ID setting operation on the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu For details about this operation see the description of step 2 and following of To set the file ID on page 188 Saving and Loading Scene Files geq asn Bulpeo7 pue 7 191 geq 1es pue Jaydeyo 192 To select the file information items to be displayed You can select the items of file information to be displayed on the SCENE STORE pages P01 to P20 or the SCENE RECALL pages P01 to P20 used for saving data to or loading data from a Memory Stick You can select the scene file information items to be displayed on the SCENE STORE page and SCENE RECALL
153. MENU knob and set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON The TOP menu contains only top level menus lt TOP MENU gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS When you select a top level menu the most recently shown page of that menu appears The CONTENTS page appears when the menu is selected for the first time For details about how to use menus see page 164 USER menu This menu allows you to add any desired page from the OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE and DIAGNOSIS menus to suit your needs By gathering frequently used pages on the USER menu beforehand you can call up them quickly whenever you need them This menu is normally displayed when the MENU ON OFF switch is set to ON USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from the USER menu to suit your needs ALL menu This menu allows you to handle all items in the OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE and DIAGNOSIS menus as if they were in one menu OPERATION menu This menu contains items for changing settings according to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is being operated PAINT menu This menu contains items for making detailed image adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor the waveforms output by the camera Support of a video engineer is usually required to use this menu Although you can also use an external remote control
154. Message display Message Display condition mode setting 1 23 When the filter FILTER n where N N Y selection has been n 1 2 3 4 changed Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor pejrejeq pue s ejds q 9 1 2 173 Message display Message Display 1 Display the MARKER 1 or MARKER 2 When both TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page and SUPER MARKER on Setting the marker display the SUPER IMPOSE page are set to ON ASPECT MASK is ignored for displays in the viewfinder when the following are true TEST OUT SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to HD Y and a cable is connected to the Switch the display of the center and safety zone markers on or off and select whether the area indicated by the safety zone marker is 80 90 condition mode page of the OPERATION menu and setting press the MENU knob 112 3 For details on menu operations see Basic When the gain GAIN n wheren N N Y menu operations on page 164 setting has been 6dB 3dB OdB changed 3dB 6dB 9dB 2 Select the desired item and press the 12dB 18dB 24dB MENU knob 30dB 36dB 42dB You can set the following items on the When the setting of WHITE n wheren N N Y MARKER 1 and MARKER 2 pages the WHITE BAL A CH switch hasbeen PRESET or ATW MARKER 1 page r ANGER EE Item Description DUET T 6r OFF MAR
155. NU knob is pressed with one thumbnail selected Cue up amp Still Cue up the selected thumbnail Cue up amp Play Cue up and play the selected thumbnail Sort Clip List by Selects a method to sort the clip list Name A Z Sort in ascending alphabetic order Date Newest First Sort by date and time of creation newest clip list first Sort Planning Metadata by Selects a method to sort the planning metadata Name A Z Sort in ascending alphabetic order Date Newest First Sort by date and time of creation newest planning metadata first Display Title Selects whether to display clip and clip list titles On Display the title if it has been set Otherwise display the clip name or clip list name Off Do not display the title Always display the clip name or clip list name Planning Clip Name in Clip Info Area Selects whether to display in the viewfinder the title contained in a planning metadata file that is loaded into this unit Off Do not display title ASCII Clip Name Display title in ASCII format Clip Name Display title in UTF 8 format Disable Format Disc Selects whether to disable the Format Disc command Disable Disable the command Enable Enable the command Overview su 199 N9 ul suoneiedo 1e1deu 103 SU88J9S f15 8 Ja deyuD 104 Item Operation Setting Select Mouse Pointer Selects the speed of the USB mouse
156. Noise suppression circuits New noise suppression circuits offer improved performance under difficult evening or nighttime shooting conditions Slow shutter function A maximum of 16 frames can be accumulated using the slow shutter function In low light levels this allows clear and noiseless video to be shot and provides a fantasy video effect with ghost images Time lapse function interval recording Using this function slow moving subjects can be shot with the movement compressed in time This is convenient for many applications such as monitoring plant growth or the progress of a construction site Freeze mix function This allows a still image from previously captured video to be aligned with the current video output from the camera Thus you can adjust the camera position to get exactly the same framing for new shots For example this function makes it easy to frame summer and winter shots of a landscape scene in exactly the same way Digital extender function This magnifies the center section of the video It utilizes electronic processing which prevents the decrease in sensitivity F drop that occurs when the lens extender function is used Focus magnification function This magnifies the center section of the viewfinder by a factor of about two It enables highly precise focus adjustments in HD shooting Assignable switches Frequently used function can be assigned to switches for quick and convenient operation
157. ON LOW KEY SAT OFF ON Turns the low key saturation function on or off L KEY SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the saturation level of the low luminance part L KEY SAT RANGE LOW L MID H MID Sets the luminance level at which HIGH the low key saturation function becomes effective Y BLACK GAMMA OFF ON Turns the Y black gamma function on or off Y BLK GAM LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the gamma curve in the low luminance part Y BLK GAM RANGE LOW L MID H MID Sets the luminance level at which HIGH the Y black gamma becomes effective 15 NOISE NOISE SUPPRESS OFF ON Turn on and off the noise SUPPRESS suppression function Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 JajdeyD 145 pejreijeq pue s ejds q 9 4 2 146 No Page Item Settings Description 16 SCENE FILE 1 STANDARD Recalls the scene file saved in the 2 STANDARD memory of the camcorder 3 STANDARD 4 STANDARD 5 STANDARD STANDARD Clears all current detail adjusted settings and switch settings and returns the settings to the standard settings saved in the reference file SCENE RECALL Recalls the scene file from the memory of the camcorder or the Memory Stick SCENE STORE Stores the scene file in the memory of the camcorder or the Memory Stick FID Blank up to 16 Sets the File ID characters MAINTENANCE menu No Page Item Settings Description 01 WHITE WHT SHAD R G B TEST Sele
158. ONT MIC LEVEL control 52 LEVEL CH 2 control linked with MIC LEVEL control When you have operation of the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together if the MIC LEVEL control is set to 0 the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded Check the position of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 controls Manually adjusting the audio level of the MIC IN connector If the XLR connection automatic detection mode is on when the cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connectors the camcorder detects the connection to the AUDIO IN CHI CH2 connectors Thus the AUDIO IN switches are internally reset to REAR and the audio signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors are automatically selected Before adjusting the audio level of the front microphone confirm that no cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CHI CH2 connectors Alternatively set the REAR XLR AUTO item to OFF on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu 1 Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch es to FRONT 2 Setthe AUDIO SELECT switch es for the desired channel s selected in step 1 to MANUAL 3 Turn the MIC LEVEL control and adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to 20 dB for a normal input volume Correspondence between recording level adjustments and audio level controls On the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu you
159. Other files Files other than the above No No a Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE b Only files which can be written by XDCAM Clip directory Directories cannot be created in the root directory The directories in the root directory Clip Edit Sub UserData General and PROAV cannot be deleted or renamed File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write C MXF9 Clip file created by recording MXF file Yes No 9 Yes Yes Yes 9 0001 to 9999 C MOI XML 9 when C MXF file is created 0001 to 9999 Metadata file generated automatically Yes Yes No 8 No C MO2 KLV 9 User metadata file This type of file is Yes Yes No Yes yes P generated automatically during recording via an FTP or FAM connection when the unit recognizes that an MXF file contains metadata that was generated by a non XDCAM device 0001 to 9999 Other files Files other than the above No No a The C part can be changed to a user defined name b Overwriting is not possible c Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length in a format matching the format system frequency 59 941 501 or 25P and recording format MPEG HD422 and number of audio channels of the recorded sections of the disc and which can be overwritten by XDCAM d Any clip may be selected and deleted e
160. P 50P When the area of use is set to PAL AREA b When the optional CBKZ MD0O1 SD Record and Playback Software is installed Audio Recording format Number of channels 24bit 48kHz 8 channels 4 channels P 16bit 48kHz 8 channels 4 channels a When the video recording format is set to MPEG HD422 50 b When the video recording format is set to MPEG IMX 50 40 30 c When the video recording format is set to MPEG HD420 HQ SP or DVCAM It is not possible to combine material recorded in different system frequencies and recording formats on a single disc although 1080 50i and 1080 25P materials can be combined This unit can record up to four channels of audio If you select a format with eight channels of audio silence is recorded in channels 5 to 8 Setting the system frequency 1 Display the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu 0240F0RMAT TOP SYSTEM LINE 1080 SYSTEM FREQUENCY 59 91 REC FORMAT HD422 50 COUNTRY 1 NTSC J AREA For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select SYSTEM FREQUENCY and turn the MENU knob to select the desired system frequency You can select the frequency shown below depending on the combination of the COUNTRY and SYSTEM LINE settings COUNTRY SYSTEM SYSTEM LINE FREQUENCY NTSC J AREA 1080 59 9i 29 9P NTSC AREA 720 59 9P PAL AREA 1080 50i 25P 720 50P Change the COUNTRY or SYSTEM LINE
161. PDZ 1 Computer PC with Intel Pentium M processor atleast 1 GHz installed memory at least 512 MB Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2 or higher Windows Vista Ultimate Business 32 bit or Mac OS X v10 4 11 or higher Web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 SP1 or higher DirectX DirectX 8 1b or higher To install PDZ 1 Insert the supplied CD ROM XDCAM Application Software into the CD ROM drive of your computer and run the installer in the PDZ 1 directory For details refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD ROM disc Make sure that the hard disk drive on which the work folder to store the material transferred from this unit has adequate free space To transfer files between the computer and this unit requires this unit s IP address and other network related settings to be made Using PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software xipueddy 231 List of Supported USB Keyboards When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA
162. Picture Cache mode Picture Cache time How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu 00SOREC FUNCTION CACHE INTVAL REC DISC EXCHG CACHE For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select CACHE REC and turn the MENU knob to display CACHE 3 Select CACHE REC TIME and turn the MENU knob to display the desired Picture Cache time As you turn the MENU knob the Picture Cache time changes as follows 0 25 gt 2 45 gt 4 65 lt gt 6 8s gt 8 10s gt 18 205 lt gt 28 30s The Picture Cache mode settings once made continue to be effective until changed You can assign the Picture Cache on off function to one of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches COLOR TEMP button and RET button on the lens For details see Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches on page 179 You do a menu operation to change the Picture Cache time while the camcorder is in recording mode However the new setting takes effect only after the recording is finished In Picture Cache mode the internal timecode generator operating mode is always F RUN regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode The recording procedure in Picture Cache mode is basically the same as that for normal recording However note the following differences When
163. R 855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit DWR S01D Digital Wireless Receiver amp N PFD23A PFD50DLA Professional disc PDW 700 CBK HD01 CBK SC02 CBKZ MD01 u RM B150 B750 HD SD SDI Analog SD Record ee 1 Remote Control Unit Input Board Composite and Playback 20 Input Board Software VCT 14 Tripod HDCA 702 adaptor MPEG TS Adaptor Tripod BP GL95 GL65 BC M150 L60S L80S Battery Battery Battery Pack Charger Charger M LC DS300SFT X Soft carrying case 9 BC L500 Battery Charger AC DN10 DN2B AC Adaptor LC 777 Hard carrying case The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with lens and microphone mounted However remove them if they protrude more than 25 cm from the front of the main unit 230 Chart of Optional Components and Accessories Using PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software When a computer with the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software installed is connected to this unit you can transfer the proxy AV data and metadata files recorded on a disc to the computer On the computer side PDZ 1 enables you to browse the proxy AV data add or modify metadata titles comments essence marks etc or create a clip list The modified metadata and the created clip list can then be written back to the disc loaded in this unit For more information about PDZ 1 functions and operations refer to the PDZ 1 help System requirements The following are required to use
164. RONT MIC LEVEL control F S1 LEVEL control left side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other REAR2 WRR SIDE2 FRONT Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio LEVEL F S2 level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel SIDE 2 LEVEL control right side FRONT MIC LEVEL control F4S2 LEVEL control right side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other AUDIO CH3 FIX FRONT Selects the audio level recorded on channel 3 LEVEL 9 FIX Fixed FRONT Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel of the camcorder AUDIO CH4 FIX FRONT Selects the audio level recorded on channel 4 LEVEL 9 FIX Fixed FRONT Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL control on the front panel of the camcorder pue s ejdsiq 9 1 2 Menu List 151 pue s ejds q 9 4 2 152 No Page Item Settings Description 09 WRR WRR VALID CH ALL CHI Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the SETTING SEL wireless receiver or channel 1 only ALL Enable both channel 1 and 2 CHI Enable channel 1 only Select this setting to use the wireless receiver as a monaural receiver WRR CH TX1 TX2 Specifies the target channel for other items in this SELECT menu
165. S 460 to 0 to 459 IRIS VAR V POS 250 to 0 to 249 17 SHOTID ID 1 Blank up to 12 For details see Setting the shot characters ID on page 176 ID 2 Blank up to 12 characters ID 3 Blank up to 12 characters ID 4 Blank up to 12 characters 18 SHOT DISP SHOT DATE OFF ON For details see Recording shot SHOT TIME OFF ON data superimposed on the color SHOT MODEL NAME OFF ON Dars on page 173 SHOT SERIAL NO OFF ON SHOT ID SEL OFF ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 SHOT 16 9 CHARA OFF ON SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF ON 19 SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL OFF ON For details see Displaying the STATUS SYSTEM OFF ON status confirmation screens on STATUS FUNCTION OFF ON page dy STATUS AUDIO OFF ON Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 20 WHITE WHITE SWITCH lt B gt MEM ATW Specifies the operating mode SETTING when the WHITE BAL switch is set to the B side MEM Auto white balance ATW Auto tracing white balance SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF 1 2 3 Specifies the transition time when the WHITE BAL switch is changed to a new setting 1 is fastest ATW SPEED 1 2 3 4 5 Switches the transition speed of auto tracing white balance ATW 1 is fastest AWB FIXED AREA OFF ON Executes AWB auto white balance at the center of the screen FILTER WHT MEM OFF ON Specifies whether to allocate a white balance memory slot for each position number of the FILTER selector 21 OFFSET WHT O
166. SD SDI or composite signals SD signals can be upconverted and recorded as HD signals Gen lock input connector Enables synchronized operation of multiple units with synchronization possible to either VBS or HD Y signals Audio input connectors Supports AES EBU signal input in addition to microphone input 48 V microphone input and line input Timecode input and output connectors Network connector and i LINK connector Enable transfer of MXF format files Material recorded in the field can be transferred to a computer for immediate cut editing with the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software Features for improved performance under various shooting conditions Picture Cache function The unit can utilize its internal memory to continuously record the current video input allowing recording to commence a certain time 2 Features to 30 seconds in advance of the time when the recording button is pressed and allowing discs to be exchanged seamlessly without interrupting the recording Color temperature filters Color temperature filters are composed of electronic circuits allowing smooth and instantaneous switching an important advantage in ENG Electronic News Gathering and linked operation with ND filters Dedicated switches are provided to enable rapid switching between color temperature filters and absolute color temperature settings can be recalled instantly without being effected by white balance settings
167. SS 1 LASER PRODUCT eingestuft Daten der Laserdiode Wellenlange 400 bis 410 nm Emissionsdauer Ununterbrochen Laser Ausgangsleistung 135 mW max Impulsspitze 65 mW max Dauerstrich Standard IEC60825 1 2001 Dieser Aufkleber befindet sich hinter der AuBenabdeckung des Ger ts For U S A ION Laser radiation when open and interlock defeate DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM For EUROPE CAUTION CLASS 2 LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM ATTENTION RADIATIONS LASER DE CLASSE EN CAS DOUVERTURE ET DE DESACTIVATION DES VERROUS NE PAS REGARDER LE FAISCEAU VORSICHT KLASSE 2 LASERSTRAHLUNG EOFFNET UND NICHT IN DEN STRAHL SEHEN DVARSEL LASERSTR LING AF KLASSE 2 OG OMGAELSE AF NI STIR IKKE IND LYSSTRALEN ADVARSEL LASERSTRALING KLASSE 2 NAR DEKSELET ER APENT OG ITE AV FUNKSJON IKKE STIRR INN STR LEN VARNING KLASS 2 LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPNAD OCH SPARRMEKANISMER AR FRIGJORDA TITTA INTE IN LASERSTR LEN RO 2 LASERSATEILYA AVATTUNA JA SISAISET LUKITUKSET POISTETTUINA ALA KATSO SATEESEEN ag VORSICHT Der Einsatz von optischen Hilfen verst rkt die Gefahr von Augensch den Bei Bet tigung von Bedien und Einstellteilen oder Ausf hrung von Bedienvorg ngen die nicht ausdr cklich in dieser Bedienungsanleitung aufgef hrt sind droht u U die Einwirkung gef hrlicher Lase
168. Select gt To switch the information displayed for clip lists Press the right arrow button With each press the display changes in the order Name amp Date Name amp Title Name amp Short Date To sort clip lists Select one of the following orders by selecting Settings gt Sort Clip List By in the Disc Menu Name A Z Sort in ascending order by clip list name Date Newest First Sort by date and time of clip list creation newest first Select the desired clip list name and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To save under the same name The following procedure saves the current clip list under its current name the name that appears in the clip list thumbnail screen See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu see page 104 2 SelectSave Clip List and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The clip list is saved However Save Clip List as is executed when the name displayed in the clip list thumbnail screen is no name If you press the EJECT button before saving a new or edited clip list a message appears asking if you want to discard your changes and continue Follow the instructions in the message to continue or cancel the operation Scene Selection Clip List Editing Managing clip lists To load clip lists The following procedure lo
169. T 1 page How to select an item in the menu screen Turn is set to HD Y and TEST OUT SAVE on the the MENU knob to move to the desired item POWER SAVE page is set to OFF 174 Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor The four items ASPECT ASPECT SELECT ASPECT MASK and ASPECT MASK LVL are ignored when the recording format is IMX50 40 30 or DVCAM and the aspect ratio is 4 3 MARKER 2 page Item Description USER BOX Turns the display of the box cursor on and off USER BOX Sets the width of the box WIDTH cursor distance from center to left or right edge USER BOX Sets the height of the box HEIGHT cursor distance from center to top or bottom edge USER BOX Sets the horizontal position of H POS the center of the box cursor USER BOX Sets the vertical position of the V POS center of the box cursor CENTERH Sets the horizontal position of POS the center marker CENTER V Sets the vertical position of the POS center marker ASPECT Turns the display of the aspect SAFE ZONE safety zone on and off ASPECT Selects the range of the aspect SAFE AREA safety zone 80 90 92 5 95 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Setting the viewfinder You can make settings for viewfinder screen display functions How to select an item in the men
170. T NO 5 11 0 to 15 0V When the battery type to 17 0V 0 1 judgment is OTHER sets V steps the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 5 should turn off SEGMENT NO 4 11 0 to 14 0V When the battery type to 17 0V 0 1 judgment is OTHER sets V steps the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 4 should turn off SEGMENT NO 3 11 0V to 13 0V When the battery type to 17 0V 0 1 judgment is OTHER sets V steps the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 3 should turn off SEGMENT NO 2 11 0V to 12 0V When the battery type to 17 0V 0 1 judgment is OTHER sets V steps the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 2 should turn off SEGMENT NO 1 11 0V to 17 0V When the battery type 0 1 V steps judgment is OTHER sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 1 should turn off Menu List sBumes pojrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 JajdeyD 149 pue s ejds q 9 4 2 150 No Page Item Settings Description 06 AUDIO 1 FRONT MIC MONO STREO Input mode selection for front microphone SELECT AUDIO CH3 4 CH1 2 SW Selects the sources to be recorded to channels CH MODE 3 4 CH1 2 Same sources as CH 1 2 SW Signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH
171. T is selected the setting is linked to the setting of TEST OUT SELECT TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT connector LENS R G B SAW 9 99 to 99 Adjusts the H Saw white shading compensation LENS R G B H PARA 99 to 99 Adjusts the H Parabola white shading compensation LENS R G B V SAW 9 99 to 99 Adjusts the V Saw white shading compensation LENS R G B V 99 to 99 Adjusts the V Parabola white PARA 9 shading compensation 09 MEMORY M S FORMAT EXEC Format Memory Stick STICK M S IN JUMP TO OFF USER ALL For details see Jumping to a SCENE LENS REFER File Related Menu Page When USERI Inserting a Memory Stick on page 193 a EX is displayed when the extender is on and 08 is displayed when the shrinker is on DIAGNOSIS menu No Page Item Description 01 HOURS METER OPERATION Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on in units of hours LASER Displays the total number of output parameters to the optical heads OPERATION rst Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on in units of hours reset possible SPINDLE rst Displays the total time that the spindle has been rotating in units of hours reset possible LOADING rst Displays the number of times that discs have been loaded reset possible SEEK rst Displays the total seek time by the optical heads in
172. TEILYLLE VARNING OM APPARATEN ANVANDS PA ANNAT SATT AN DENNA BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS KAN ANVANDAREN UTSATTAS FOR OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING SOM OVERSKRIDER GRANSEN FOR LASERKLASS 1 For the customers in the U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment
173. TIME and turn the MENU knob to select the desired total time for shooting As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows 5MIN gt 10MIN gt 15MIN gt 20MIN lt gt 30MIN 40MIN gt 50MIN lt gt gt 2H gt 4H 4 5H gt 7H gt 10H gt 15H gt 20H gt 40H gt 50H gt 70H lt gt 100H Here MIN means minutes 5MIN is 5 minutes and H means hours 1H is one hour 4 Select REC TIME and turn the MENU knob to select the desired time to be recorded on the disc As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows SSEC 10SEC gt 15SEC 4 20SEC 30SEC gt 40SEC 4 50SEC gt IMIN 85MIN Here SEC means seconds 5SEC is 5 seconds and MIN means minutes 1 MIN is one minute You cannot set a REC TIME that is more than one thirtieth of TAKE TOTAL TIME The setting value changes within the range that can be set For example When TAKE TOTAL TIME is set to 1H the maximum value of REC TIME is 2 MIN 60 minutes divided by 30 gives 2 minutes D As required select PRE LIGHTING and turn the MENU knob to select the lighting on time before recording starts As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows OFF lt 2SEC gt 5SEC gt 10SEC Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording The light switch must also be set to ON With these settings th
174. TIME ZONE Time difference from UTC For details on how to enter characters see Setting the shot ID page 176 3 Press the MENU knob About UMID ownership information COUNTRY CODE Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string 4 byte alphanumeric strings according to the values defined in ISO 3166 1 There are about 240 country codes Find your own country code on the following home page Refer to ISO 3166 1 http www iso org iso country codes iso_3166_code_lists htm When the country code is less than 4 bytes the active part of the code will occupy the first part of the 4 bytes and the remainder must be filled with the space character 20h Example In the case of Japan For Japan if the country code is JP it is 2 bytes if JPN it is 3 bytes Thus enter the following JP__ or JPN where _ represents a space ORGANIZATION organization code Enter an abbreviated 4 byte alphanumeric string for the organization code Organization codes must be acquired by applying to the SMPTE registration office When no organization code has been acquired it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary string As a rule the code 00 must be entered Freelance operators who do not belong to an origination should enter There are no problems in recording or playing back audio video signals if ORGANIZATION is not set USER CODE Enter the 4 byte alphanumeric strings for user identification The user code i
175. The output of the LIGHT connector on the camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power through the DC IN connector or battery pack The brightness or color temperature of the light will not change according to voltage increase Do not use a video light with power consumption of over 50 W The brightness or color temperature of the light will change when the voltage supplied through the DC IN connector or from the battery pack is under 12 V To attach the video light Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on the camcorder grip and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT connector The accessory fitting shoe on this unit is of the 1 4 inch tapped hole type If you want to replace this with a slide type shoe contact a Sony service representative Using the Shoulder Strap To attach the shoulder strap 1 Fitoneofthe clips to a shoulder strap fitting Pull up the strap to lock the fitting SS 2 Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap fitting on the other side of the grip in the same way as in step 1 Connecting a Video Light Using the Shoulder Strap suonejedeJjg z 1e1deuj 51 To remove the shoulder sap Rel usting the Shoulder Press here and pull in the direction shown by the arrow to release Pa d Positi 0 n 98 a wie S 8 You can shift the shoulder pad from its center position the factory d
176. This icon appears when the clip is locked protected see page 112 Clips cannot be deleted and their clip information cannot be changed when this mark is displayed Clip list thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of the clips in the current clip list You can use this screen to create and edit clips lists TC 00 00 35 15 TC 00 00 28 08 TC 00 01 17 27 2 Clip list name Displays the name of the clip list When the clip list has a title it is displayed as TITLEO0001 see page 88 Clip list names can be displayed in European languages when the area of use see page 41 is set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA To display the clip list title Settings gt Display Title in the Disc Menu needs to be set to On Selection frame See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 97 Sub clip number number of sub clips Displays the total number of sub clips in the clip list and the number of the selected sub clip Scrollbar See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 97 Clip list date and time Displays the date and time when the clip list was created or the date and time of its most recent modification An asterisk appears after the date and time of creation when the current clip list has not been saved to the disc New File appears when no clip list has been loaded into the unit s memory and when a clip list has been cleared from the unit s memo
177. U knob The current clip list returns to the unnamed state name To delete clip lists The following procedure deletes a clip list from the disc See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 2 4 In the clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu Select Delete Clip List and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A list of clip lists appears Select the clip list that you want to delete and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion Delete Clip List E0001 Delete this Clip List OK Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To sort clip lists See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 2 In the clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu Select Settings and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Select Sort Clip List by and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob 4 Select one of the following sort methods and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Name A Z Sort in ascending order by clip list name Date Newest First Sort by date and time of clip list creation newest first Clip lists will be displayed in the specified order the next time that you carry out an operation such as loading a clip list Scene Selection Clip List Editing SueeiJoS IND suonesedo
178. VTR button on the lens If the recording start stop function is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switches COLOR TEMP button or RET button on the lens you can also use this switch On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches see page 179 Basic Procedure for Shooting During recording the REC indicator lights in the viewfinder Perform zooming and focus control if necessary During recording while the ACCESS indicator is lit do not remove the battery pack If you do the internal processing for recording may not finish properly which may cause the last few seconds of recording to be lost For details see Handling of discs when recording does not end normally salvage function on page 75 To stop recording press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens again The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off The material recorded from step 5 to step 6 is saved as a single clip To check the last two seconds of the recording recording review If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is paused the last two seconds of the recording is played back If you hold down the RET button a low speed reverse search begins at a position two seconds before the recording end position When you release the RET button the reverse search stops and playback in the forward direction begins After playback the camcorder is ready to start recording again By assigning the the same function as th
179. Y ASPECT switch 32 E EARPHONE jack 18 30 ECS Extended Clear Scan mode 63 E E Electric to Electric 18 EJECT button 22 Electric color temperature filter 34 Electrical CC filter switching 59 60 Electronic shutter 61 Essence mark finding scenes 107 recording 81 thumbnail screen 100 Ethernet connector 29 Expand thumbnail screen 99 Index Expand function 106 Extender 33 External battery 34 External input status 35 Eyecup 31 F FFWD button 22 F REV button 22 File ALL 128 ID 188 lens 128 reference 128 scene 128 user 128 File access mode for Macintosh 202 for Windows 200 FILE menu 128 158 File operations 195 file access mode FTP 204 recording continuous timecode 209 restrictions 196 Filter 34 FILTER selector 18 Fitting for optional microphone holder 17 Flange focal length adjusting 44 Focus magnification function 181 Format 55 Freeze mix function 180 F RUN SET R RUN switch 27 FTP 204 command list 205 200 202 G GAIN selector 20 Gain value 34 setting 178 GENLOCK IN connector 28 Green tally indicator 32 GUI screen operations 104 switching 96 GUI screen operations section 27 HOLD CHAPTER button 23 i LINK S400 connector 30 Index picture changing 109 Indicators and status display 31 Internal clock 42 Interval Rec function 83 Iris setting auto iris override 35 Iris automatic adjustment 64 L LCD monitor 21 selecting display items 172 status display 23 Lenscable clamp 17 LENS
180. a stepwise transition from SD to HD systems A multi format conversion function enables up and down conversion between SD and HD and cross conversion between 1080 and 720 Squeeze edge cropping and letterbox are selectable as the aspect pattern in up and down conversion between SD and HD 1 When the current recording format is 720 59 94P you can shoot in 23 98P mode However as soon as it is shot the video undergoes 2 3 pulldown and is recorded as 59 94P 2 A verification key is required to use the CBKZ MD01 software after installation For details contact a Sony service representative It is not possible to combine material recorded in different system frequencies and recording formats on a single disc although 1080 50i and 1080 25P materials can be combined Recording of more than 90 minutes of high quality video and audio data Signals captured by the full HD 1920 x 1080 image sensors are recorded in MPEG HD422 format P for consistently high image quality 2 The unit supports recording of four audio channels sampled at 24 bits for high quality Dual layer Professional discs can record about 95 minutes of high quality video and audio data The generous recording times and the high quality of the recorded video and audio allow this unit to meet the most stringent requirements of production teams in a wide range of genres from news gathering through digital cinema and program production
181. ack balance adjustment cannot be completed normally an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen Possible messages are listed below Error message Meaning ABB NG IRIS NOT CLOSE The lens iris did not close adjustment was impossible ABB NG Adjustment could not be TIME LIMIT completed within the standard number of attempts ABB NG The difference between the R or G or B reference value and the OVERFLOW current value is so great that it exceeds the range Adjustment was impossible If any of the above error messages is displayed retry the black balance adjustment Keep pushing the AUTO W B BAL switch to BLK until BLACK SET appears after BLACK BALANCE appears If the error message occurs again an internal check is necessary For information about this internal check refer to the Maintenance Manual If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS connector it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris If this happens the black balance will be incorrect Black balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the black balance is next adjusted If a memory error occurs If the error message STORED DATA NG flashes on the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on the black balance and white balance memory contents have been lost Adjust the black balance and white balance again Contact a Sony representative if
182. active press the PREV button or the NEXT button Using the chapter function to find scenes Sections between shot marks and Rec Start are called chapters Rec Start essence marks are set automatically at the start of recording but shot marks can be set at any scene during recording or playback The chapter function allows you to display thumbnails of the chapters in a clip See Recording essence marks page 81 for more information See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of a clip with chapters set The S mark appears on the thumbnails of clips with chapters set 2 Pressthe HOLD CHAPTER button The chapter thumbnail screen see page 100 appears with thumbnails of the frames where chapters are set The S1 S2 and RS marks on the thumbnails indicate frames where Shot Mark1 Shot Mark2 and Rec Start essence marks are set To delete the shot mark at a chapter position Youcan delete the shot mark Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2 at the chapter position in the chapter thumbnail screen Rec Satrt essence marks cannot be deleted 1 m the chapter thumbnail screen select the thumbnail for the frame whose shot mark you want to delete 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Delete Shot Mark A message appears asking if you are sure that you want to delete the shot mark Delete Shot Mark Delete 002 OK Selec
183. ads a clip list stored on the disc into the unit s internal memory as the current clip list See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu 2 SelectLoad Clip List and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A list of clip lists stored on the disc appears Disc Menu lii Load Clip List Name amp Date Sorted by E0003 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0004 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0005 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0006 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0007 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0095 18 MAY2006 10 25 E0098 13 JUN2006 13 43 Display Select J Select the desired clip list and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The name of the clip list selected here appears in the clip list thumbnail screen When you execute the Save Clip List command in the Disc Menu the clip list will be saved under that name To create a new clip list Select New File and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To clear clip lists The following procedure clears the current clip list from the unit s internal memory See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu 2 Select Clear Clip List and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to clear the clip list Select and then press SET S SEL button or the MEN
184. age DISC ERROR appears the video freezes and the audio output is suppressed If this happens check the following points Whether the disc displays the same playback condition on other XDCAM devices If so the surface of the disc may be dirty or scratched or the performance of the recording layers on the disc may have worsened due to age Do not use discs with these symptoms Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM device displays the same playback conditions If so the performance of the laser diodes may have deteriorated Check the total optical output time Deleting the recorded clip For details see Deleting clips on page 113 Advanced Operations for Shooting Recording essence marks Shot marks and other essence marks can be recorded on the disc Recording essence marks for scenes containing important images and sounds enables quick access to the marked points This increases editing efficiency To record a shot mark using the RET button on the lens To make it possible to record shot marks using the RET button on the lens carry out the following procedure How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu M11OESSENCE MARK RET SHOT MARK 1 RET SHOT MARK 2 INDEX PIC POS For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select the essence mark to be
185. alleviate the problem of white flecks in SLS mode Vertical smear When an extremely bright object such as a strong spotlight or flashlight is being shot vertical tails may be produced on the screen or the image may be distorted Monitor screen Vertical tails shown on the image Bright object e g strong spotlight strong reflected light flashlight the sun Aliasing When fine patterns stripes or lines are shot they may appear jagged or flicker Important Notes on Operation 225 xipueddy 226 Specifications General Power voltage 12 V DC 45 0 1 0 V Power consumption Approx 40 W D Approx 44 W 2 Approx 46 W 3 Do not allow the total power consumption of this unit and peripherals to exceed 100 W when peripherals are connected However power consumed by the HDCA 702 MPEG TS Adaptor is not counted in the total power consumption 1 Recording main unit only power from battery pack VDR SAVE STBY switch set to SAVE LCD monitor on backlight low 2 Recording options installed HDVF 20A viewfinder ECM 680S microphone lens power from battery pack VDR SAVE STBY switch set to SAVE LCD monitor on backlight low 3 Recording options installed HDVF 20A viewfinder ECM 680S microphone lens DC power VDR SAVE STBY switch set to STBY LCD monitor on backlight high Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C 23 F to 104 F Operating humidity 10 to 90 relativ
186. alues for the GAIN selector positions 178 Selecting the output signals sss 2 179 Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches sess 179 Setting power saving functions seeseeeeeeeeeee 182 Setting the color temperature manually sss 182 Specifying an offset for the auto white balance setting 183 Selecting the lens file n eoe 183 Setting the data eee 184 Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data Handling the Memory Stick eee reete eee eese esee 186 Saving and Recalling User Files eeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eee entes 187 Saving user menu data to the Memory Stick 187 Loading saved data from a Memory Stick 189 Returning the user file settings to the standard settings 190 Table of Contents 9 Saving and Loading Scene Files s csscssssscssscecseccescescssescssessessesees 190 Saving a scene file teen eee assert etes 190 Loading scene files sese 192 Returning the scene file settings to the standard settings 193 Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory Stick EAE EAEE AAE AES RISE 193 Chapter 8 File Operations 195 Directory Structure Set coit ode eee ee
187. amera Condensation If you move the camcorder from a very cold place to a warm place or use it in a damp location condensation may form on the optical pickup Then if the camcorder is operated in this state recording and playback may not be performed properly Do the following to prevent this from happening When you move or operate the camcorder in an environment where condensation may form be sure to load a disc in advance and close the disc compartment lid Whenever you turn on the power check that the HUMID indicator does not appear on the color LCD If it appears wait until it disappears before loading a disc For details see Loading and unloading a disc on page 74 and Operation Warnings on page 216 Fitting the zoom lens It is important to fit the lens correctly as otherwise damage may result Be sure to refer to the section Mounting the Lens on page 43 Viewfinder Do not leave the unit with the eyepiece pointing directly at the sun The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun s rays and melt the interior of the viewfinder Do not use the viewfinder close to strong magnetic fields This can cause picture distortion About the LCD panels LCD panels are manufactured with extremely high precision technology that yields effective pixel rates of 99 99 or higher However very rarely one or more pixels may be permanently dark or permanently lit in white red blue or green This ph
188. arting a shoot with a few seconds of pre stored picture data Picture Cache function The camcorder has a large capacity internal memory in which you can cache the last few seconds maximum 30 seconds of captured video and audio so that recording starts from a point just before you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens Setting the Picture Cache mode Picture Cache time To record in Picture Cache mode you need to turn on Picture Cache mode and set the picture data storage time Picture Cache time using the USER menu The Picture Cache time determines the number of seconds recorded from the Picture Cache counting back from the time when you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the Advanced Operations for Shooting lens to start recording However the number of seconds actually recorded from the Picture Cache may be shorter immediately after the setting of the VDR SAVE STBY switch is changed and in the special situations explained in the following notes Storage of images to memory begins after you select Picture Cache mode If you begin recoding immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode images from before the selection will not be recorded During playback recording review or GUI screen operations no data is saved to the Picture Cache memory Thus it is not possible to use this function to rerecord the last few seconds of material from playback or recording review To set the
189. at of the RET button on the lens to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch or COLOR TEMP button you can use the switch in the same way as the lens RET button On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches see page 179 Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required for shooting Each time you repeat steps 5 and 6 successive clips are recorded on the disc Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 REC REC START 5 START STOP START STOP Itis not possible to record a clip shorter than 2 seconds If you stop recording within 2 seconds of starting this results in a 2 second clip If you stop recording and restart within 2 seconds of the original start this creates a single continuous clip from the original start time The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on a single disc is 300 If an attempt is made to record more than 300 clips the error message MAX Clips appears even if there is free capacity on the disc Playback control buttons During recording the playback control buttons EJECT F REV F FWD NEXT PREV PLAY PAUSE STOP have no effect Playing back the recorded clip Normal playback By pressing the PLAY PAUSE button you can review any length of recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or in color on the LCD monitor There are two other ways to review the recording Recording review You can view the last two seconds of the recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or in c
190. ate In this case the message RE TAKE NOT ALLOWED appears When you want to replace the last clip with a new clip delete the clip see page 113 Once you carry out a retake operation the last clip is deleted even if you do not carry out a recording operation afterwards Assigning user defined clip titles automatically About the automatic title generation function By default clips on each disc are assigned names in the range C0001 MXF to C9999 MXF For this reason two discs can contain clips with the same names The automatic title generation function allows you to assign titles to all of the clips on several discs which facilitates clip management For example if the titles TITLE00001 to TITLE00020 are assigned to clips CO001 MXF to C0020 MXF on disc 1 then the titles TITLE00021 to TITLE00037 are assigned to clips C0001 MXF to C0017 MXF on disc 2 Titles are made up of prefixes up to 10 characters in length and five digit serial numbers such as TITLE 00001 f TITLE00020 f TITLE00037 f 00021 Clips recorded on Disc 2 Setting the title prefix You can assign title prefixes by choosing from a prefix list stored in internal memory or by entering the prefix directly However to choose from a prefix list you must create the list beforehand on a computer and transfer it to the unit s internal memory with a Memory Stick Setting the initial value of the s
191. ating and editing a clip list you need to save it to disc Unit memory Current clip list can be edited Clip list adding deleting and b cli reordering sub clips display SAVE amp LOAD Disc C0001 Clip 1 C0002 Clip 2 C0003 Clip 3 E0001 Clip list 1 E0002 Clip list 2 E0003 Clip list 3 E0099 Clip list 99 Clip list playback Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc To play a clip list insert a disc into the unit load the clip list that you want to play and press the PLAY PAUSE button Clips are played according to the data in the clip list Creating and editing clip lists The following table lists the steps in the creation and editing of clip lists with the scene selection function To create a clip list you always need to carry out the steps inside the heavy lines Other steps can be carried out as required Scene Selection Clip List Editing su 199 ND ul 1e1deu 115 SueeJog MH suonejedo 1 1 2 116 Add sub clips Use the Add Sub Clips command to add the clips you want to use to a clip list You can add up to 300 sub clips to one clip list This operation can be carried out in the following thumbnail screens Clip thumbnail screen Expand thumbnail screen Chapter thumbnail screen Clip list thumbnail screen 2 Change the sub clip order Use the Move Sub Clips command to cha
192. ation For Windows Vista 1 Select Control Panel gt Programs open the Programs and Features window right click in the window s header bar including the Name Publisher and other headers and select Others 2 In the Choose Details dialog check the Version check box and click OK The Version File Operations in File Access Mode for Windows column is displayed allowing you to check the version of ProDisc To enable FAM connections over the i LINK connector How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu then press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 UO7OPOWER SAVE TOP gt ETHERNET USB DSABL iLINK FAM DSABL REC AUDIO OUT i EE 2 Move to i LINK FAM then press the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to select ENABL then press the MENU knob The message Valid after power off appears Power the camcorder off and then power it on again The setting made in step 3 is enabled Making FAM connections 1 r there is a disc loaded in this unit put the unit into the following state Recording playback search and other disc operations Stopped THUMBNAIL indicator Off Disc access by clip deletion disc formatting or other operation Stopped Picture Cache function and Interval Rec function Off
193. ay Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Shooting a subject indoors against a background through a window Any high contrast scene E WHITE BAL white balance memory switch Controls adjustment of the white balance PRST Adjusts the color temperature to the preset value the factory default setting 3200K Use this setting when you have no time to adjust the white balance A or B Recall the white balance adjustment settings already stored in A or B Flick the AUTO W B BAL switch see page 18 on the WHT side to automatically adjust the white balance and save the adjustment settings in memory A or memory B You can use the AUTO W B BAL switch even when ATW P is in use B ATW When this switch is set to B and WHITE SWITCH B is set to ATW on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu ATW is activated When this switch is adjusted the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about three seconds 1 ATW Auto Tracing White Balance The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions STATUS ON SEL OFF menu display on page selection display off switch To enable this switch set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF ON SEL Each time this switch is pushed upward a window to confirm the menu settings and status of
194. ay Title in the Disc Menu needs to be set to On g Duration Displays the time from the selected thumbnail to the next one Chapter thumbnail screen The sections between essence marks shot marks that have been set in clips and Rec Start essence marks are called chapters The sections between shot mark and Rec Start essence marks in clips are called chapters This screen allows you to display thumbnails of the chapters in the selected clip Shot marks can be set during recording and playback They can be deleted and moved Rec Start essence marks are set automatically at the start of recording They cannot be deleted or moved 7 Overview Selection frame See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 97 Clip number total clips Displays the total number of clips on the disc and the number of the clip that contains the displayed chapters S1 S2 RS marks The S1 S2 and RS marks on the thumbnails indicate frames where Shot Mark1 Shot Mark2 and Rec Start essence marks are set Chapter number total chapters Displays the total number of chapters and the number of the selected chapter The total number of chapters is the total number of chapters in the specified clip only Scrollbar See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 97 3 Clip name Displays the name of the clip that contains the selected frame When the clip has a title it is displa
195. balance 3 for channel B Turn the MENU knob to change the WARM When OFFSET WHITE lt B gt setting and press the MENU knob COOL lt B gt is ON sets the offset for the white balance of channel B 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set using the color temperature all of the desired items Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature Specifying an offset for the auto white balance setting WARM Adjusts the value more By setting an offset for the value of auto white COOL BAL precisely if the adjustment by balance you can make the picture warmer or B WARM COOL B is not colder satisfactory How to select an item in the menu screen Turn Set the WHITE BAL switch to the the MENU knob to move to the desired item channel A or B that you want to set If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B the adjusted value is not reflected in the video output 1 Display the OFFSET WHT page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 even though you carry out the following operation 4 Turn the MENU knob to change the 2 Select the desired item and press the setting and press the MENU knob MENU knob If you want to set the other channel go back You can set the following items in the to step 2 OFFSET WHT page Selecti
196. cable with the cable clamps Connecting microphones to the AUDIO IN connectors You can connect up to two monaural microphones to the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors using a CAC 12 Microphone Holder not supplied The following is the procedure for attaching an electret condenser microphone such as the ECM 674 678 On how to attach the CAC 12 refer to the operation manual for the CAC 12 1 Attach the electret condenser microphone D Loosen the ball joint lock lever Place the microphone in the holder so that UP is at the top Close the microphone holder Tighten the screw Position so that the microphone does not interfere with the viewfinder and tighten the ball joint lock lever When attaching the ECM 674 678 use the microphone adaptor supplied with the CAC 12 Microphone Holder Preparing the Audio Input System Microphone Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 connector Set the switches as follows Set the LINE AES EBU MIC switch to MIC Set the 48V OFF switch as indicated below depending on the power supply type of the microphone Internal power supply Set the 48V OFF switch to OFF External power supply Set the 48V OFF switch to 48V ON Setthe AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switch for the channel to which the microphone is connected to REAR for CH 1 CH 2 R for CH 3 CH 4 48V OFF switch Monaural microphone
197. cator Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor Item Description DISP DISC Remaining disc capacity indicator DISP IRIS Iris opening indicator The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by using the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY ASPECT switch on the viewfinder b For detailed information on the display mode see Change confirmation adjustment progress messages page 173 VF DISP 3 page Item Description LOW LIGHT Turns on and off the on screen warning that the average level of the video has dropped beneath a set level LOW LIGHT Sets the LOW LIGHT LEVEL threshold value VF BATT Specifies the remaining WARNING battery capacity level that starts the flashing warning in the viewfinder ABSOLUTE Turns on and off the mode VALUE that displays numeric menu settings as absolute values a a This makes it possible to display settings that include reference settings stored with STORE VF DISP 2 page Item Description DISP ZOOM Zoom position indicator DISP COLOR Displays the color TEMP temperature DISP BATT Displays the battery REMAIN 9 voltage remaining capacity of an internal battery pack or an external battery connected to the DC IN connector DISP DC IN Displayed when the power is supplied from an external battery connected to the DC IN connector DISP 16 9 4 3 Displays the video aspect ID ratio 16 9
198. ch or COLOR TEMP button or RET button on the lens Remote control Enabled Disabled Enabled unit s VTR button Connecting the Remote Control Unit 53 1 2 54 When the monitor is connected to the MONITOR OUT connector of the remote control unit The MONITOR connector BNC type of the RM B150 B750 outputs the same signal as that from the TEST OUT connector on the camcorder Use the black cable supplied with the RM B150 B750 to connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the RM B150 B750 When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect before the remote control unit was connected Structure of the paint adjustment data The non volatile memory of the camcorder used for storing paint adjustment data consists of two regions as shown below one is the independent data region that is used when a remote control unit is not connected and the other is the remote control data region that is used when a remote control unit is connected Paint adjustment data is automatically selected and output to the camera section depending on whether or not a remote control unit such as the RM B150 is connected RM B150 Setup menu of the camcorder Independent data region MASTER BLACK MASTER GAMMA Remote control data region MASTER BLACK KNEE POINT MASTER GAMMA KNEE POINT
199. check that turning the iris ring manually adjusts the iris correctly 5 Set the iris switch on the lens back to AUTO and check the following points when the GAIN selector is moved from L to M to H Even when the brightness of the object does not change the iris is automatically adjusted in accordance with the change in the gain setting The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes to correspond to the change in setting Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting eoueuejure N 6 1 211 6 1 2 212 6 If an extender mechanism is incorporated in your lens put the extender lever of the lens into the 2x position and check the following points The indication EX appears at the top left on the viewfinder screen The auto iris functions correctly Testing the VDR Perform tests 1 to 7 consecutively 1 Testing the recording and playback functions 1 Setthe VDR SAVE STBY switch to SAVE and check that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes on 2 Set the VDR SAVE STBY switch to STBY and check that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes off 3 Set the switches located below the color LCD as follows BRIGHT button H M or L DISP SEL EXPAND button STATUS DISPLAY switch COUNTER Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET and set the F RUN SET R RUN to R RUN 5 Press the REC START button and check the following points The indicatio
200. command Syntax HELP lt SP gt lt command name gt lt CRLF gt The following data is transferred depending on whether a command name is specified with lt command name gt Command name specified Explanation of the specified command No specification Command list Input example HELP RETR NOOP Does nothing except return a response Used to check whether this unit is running Syntax lt CRLF gt PWD Displays the current directory if the directory is the root directory Syntax PWD lt CRLF gt CWD Changes the current directory moves from the current directory to another directory FTP File Operations suonejedo e 8 2 207 suoneledo 9 4 1 2 208 Syntax CWD SP path name CRLF Moves to a directory as follows depending on whether a directory is specified with lt path name gt Directory specified To the specified directory No specification To the root directory Input example CWD General CDUP Moves one level up in the directory structure makes the parent of the current directory be the current directory Syntax CDUP lt CRLF gt MKD Creates a new directory Directories can be created only in the General directory For details see File operation restrictions page 196 Syntax MKD SP lt path name gt lt CRLF gt RMD Deletes a directory Directories can be deleted only in the General directory
201. cts the channel adjusted by this menu If TEST SHADING SEL is selected the setting is linked to the setting of TEST OUT SELECT TEST OUT VBS Y R G B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT SELECT LCD connector R G B WHTH 99 to 99 H Saw white shading compensation SAW R G B WHTH 99 to 99 H Parabola white shading compensation PARA R G B WHT V 99 to 99 V Saw white shading compensation SAW R G B WHT V 99 to 99 V Parabola white shading compensation PARA WHITE SAW OFF ON Turns white shading Saw and Parabola PARA compensation on and off Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 02 BLACK BLK SHAD CH R G B TEST Selects the channel adjusted by this menu If SHADING SEL LCD TEST is selected the setting is the same as the setting of TEST OUT SELECT TEST OUT VBS Y R G B Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT SELECT LCD connector R G B BLK H 99 to 99 H Saw black shading compensation SAW R G B BLK H 99 to 99 H Parabola black shading compensation PARA R G B BLK V 99 to 99 V Saw black shading compensation SAW R G B BLK V 99 to 99 V Parabola black shading compensation PARA BLACK SAW OFF ON Turns black shading Saw and Parabola PARA compensation on and off MASTER BLACK 99 to 99 Master black level adjustment MASTER 6dB 3dB 0dB Temporarily adjusts the master gain value GAIN TMP 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB 24dB 30dB 36dB 42d
202. d off When displaying aspect ratio 4 3 video record superimposed 16 9 in the locations where 16 9 video is cut SHOT Selects whether or not the BLINK blinking is superimposed ON CHARA or OFF a To carry out superimposed recording select the SHOT ID number 1 to 4 Not to carry out superimposed recording select OFF Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to record the selected item superimposed on the color bars or the SHOT ID number and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items To carry out superimposed recording To actually record the items selected for superimposed recording on the SHOT DISP page set the OUTPUT DCC switch to BARS DCC OFF The items selected for superimposed recording appear on the screen and are recorded superimposed on the color bars Example display when SHOT DATA is set to ON 08 03 15 Setting the shot ID You can set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters spaces and symbols When the OUTPUT DCC switch is set to BARS DCC OFF this shot ID is output with the color bar signal You can set four shot IDs ID 1 to ID 4 When the menu is displayed the shot ID is not displayed even if the color bar signal is output How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SHOT ID page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For
203. d press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Recording shot data superimposed on the color bars In the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu you can select which shot data is recorded superimposed on the color bars You can also select which of the shot IDs 1 to 4 set in the SHOT DATA page is recorded superimposed on the picture Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 1 2 175 pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 176 How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SHOT DISP page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the SHOT DISP page Item Description SHOT Selects whether or not the shot DATE data is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT Selects whether or not shot time TIME is superimposed ON or OFF SHOT Selects whether or not the model MODEL name is superimposed ON or NAME OFF SHOT Selects whether or not the serial SERIAL number is superimposed ON or NO OFF SHOT ID Selects whether or not the shot SEL ID set on the SHOT ID page is superimposed SHOT 16 9 Turns the following function on CHARA an
204. d to MIC Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switch for the channel to which the audio output cable is connected to REAR for CH 1 CH 2 R for CH 3 CH 4 If the XLR connection automatic detection function is on the input signal for audio recording is selected automatically and therefore this setting is not required Q AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches OQ To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector Audio equipment LINE AES EBU MIC switch Q AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches To DC OUT connector To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector OLINE AES EBU MIC switch Connecting line input audio equipment Connect the audio output connector of the audio equipment that supplies the line input signal to the AUDIO IN CHI or CH2 connector Switch settings Set the LINE AES EBU MIC switch for the channel to which the audio signal source is connected to LINE Selecting the audio inputs to be recorded With the XLR connection automatic detection function being off the factory default setting A signal must be selected for audio recording by setting the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch to REAR depending on which of the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors is used for connecting the external audio equipment With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on When a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CHI or CH2 connector the input from that connector is automatically selected for audio
205. dio or to play back the content recorded on the disc The discs should be handled and stored carefully Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the cartridge Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage Do not disassemble the cartridge The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for indexing discs Apply the label in the correct position Storage Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct sunlight or in other places where the temperature or humidity is high Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able to gain ingress Store cartridges in their cases Care of the discs Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using a soft dry cloth If condensation forms allow ample time to dry before use Write protecting discs y To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental erasure move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of the disc in the direction of the arrow as shown in the following figure Lower surface of the disc Write Inhibit tab Slide in the direction of the arrow Write Inhibit tab settings SAVE gt SAVE gt Recording enabled Recording disabled Handling Discs 73 Bunooug y je1deuo 74 You can also write protect individual clips For details see Locking write protecting clips on page 112 Loading and unloading a disc To load a disc 1 Turnon the POWER switch
206. down to SELECT again and repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears When all modes and speeds are displayed the display changes in the following order Standard mode with system frequency 59 94i 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 SLS mode ECS mode If you have changed the configuration only the selected modes and speeds appear When the unit is shipped from the factory it is configured to display all of the modes and speeds in Shutter modes on page 61 except SLS mode You can change this configuration by selecting only the required modes and speeds on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu see page 135 Shutter speeds in standard mode can also be switched to angle display by using SHT DISP MODE in the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu see page 155 To set the shutter speed in ECS or SLS mode 1 Setthe shutter speed mode to ECS or SLS see the previous item 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired frequency or number of frames When the RM B150 Remote Control Unit is connected You can set the shutter speed of ECS or SLS with the rotary encoder of the RM B150 To change the range of choice of shutter mode and speed settings You can reduce the time required to select the shutter mode and speed by narrowing the choice of settings in advance This can be done by using the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu The settings selected on the SHT
207. e RM REC START RM CAM When an RM remote control unit is connected PARA selects which recording start stop buttons are enabled RM remote control unit CAM camcorder PARA both SHT DISP MODE SEC DEG Selects shutter speed display seconds or degrees RM F NO CTRL RET Selects the method used to display IRIS F values DISPLAY on the MSU 900 or another remote control unit CTRL Display on the basis of control value from the camera normal display method RET Display on the basis of position information from the lens same method as when AUTO IRIS is enabled 14 PRESET COLOR TEMP Display Sets the white balance preset value WHITE lt P gt reference color temperature C TEMP BAL lt P gt 99 to 99 Finer setting when the desired color could not be obtained with the COLOR TEMP lt P gt color temperature setting R GAIN P 99 to 99 Sets the R gain preset value GAIN lt P gt 99 to 99 Sets the G gain preset value AWB ENABLE OFF ON When the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST lt P gt turns the function that enables execution of AWB auto white balance on and off 15 WHITE ND FILTER OFF ON Turns on and off the function which assigns FILTER CTEMP electrical CC filters to neutral density ND filters ND FLT CTEMP 3200K 4300K Select the color temperatures when the electrical I 5600K 6300K filters are assigned to the ND filters ND FLT CTEMP 3200K 4300K For details see To change the color temperature
208. e is set to AUTO any batteries other than Sony BP series batteries and Anton Bauer intelligent battery systems are classified as Others d Flashes once per second when the battery status is BEFORE END and flashes 4 times per second when the battery status is END A setting for this item is required when AU CH34 AGC MODE in the AUDIO 2 page is set to OFF f A setting for this item is required when the DWR SOID Digital Wireless Receiver is installed g SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT in the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be set to HDSDI FILE menu No Page Item Settings Description 01 USER FILE USER FILE LOAD EXEC For details see Saving and USER FILE SAVE EXEC Recalling User Files on page FID Blank up to 16 105 characters USER PRESET EXEC For details see Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings on page 171 Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 02 USER FILE 2 STORE USR PRESET EXEC Save settings for items on pages registered in the USER menu as the standard settings CLEAR USR PRESET EXEC Clear the standard setting of pages registered in the USER menu CUSTOMIZE RESET EXEC Return the pages registered in the USER menu to the factory default state LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF ON Selects whether to load page and item customization data when USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page is executed
209. e MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again Menu Operations pue s ejdsiq 9 JajdeyD 169 pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 170 4 Selectthe position to which you want to move the item and press the MENU knob The item selected in step 2 moves to the position that you selected in step 4 To insert a blank line 1 steps 1 to 3 in To add a new page page 168 2 Press the MENU knob Then select the item that you want to replace and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears Select BLANK and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again and a blank line is inserted above the specified item You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items have already been registered To add delete replace pages You can add a new page to the USER menu delete a page from the USER menu or replace pages using the EDIT PAGE of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu To add a page How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the TOP menu see page 164 2 Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears Ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed press the MENU knob Then select EDIT PAGE
210. e SET S SEL Thumbnail Operations button in the same way as when you press the PLAY PAUSE button To search for a thumbnail position and play from there See page 104 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Select the thumbnail that you want to play 2 Press PLAY PAUSE button Selecting the information displayed on thumbnails You can select the information to be displayed at the bottom of the thumbnails in thumbnail screens See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip thumbnail screen 2 Select Clip Information A window appears in which you can select the information to display Thumbnail Menu Im Clip Information Return to Upper Menu Date Duration Sequence Number 3 Select the items that you want to display Return to Upper Menu Returns to the Thumbnail Menu Date Date and time of creation or date and time of the more recent modification Time Code Timecode of first frame Duration Playback time Sequence Number Thumbnail sequence number The selected information will appear at the bottom of the thumbnails when you display a thumbnail screen Changing clip index pictures The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails as index pictures for clips Normally the index picture is the first frame in a clip but you can set any frame in the clip as the index picture You can only change index pictures from
211. e functions assigned to the ASSIGN switches the detection level and other information AUDIO STATUS screen This screen allows you to confirm the following items related to audio Audio bit rate Setting condition of DF NDF Type of front microphone Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor sBumes pojrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 1e1deu 177 pejreijeq pue s ejds q 9 4 2 178 Type of input signal to audio channels 1 to 4 nput level of audio channels 1 to 4 You can use the SET STATUS page of the OPERATION menu to set whether or not the status confirmation screens are displayed To display the status confirmation Screens You can use the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch as the STATUS ON SEL OFF switch when the MENU ON OFF switch is set to OFF when the cover of the menu operating section is closed OFF is automatically selected To disable display of the status confirmation screens How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SET STATUS page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the SET STATUS page Item Description STATUS Selects whether or not the ABNORMAL ABNORMAL window is disp
212. e humidity Storage temperature 20 to 60 4 F to 140 F Recording format Video MPEG HD 422 50 Mbps Proxy video MPEG 4 Audio MPEG HD 422 4 channels 24 bits 48 kHz Proxy audio A law 4 channels 8 bits 8 kHz Specifications Continuous operating time Approx 120 min with BP GL95 Mass Approx 4 3 kg 9 Ib 7 oz main body only Approx 6 0 kg 13 Ib 3 oz with HDVF 20A viewfinder ECM 680S microphone disc and BP GL95 Battery Pack Dimensions in mm inches Bo gt 13 Ei 269 10 5 8 222 8 3 4 Video camera section Imager 7 inch type 1920 H x 1080 V Imager Configuration RGB 3 CCDs Spectral system F1 4 prism system with quartz filter Built in filters ND filter optical 1 Clear 2 1 4 ND 3 1716 ND 4 ND Lens mount 5 inch 48 bayonet mount Sensitivity F11 system frequency 59 941 F12 system frequency 501 89 9 reflection chart 2000 Ix Minimum illumination 0 016 F1 4 42 dB with 16 frame accumulation Video S N ratio 59 dB With noise suppression on Off value is 54 dB Modulation at screen center 45 or more Registration 0 02 or less for entire screen area excluding distortion due to lens Geometric distortion None identified excluding distortion due to lens Smear 135 dB LCD panel 3 5 inches Pixel resolution 250 880 pixels Optical d
213. e light turns on and off automatically However the light remains on continuously if the off time is 5 seconds or less When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the light switch is set to ON the light remains on continuously The light does not turn on and off automatically When the setting is completed the message AUTO INTERVAL M S appears along the bottom of the viewfinder screen M S indicates the shooting interval For example the message AUTO INTERVAL 00M04S indicates that the shooting interval is four seconds The camcorder exits Auto Interval Rec mode whenever it is powered off However the TAKE TOTAL TIME REC TIME and PRE LIGHTING settings are maintained You do not need to set them again the next time you use Auto Interval Rec mode To shoot and record 1 After performing the basic procedures for shooting and recording following the instructions in Basic Procedure for Shooting page 77 secure the camcorder so that it will not move 2 Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens The camcorder starts recording in Auto Interval Rec mode When you use the PRE LIGHTING function recording starts after the light is switched on The actual recording to disc begins when the camcorder has saved about ten seconds of video in memory so disc access is intermittent While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode the TALLY green tally indicator in the viewfinder flashe
214. e setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual OPERATION menu No Page Item Settings Description 01 OUTPUT 1 SDI OUT 1 SELECT OFF HDSDI SDSDI Selects the output signal from the SDI OUT 1 connector SDI OUT 2 SELECT OFF HDSDI SDSDI Selects the output signal from the SDI OUT 2 connector SDI OUT 2 SUPER OFF ON Sets the superimposed information output from the SDI OUT 2 connector TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector When R G or B is selected turning the power of the unit off and on changes the setting to Y TEST OUT SUPER OFF ON Sets the superimposed information output from the TEST OUT connector Regardless of this setting text data is output from this connector when the setting of TEST OUT SELECT is Y R G or B During the display of text data you can hide the text data by switching this item from ON to OFF It is also hidden in the viewfinder When TEST OUT SELECT is set to LCD the mode selected with the DISP SEL EXPAND button determines whether text is displayed or hidden Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsig 9 129 pue s ejds q 9 4 2 130 No Page Item Settings Description 02 OUTPUT 2 LIVE amp PLAY OFF ON For details see To displa
215. e timecode settings first exit Picture Cache mode When power is lost during recording in Picture Cache mode If the POWER switch is turned off during recording in Picture Cache mode the camcorder gets powered off after disc access has continued for a few seconds so that the picture at the moment when the POWER switch is turned off is recorded If youremove the battery pull out the DC cable or cut power to the AC adaptor during recording in Picture Cache mode video and audio stored in memory will be lost without being recorded to the disc For this reason make sure you do not replace the battery while recording Time lapse video Interval Rec function Using the memory in the camcorder you can capture time lapse video There are two modes for this function which is known as Interval Rec Auto Interval Rec mode In Auto Interval Rec mode pictures are automatically shot a frame two frames when the recording format is set to 720p at a time at the specified interval and stored in memory To use this function you must set the total time for shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME and the length of time for recording on the disc REC TIME Manual Interval Rec mode A specified number of frames NUMBER OF FRAME is recorded when you press the REC START button or the lens VTR button There are two Manual Interval Rec modes a single shot mode in which recording is done once with each press of the button and a consecutive mode i
216. ecode is displayed in the normal format ae ee T LI I j Lights when the HOLD CHAPTER button is pressed E Warning indicator area Displays warnings when trouble with recording or moisture condensation occurs For details see Operation Warnings on page 216 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 1 2 25 E Remaining disc capacity indicator Indication Remaining recording time DISC E N E E E EEE B More than 30 minutes DISC E H E E EEE B 25 to 30 minutes DISC E W E E E E B 20 to 25 minutes DISC E W B 15 to 20 minutes DISC E W B 10 to 15 minutes DISC B 1 5 to 10 minutes DISCE M B 2 to 5 minutes DISCE M B flashing 0 to 2 minutes DISCE B flashing 0 minutes Remaining battery capacity indicator Indication Battery voltage BP L90A L60S L80S Other batteries BATTE W BREE 5 5 V or more 17 0 V or more BATTE M E E E EE F 5 1 to 15 5 V 16 0 to 17 0 V BATTE W E F 4 6 to 15 1 V 15 0 to 16 0 V BATTE W E E E F 3 8 to 14 6 V 4 0 to 15 0 V BATTE M F 2 9 to 13 8 V 3 0 to 14 0 V BATT E E E F 2 0 to 12 9 V 2 0 to 13 0 V BATT 8 F 0 8 to 12 0 V 1 0to 12 0 V BATTE F 0 8 V or less 1 0 V or less a You can change the threshold voltages on the BATTERY 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu see page 149
217. ed when a battery pack other than a Sony battery in 0 1 V steps pack is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued DC IN BEFORE 11 5Vto 11 8V Used when an external power source is connected END to 17 0V in 0 1 to the DC IN connector Sets the voltage level of V steps the connected external power source at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued DCIN END 11 0V to 14 0V Used when an external power source is connected in 0 1 V steps to the DC IN connector Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the END warning should be issued DETECTED Info Sony Other Displays the type of automatically detected battery BATTERY DC IN Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 05 BATTERY2 TYPE AUTO OTHER AUTO Automatically detects the type of the DETECTION battery OTHER Always judges the battery to be of the OTHER type regardless of the actual battery type SEGMENT NO 7 11 0V to 17 0V When the battery type Battery status in 0 1 V steps judgment is OTHER sets indicator segments the voltage level below which uummmmmr the battery status indicator 1234567 segment No 7 should turn off E 4 and F are SEGMENT NO 6 11 0V to 16 0V When the battery type always on to 17 0 0 1 judgment is OTHER sets V steps the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 6 should turn off SEGMEN
218. efault setting backward by up to 10 mm 3 8 inch or forward by up to 25 mm 1 inch This adjustment helps you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder Jejdeuj Shoulder pad 1 Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder pad 2 Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is in the most convenient position 3 Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the selected position 52 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position Connecting the Remote Control Unit Before connecting disconnecting a remote control unit to from the camcorder be sure to turn the power of the camcorder off Connecting the RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit enables remote control of the principal camera functions Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE connector 8 pin automatically puts the camcorder into remote control mode If you disconnect the remote control unit the remote control mode is cancelled RM B150 B750 Remote control cable Q REMOTE connector Camcorder switch functions when the remote control unit is connected The following switches on the camcorder do not function GAIN selector OUTPUT DCC switch WHITE BAL switch AUTO W B BAL switch SHUTTER selector Button to which the TURBO SWITCH function has been assigned ASSIGN 1 3 4 s
219. elect in the cases explained below To scroll pages O005eREC FUNCTION TOP CACHE REC OFF When blinks turn the MENU knob to switch pages To select a menu or setting item 00100UTPUT1 00100UTPUT1 SDI OUT1 SELECT e SDI OUT1 SELECT When appears turn the MENU knob to move up and down To change a setting value 00100UTPUT1 00100UTPUT1 SDI OUT SDI OUT When blinks turn the MENU knob to change the setting ON OFF value etc To confirm the selection of a menu a setting item or a setting value Each time you press the MENU knob the menu display switches in the following sequence pojrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 JajdeyD Menu Operations 165 Example When using the OPERATION menu TOP menu CONTENTS page Y TOP MENU MENU CUSTOMIZE TION ENANCE p If the menu has not been used 5 S 5 L 0 P M F A D DD Ur MM CD m 272 DOmzzu 22 HD QOO OH If the menu has been used before Menu selection mode Menu selection page 001e0UTPUT1 SDI OUT d gt Setting item selection mode 00100UTPUT1 SDI OUT1 SELECT Setting value selection mode 00100UTPUT1 esDI OUT1 SELECT pejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo If the TOP menu has not been displayed since the camcorder is powered on TOP does not appear at the upper right on the above screen and you can
220. elect items Do one of the following to select thumbnails menu items timecode digits and other items Turn the MENU knob Press the up down left or right arrow button Press the PREV or NEXT button With the SHIFT button held down press the PREV or NEXT button to move to the first or last item Press the PREV button with the F REV button held down or press the NEXT button with the F FWD button held down to move to the first or last item With the SHIFT button held down press the up or down arrow button to move to the previous or next page Press the F REV or F FWD button to move to the previous or next page To select multiple thumbnails Do one of the following With the SHIFT button held down turn the MENU knob With the SHIFT button held down press the left or right arrow button To return to the previous screen Press the RESET RETURN button To move from a menu level to the next lower or higher menu level Fora menu item displayed together with a gt or mark you can move to the next lower or higher menu level by pressing the right or left arrow button To scroll hidden parts of the string into view When 4 mark is displayed for an item you can press the left or right arrow button to scroll the display by one character for each press The up and down arrow buttons scroll the beginning and end of the string into view To increment and decrement
221. elects whether to set a new timecode or to utilize the existing timecode PRESET Records a new timecode REGEN Records timecode continuous with the existing timecode recorded on the disc Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the camcorder operates in R RUN mode CLOCK Records timecode synchronized to the internal clock Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the camcorder operates in F RUN mode Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 27 MeIAJOAQ Je deuo 28 AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 audio channel 1 2 adjustment method selection switches Select the audio level adjustment method for each of audio channels 1 and 2 AUTO Automatic adjustment MANUAL Manual adjustment AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 audio channel 1 2 3 4 input selection switches AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 FRONT Audio input signals from the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector REAR Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors WIRELESS Audio input signals from the UHF portable tuner not supplied if it is installed AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 F FRONT Audio input signals from a microphone connected to the MIC IN connector R REAR Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUD
222. enomenon is not a malfunction Such pixels have no effect on the recorded data and the unit may be used with confidence even if they are present Phenomena specific to CCD image Sensors The following phenomena that may appear in images are specific to CCD Charge Coupled Device image sensors They do not indicate malfunctions White flecks Although the CCD image sensors are produced with high precision technologies fine white flecks may be generated on the screen in rare cases caused by cosmic rays etc This is related to the principle of CCD image sensors and is not a malfunction The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases When operating at a high environmental temperature When you have raised the master gain sensitivity The problem may be alleviated by executing the APR automatic pixel noise reduction function on the APR page of the MAINTENANCE menu see page 157 Pixel noise is reduced to some extent by automatic black balance adjustment see page 56 but the detection capabilities of that function are limited For the most effective correction execute the APR function If No More White Pixel appears after the APR function is executed then there are no more detectable white flecks xipueddy In SLS mode white flecks are more prominent when you set the shutter speed number of frames to higher values Executing the APR SLS function on the APR page see page 157 may
223. er mode 63 Specifications 226 Status confirmation screen 177 Status display 24 STATUS ON SEL OFF switch 20 STOP button 22 Stopper 31 Sub clip 115 adding 116 changing start timecode 119 deleting 118 reordering 117 trimming 118 SUB CLIP indicator 27 SUB CLIP DISC MENU button 27 System frequency 24 setting 55 T TALLY indicator Tally indicator 31 TALLY switch 29 31 TC IN connector 29 TC OUT connector 29 TEST OUT connector 29 Testing 210 Thumbnail display items 98 operations 105 29 32 searching 106 selecting 105 selecting clip information 108 selecting multiple thumbnails 106 Thumbnail image setting 82 THUMBNAIL indicator 27 Thumbnail Menu 101 THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK button 27 Time counter display 24 Time data 69 Time setting 42 Timecode 34 setting 69 synchronizing 70 Time lapse recording 83 TOP menu 127 Tripod 17 Tripod mounting 50 U UHF portable tuner attaching 47 UMID data setting 184 USB connector 29 User bits setting 69 USER menu 127 editing 168 resetting 171 USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu 127 User menu data loading 189 saving 187 V VDR SAVE STBY switch 20 VF connector 17 Video format 24 33 setting 56 Video from external devices recording 94 Video light connecting 51 Viewfinder adjusting focus 40 adjusting position 38 adjusting screen 40 attaching 37 cleaning 214 detaching eyepiece 40 HDVF 20A optional 31 moving shoe up 38 rotation bracket 39 screen 32 selecting display
224. er power off when the SUB LCD MODE SEL item above is set to TIMER H hours HDSDI REMOTE OFF CHARA G TLY R TLY Selects whether to use the function that enables recording control from this unit of an external device connected to the SDI OUT 1 2 connectors HDSDI output of this unit 8 Also selects the indication that shows whether the external device is recording OFF Do not use the remote recording control function CHARA Use the function and indicate by the controlling external device indicator in the viewfinder see page 34 G TLY Use the function and indicate by the TALLY indicator in the viewfinder R TLY Use the function and indicate by the REC recording red tally indicator in the viewfinder When R TLY is selected the REC indicator lights even when the unit is not recording PROAV DISPLAY DSABL ENABL Specifies whether to display the PROAV folder when this unit is accessed by a FAM FTP connection DSABL Do not display ENABL Display Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 13 CAM TEST SAW SAW REC Selects the test signal CONFIG 2 SELECT COLOR BAR 1 100 Selects the HD color bar type SELECT 75 SMPTE USER amp ALL OFF ON Show only USER menu in the top menu ONLY RM COMMON OFF ON Selects whether or not to share settings for when a MEMORY remote control unit is connected and when the unit is used alon
225. er the end of recording processing Do not disconnect the battery pack or power cord until recording processing has finished and the ACCESS indicator has gone out Bunoous y This function salvages as much recorded material as possible after an unforeseen accident but 10096 restoration cannot be guaranteed Even when this function is used it is not possible to recover data from immediately before the interruption of recording The amount of data lost is as follows Quick salvage From 2 to 4 seconds of data before the interruption of recording Full salvage From 4 to 6 seconds of data before the interruption of recording More data may be lost when the unit is subject to vibrations when you switch frequently between recording and paused and when you use functions such as Picture Cash Quick salvage When the unit is powered on again after a recording interruption due to a power interruption with the disc still loaded in the unit clips are reconstructed on the basis of backup data stored in nonvolatile memory and markers recorded on the disc Processing time is about 5 seconds Full salvage When recording on an XDCAM device is interrupted because of a power interruption and a disc is manually ejected from that device with the Handling Discs 75 Bunooug y je1deuo 76 power off clips are reconstructed on the basis of markers recorded on the disc when the disc is loaded in this unit
226. ere is no file to be loaded shown as NO FILE an existing file of the same number is unaffected In the example shown in step 4 MENG is not overwritten Returning the scene file settings to the standard settings How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select STANDARD and press the MENU knob O displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to Bl When Bl changes to O once again the settings of the camcorder are reset to the standard settings If you press the MENU knob again while is displayed the operation is cancelled and the camcorder returns to the settings before STANDARD was selected Jumping to a File Related Menu Page When Inserting a Memory Stick A Memory Stick enables you to save user files scene files lens files reference files and ALL files The camcorder menu system allows you to make a setting so that when a Memory Stick holding these files is inserted while in menu operating mode a menu page relating to the desired file is automatically displayed on the screen Thus you can proceed to file operation quickly This is very convenient especially when you manage data files using Memory Stick s How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item
227. erial number The initial value of the serial number can be set to 00001 the default or to any other number The number is automatically incremented by 1 each time you record a clip When it reaches 99999 it returns to 00001 for the next clip Duplicate clip titles can be generated depending on the serial number setting for example if you reset the serial number to the original value after recording several clips Care should be taken when setting the serial number To assign user defined titles automatically when clips are recorded How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu 027OCLIP TITLE TOP TITLE DSABL For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select TITLE and then press the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to display ENABL and then press the MENU knob 027 OCLIP TITLE TOP TITLE 1 ENABL SELECT PREFIX CLEAR NUMERIC d EXEC LOAD PREFIX DATA EXEC EFIX TITLE PR NUMERIC 00001 y Clip titles will be generated automatically if you record in this state The title of the next clip to be recorded will beacombination of the prefix in the PREFIX field and the serial number in the NUMERIC field To create a list of title prefix strings Prepare the data beforehand according to the following rules File na
228. ettings of the Interval Rec related items on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu cannot be changed To change the settings do either of the following Auto Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode Stop recording by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens The single shot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode Exit the Interval Rec mode by pressing the EJECT button When the When you set the POWER camcorder power switch to OFF the camcorder is switched off will switch off by itself after disc access has continued for a few seconds to record the picture data stored in memory If you remove the battery unplug the DC cable or cut power to the AC adaptor picture data stored before recording stops a maximum of ten seconds may be lost Take care when replacing the battery 84 Advanced Operations for Shooting Auto Interval Rec mode settings and shooting To make settings 1 Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select CACHE INTVAL REC and turn the MENU knob to display FUNCTION CACHE INTVAL REC TAKE TOTAL TIME SMIN REC TIME i 5SEC PRE LIGHTING OFF DISC EXCHG CACHE OFF As you turn the MENU knob the setting changes as follows OFF lt CACHE gt AINT gt M INT 3 Select TAKE TOTAL
229. f the PAINT menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the WHITE page Item Description Item Description COLOR Sets the color temperature for OFFSET When this item is set to ON TEMP A the desired value Adjust the WHITE A the offset adjusted on this page value while looking at the real is added to the white balance image because error tends to be for channel A bigger for adjustment of high WARM When OFFSET WHITE A color temperature COOL lt A gt is ON sets the offset for the C TEMP Adjusts the value more white balance of channel A BAL A precisely when the color using the color temperature temperature adjustment Adjust the value while looking through COLOR TEMP is not at the real image because error satisfactory tends to be bigger for R GAIN A Changes only the value of R adjustment of high color GAIN temperature B GAIN A Changes only the value of B WARM Adjusts the value more GAIN COOL BAL precisely if the adjustment by lt A gt WARM COOL lt A gt is not The above table shows the adjustment of the satisfactory white balance of channel A Items followed OFFSET When this item is set to ON by lt B gt are used to adjust the white balance WHITE B the offset adjusted on this page of channel B is added to the white
230. f the screen This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder TALLY switch Controls the tally indicator located on the front of the viewfinder HIGH The tally indicator brightness is set to high OFF The tally indicator is disabled LOW The tally indicator brightness is set to low ZEBRA zebra pattern switch Controls the zebra pattern display on the viewfinder screen as follows ON A zebra pattern appears and stays OFF The zebra pattern disappears MOMENT A zebra pattern appears and stays for about five seconds Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls M Q 491deuo 31 MeIAJOAQ Je deuo 32 DISPLAY ASPECT switch Turns the marker indication on and off and switches between 4 3 and 16 9 aspect ratios for viewfinder screen display DISPLAY When the marker indication is enabled with the camcorder the marker indication on the viewfinder screen turns on and off every time you push the switch up to this position ASPECT Each push of the switch down to this position toggles the mask display on and off Make mask display settings on the MARKER 1 page of the OPERATION menu see page 133 Viewfinder cable Microphone holder Status display on the viewfinder screen Indicators The following indicators are arranged above and below the viewfinder screen to show the current state and adjustments of the camcorder TALLY REC E B
231. f this command is invoked immediately before the STOR command Syntax SITE UMMD lt CRLF gt SITE DF Acquires the amount of free disc space Syntax SITE SP DF lt CRLF gt SITE CHMOD Locks and unlocks clips Also sets permissions for directories and files in the General directory Syntax SITE CHMOD SP flag SP path name CRLF Specify one of the following values in flag according to the specification in lt path name gt Whenaclip is specified in lt path name gt 444 Lock 666 Unlock When a directory in the General directory is specified in path name 555 Forbid writing to the directory 777 Allow writing to the directory When a file in the General directory is specified in lt path name gt 444 Forbid writing to and execution of the file 555 Forbid writing to the file but allow execution 666 Allow writing to the file but forbid execution 777 Allow writing to and execution of the file Input example SITE CHMOD 444 Clip C0001 MXF Lock clip C0001 MXF Recording Continuous Timecode With FAM and FTP Connections When you are connected to the unit by FAM or FTP you can create new clips with timecode that is continuous with the timecode of the last frame of the last clip on the disc To record continuous timecode set PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to and then proceed as follows FAM connection Write clip files to the unit from the computer or o
232. for a UHF wireless microphone system To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system fit one of the following UHF portable tuners e DWR SOID Digital Wireless Receiver WRR 855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit WRR 860A 861 862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner For details of these units refer to the operation manuals for them To fit the DWR S01D or WRR 855S 1 Remove the four fixing screws holding the cover of the portable tuner receiver housing slot located in the rear of this unit to remove the cover 2 Insert the DWR S01D or WRR 855S into the housing slot and fasten the four fixing screws DWR S01D or WRR 855S J Setthe AUDIO IN switch for the channel to which you want to input audio signal to WIRELESS see page 28 When the XLR connection automatic detection function is on even if the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 switch is set to WIRELESS the signal input to the Preparing the Audio Input System suonejedeJjg z je1deuj 47 suongeredejd ejdeuj 48 AUDIO IN CHI or CH2 connector is automatically selected when an audio cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CHI or CH2 connector In such a case set REAR XLR AUTO to OFF on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu The factory default setting is OFF When the LINE AES EBU MIC switch is set to LINE or MIC the audio signals recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 are not affected by the XLR automatic detection function They are determined by the settings of
233. from the target clip the first frame two intermediate frames and the last frame along with the name title date of creation and duration of the clip One of the following messages also appears depending on whether the clip is referenced ina clip list When the clip is not referenced in a clip list Delete Clip When the clip is referenced in a clip list Delete Clip amp Clip List All clip lists that reference the target clip are deleted along with the clip Delete Clip amp Clip List INDEX MIDDLEt MIDDLE2 gt gt gt TC 00 25 29 09 TC00 25 3000 TC 00 25 30 22 TC 00 25 31 13 Name C0023 Title SCENE 00126 Date 2005 DEC 01 14 55 OK Dur 0 00 02 05 Ci On Clip List 4 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The selected clip is deleted and you return to the clip thumbnail screen In step 1 you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the RESET RETURN button with the SHIFT button held down To delete all clips 1 Display the Disc Menu Thumbnail Operations 5 N9 ul 1e1deu 113 Su89J9S ND suonejedQ Ja deuD 114 2 SelectLock or Delete Clips and then select Delete Clips A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete all clips 3 Select OK to execute the deletion or Cancel to cancel it and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Locked clips cannot be deleted
234. g and the viewfinder barrel Then insert the eyepiece into the viewfinder barrel Turn the eyepiece locking ring clockwise until its LOCK arrow points at the red mark on the viewfinder barrel When the eyecup is worn out replace it with a new one For details of a replacement eyecup contact a Sony service representative Adjusting the viewfinder focus and screen To adjust the viewfinder focus Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder image is sharpest Diopter adjustment ring To adjust the viewfinder screen Adjust the brightness contrast and peaking of the viewfinder screen with the controls shown below Setting the Area of Use DISPLAY ZEBRA TALLY jS Hen PN OFF el OFF r MOMENT e LOW ASPECT When using the unit for the first time PEAKING control The area of use is not factory preset Before using a this unit you need to set this item You cannot on use the unit without setting this item To set the area of use suonejedeJjg z 1e1deuj POWER switch MENU knob 1 Set the POWER switch to the ON position The screen for setting the area of use appears in the viewfinder FORMAT SETTING eNOT SELECTED M LINE B 1080 m o Do m oc TE ND TURN OFF once EH 2 Press MENU knob on the left of NOT SELECTED changes to and you can now select the area of use
235. g functions You can limit the function of some output connectors to save power consumption How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 Adjustments and Settings From Menus 2 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the POWER SAVE page Item Description ETHERNET Enables or disables the USB network connector and USB connector iLINK FAM 9 Enables or disables the i LINK connector FAM function REC AUDIO Puts the AUDIO OUT OUT connectors in EE or SAVE mode TEST OUT Switches the TEST OUT SAVE connector power saving function on and off ON No signals are output if a cable is not connected OFF Signals are always output regardless of whether a cable is connected a The unit must be powered off and on again to enable changes to this setting Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Setting the color temperature manually You can manually adjust the value of the white balance by setting the color temperature How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the WHITE page o
236. ges see Change confirmation adjustment progress messages on page 173 For details about marker display see Setting the marker display on page 174 items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen are shown below Color temperature Displays a color temperature calculated from the gain of R and B in the range 0 0 K to 99 9 K in steps of 0 1 The signs may be displayed depending on the OFFSET WHT setting see page 183 No display OFFSET WHT is OFF The value of OFFSET WHT is greater than 3200K The value of OFFSET WHT is less than 3200K Video format Indicates the format of video being currently played back or recorded see page 55 The video aspect ratio 16 9 or 4 3 can also be displayed when the recording format is set to IMX 50 IMX 40 IMX 30 or DVCAM M Q 1 2 Extender Displays the extender settings of this unit and the lens EX The lens extender is on 08 The lens shrinker is on x2D This unit s extender function is on Ex2D The lens extender and the digital extender function of this unit are both on Zoom position Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in the range from 0 to 99 Clip information Displays clip information during playback During clip playback and search when title display is off Displays the clip number and total number of clips During clip playback and search when title display is on Displays
237. gs of the paint adjustment data stored in the independent data region even if you connect the remote control unit In this case the settings stored in the independent data region will be renewed when you change the settings on the remote control unit Thus the settings of the paint data made with the remote control unit can be retained even if the remote control unit is removed However if the switch position on the remote control unit differs from the one on the camcorder the switch position on the camcorder takes precedence over that on the remote control unit Also it is possible to keep the settings that are in effect before you connect the remote control unit In this case you should set the control knob to the relative value mode on the remote control unit For details refer to the operation manual supplied with the remote control unit Adjustments and Settings for Shooting Setting the Recording Format The recording formats supported by this camcorder are as follows Video Recording format Resolution System frequency MPEG HD422 50 1080 59 94i 29 97P Bit rate 50 Mbps 50i 25P 720 59 94P 50P MPEG HD420 HQ 1080 59 941 501 SP 720 59 94P 50P Bit rate 35 25 Mbps MPEG IMX 50 40 525 59 941 30 625 50i Bit rate 50 40 30 Mbps DVCAM P 525 59 941 Bitrate 25 Mbps 625 501 a 59 94i 29 97P 59 94P When the area of use is set to NTSC J AREA NTSC AREA 50i 25
238. hange Turn the MENU knob to change the value of the digit 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required To reset the timecode to 00 00 00 00 Select Reset to Zero in the Thumbnail Menu and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To preset the frequently used timecode Select Save Preset TC in the Thumbnail Menu and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The timecode set in steps 3 and 4 is saved as a preset value To recall the preset timecode Select Recall Preset TC in the Thumbnail Menu and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob B Press SET S SEL button or the MENU knob OK is selected Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob again 8 Save the clip list see page 119 To save clip lists To save under a specified name See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Inthe clip list thumbnail screen display the Disc Menu 2 Select Save Clip List as and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Scene Selection Clip List Editing su 199 f15 ul suoneiedo Je deup 119 SueeJog MH suonejedo 1 1 2 120 A list of clip lists appears Disc Menu lal Save Clip List Name amp Date Sorted by Name DVD og Bl 08 AUG2007 11 50 E0003 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0004 03 AUG2007 17 51 4 E0005 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0006 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0007 03 AUG2007 17 51 E0095 18 MAY2006 10 25 E0098 13 JUN2006 13 43 Display
239. hanging Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting 213 6 1 2 214 6 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN and check that the timecode indication starts changing again and continues to change even when you restart recording and stop recording again Set the DISPLAY switch to U BIT and check that the user bit data that was set is displayed Maintenance Maintenance Cleaning the viewfinder Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially available lens cleaner Never use organic solvents such as thinners Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning ____ __ p 3 C Viewfinder barrel Eyecup holder Protecting filter Packing ring 1 Detachthe eyepiece from the viewfinder barrel For the detaching procedure see Detaching the eyepiece on page 40 2 Remove the eyecup from the eyecup holder Remove the protecting filter together with the packing ring from inside the eyecup holder 4 Detach the protecting filter from the packing ring Fog proof filter Depending on the temperature and humidity the protecting filter may mist because of vapor or your breath To ensure that the viewfinder is always clear replace the protecting filter with a fog proof filter option part No 1 547 341 11
240. he SW IND GAIN selector after pressing the button to which the TURBO GAIN function has been assigned once the video gain is changed according to the GAIN selector operation ON When the video gain is boosted to the video gain to the value preset by pressing the button to which the TURBO GAIN function has been assigned once the video gain is not changed even if you operate the GAIN selector until you press the button once more SHOCK Turns shockless gain on or off LESS GAIN Turn the MENU knob to select the gain value and press MENU knob Any of 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 or 42 dB can be set for each of the L M H and TURBO positions in any sequence Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Selecting the output signals How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the OUTPUT 1 page Item Setting SDI OUT 1 Selects the signal output from SELECT the SDI OUTI connector OFF Do not output video HD SDI Output HD SDI SD SDI Output SD SDI SDIOUT2 Selects the signal output from SELECT the SDI OUT2 connector OFF Do not output video HD SDI Output HD SDI SD S
241. he notch facing downward and the arrow facing away from you and insert the Memory Stick into the Memory Stick slot until it clicks into place Then close the cover Handling the Memory Stick If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some resistance when you insert it the Memory Stick may be turned around or upside down Do not force the Memory Stick into the slot Confirm the direction of the notch and arrow on the Memory Stick before inserting the Memory Stick and then try inserting it again To remove the Memory Stick 1 Check that the access indicator is not lit then gently press in the Memory Stick once and release The Memory Stick pops out 2 Pull the Memory Stick towards you to withdraw it from the slot Do not remove the Memory Stick while the access indicator is lit You may lose data or damage the Memory Stick To protect saved data To prevent accidental erasure of important setup data slide the LOCK switch on the Memory Stick right to the write protect position LOCK Itis now impossible to write or delete data on the Memory Stick If you try to do so the message MEMORY STICK LOCKED appears and the data cannot be overwritten or deleted Memory Stick Duo and Memory Stick PRO Duo do not have this function To format a Memory Stick Do not format the Memory Stick u
242. he first 8 characters abbreviated the last 4 characters for a total of 13 characters To check clip names Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen and select the clip whose name you want to check The name of the selected clip appears in the upper left of the screen See Clip thumbnail screen page 97 for more information The item at the upper left of the screen is displayed according to the following order of priority Title gt user defined clip name gt standard format clip Advanced Operations for Shooting name Therefore the display of this item changes as follows depending on whether or not there is a title Whena title has been set as a clip name on this unit the title is displayed for clips recorded on this unit The user defined name or standard format name is displayed for clips without a title To check clip information name title etc For details see Checking clip properties page 109 Recording video from external devices You can select between recording of data shot by the camera and recording of data input from an external device by using a menu or by using the ASSIGN 2 switch If you want to use the ASSIGN 2 switch you must assign the video switching function to the ASSIGN 2 switch beforehand see page 179 Switching by the ASSIGN 2 switch takes priority over switching by the menu Switching by menu is not possible if the function has been as
243. he function EE 87 Retaking the most recent clip eene 88 Assigning user defined clip titles automatically 88 Assigning user defined names to clips and clip lists 91 Recording video from external devices sss 94 Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens U 96 Switching between GUI screens sseeeeeee 96 Information and controls in thumbnail 97 Displaying Menus een 101 GUI screen operations ener 104 Thumbnail Operations eere rere eese eene teen tn teta tn 105 Selecting thumbnails sis ettet eee 105 Searching with thumbnails 106 Playing the scene you have found 108 Selecting the information displayed on thumbnails 108 Changing clip index pictures 109 Checking clip properties 109 Setting clip flags as T12 Locking write protecting clips ace 112 Deleting Chps 22 tate Gravee tee te ete 113 Creating and editing clip lists eese 115 Managing clip lists ie eA 120 Disc Operations csccsccsccsscssssssssssesscscecceccecsscsssssesscssessessessessessessesees 122 Checking disc properties essere 122 Using planning metadata eese 122 Formatting dis
244. he input from these connectors is automatically selected for audio recording In this case start the operation from step 2 You can turn on and off the XLR connection automatic detection function on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu Adjusting the Audio Level MIC LEVEL control 1 To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 or AUDIO IN CH2 connector set the AUDIO IN CH 1 or AUDIO IN CH 2 switch to REAR To adjust both input signals set both switches to REAR 2 Setthe AUDIO SELECT switch es corresponding to the channel s selected in step 1 to MANUAL 3 With the LEVEL control s for the channel s selected in step 1 adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to 20 dB for a normal input volume Correspondence between recording level adjustments and audio level controls On the AUDIO 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the input to each ofthe AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors The correspondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows LEVEL Audio recording level of channel 1 Setting Control SIDEI LEVEL CH 1 control on the left FRONT MIC LEVEL control F S1 LEVEL CH 1 control linked with MIC LEVEL control REAR2 WRR LEVEL Audio recording level of channel 2 Setting Control SIDE2 LEVEL CH 2 control on the right FR
245. he setting changes as follows OFF 2SEC gt SSEC 10SEC Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording The light switch must also be set to ON With these settings the light turns on and off automatically However the light remains on continuously if the off time is 5 seconds or less When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and the light switch is set to ON the light remains on continuously The light does not turn on and off automatically When the setting is completed the following message appears along the bottom of the viewfinder screen In single shot mode MANU INTERVAL FRAME In consecutive mode MANU INTERVAL SEC FRAME SEC indicates the length of interval and FRAME indicates the number of frames The camcorder exits Manual Interval Rec mode whenever it is powered off However the NUMBER OF FRAME TRIGGER INTERVAL and PRE LIGHTING settings are maintained You do not need to set them again the next time you use Manual Interval Rec mode To shoot and record 1 After performing the basic procedures for shooting and recording following the instructions in Basic Procedure for Shooting page 77 secure the camcorder so that it will not move 2 Pressthe REC START button or the VTR button on the lens The camcorder starts recording in Manual Interval Rec mode When you use the PRE LIGHTING function recording starts after the light is swi
246. ial function keys of the software keyboard you can use the following special function keys on a USB keyboard Key Function tl When the cursor is in an edit box Move the cursor to the start or end When OK or Cancel has the focus Moves the focus between OK and Cancel Delete Deletes the character after the cursor Shift 4 Selects the string before or after the Shift cursor Ctrl C Ctrl C Copies the selected string X V A Ctrl X Cuts the selected string Ctrl V Pastes a copied or cut string Ctrl A Selects the entire string When the cursor is in an edit box Moves the focus to Cancel When OK or Cancel has the focus Exits the software keyboard Enter Esc When the cursor is in an edit box moves the focus to Cancel Tab Moves the focus between OK and Cancel USB mouse functions You can use the mouse to move the cursor on the software keyboard You can also left click on a key to enter the character for that key To change the speed of the mouse pointer In the Disc Menu select Settings gt Select Mouse Pointer Speed and then select the desired speed Adjust according to the selected mouse To exit the software keyboard from a USB keyboard 1 With the cursor in an edit box press the Enter key or the Esc key to move the focus to Cancel Thumbnail Operations SU9949S N9 ul
247. ic detection function Before starting to check remove the front microphone connected to the MIC IN connector if it is connected Perform the operations of steps 1 and 2 explained in 5 Testing external microphones Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches to FRONT Perform the operations of steps 4 and 5 explained in 5 Testing external microphones If the audio level meters on the color and monochrome LCDs and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level the function of the XLR connection automatic detection is working correctly If it does not reflect the changing sound level the function of the XLR connection automatic detection function is off Set REAR XLR AUTO to ON on the MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu If it does not reflect even after making this setting the XLR connection automatic detection function does not work correctly eoueuejure N 6 1 7 Checking the user bit and timecode functions 1 Set the user bits as required For the operation see Setting the user bits on page 69 Set the timecode For the operation see Setting the timecode on page 69 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to R RUN Press the REC START button and check that recording starts and that the timecode indication in the counter display changes Press the REC START button again and check that recording stops and that the timecode indication stops c
248. igher in the hierarchy Memory Stick compartment Memory Stick Access indicator Open the lid of the menu operating section and insert a Memory Stick with the notch facing downward in the direction shown by the arrow so that it clicks into place To remove a Memory Stick first press it in to release the lock then withdraw The Memory Stick access indicator lights in green when a Memory Stick is loaded and lights in red when the Memory Stick is being accessed for reading or writing For details about Memory Stick see Handling the Memory Stick on page 186 Cover Right side near the rear MOSIAJOAQ 491deuo LAY PPAUS F HND orn i PTER RETURN COUNTER TC U BIT Built in speaker The speaker can be used to monitor E E sound during recording and playback sound during playback The speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack the speaker output is suppressed automatically For details about alarms see Operation Warnings on page 216 LCD monitor Displays camera video VDR related warnings remaining battery capacity remaining disc capacity audio levels time data and so on Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 21 14 1 2 22 For details see Status Display on the LCD monitor and monochrome LCD on page 2
249. ile the SUB CLIP indicator was lit Press the SUB CLIP DISC MENU button to turn the indicator off and try again No clip list is selected Create a new clip list or load a clip list from the disc There is no clip list Create a clip list There are no sub clips in the clip list Register a sub clip or load another clip list The In and Out point positions are invalid Set correct In and Out points The total number of sub clips is over the upper limit 300 The total duration of sub clips in the current clip list is over the upper limit 24 hours The main unit or drive fan has stopped Avoid use under high temperatures turn off the power and contact a Sony service representative An error was detected while accessing internal memory Power the unit off and contact a Sony service representative A firmware update failed Power the unit off and contact a Sony service representative An unsupported USB device was connected to this unit Essence marks cannot be inserted For details see Recording essence marks on page 81 Operation Warnings eoueuejure N 6 1 221 6 1 2 222 Alarm messages during thumbnail search scene selection and clip list operations An alarm message may appear in the LCD monitor during thumbnail search scene selection and clip list operations In that case take the action i
250. ils see Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock on page 42 Setting the user bits By setting the user bits up to 8 hexadecimal digits you can record user information such as the date time or scene number on the timecode track Setting the Time Data Bunoous 104 suyas pue sjuswysnipy e 69 10 86 pue sjuewjsnipy e sa deyo 70 1 RESET RETURN button EXPAND CHAPTER COUNTER RC U BIT CLOCK m Set the DISPLAY switch to U BIT 2 Setthe F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET The first leftmost digit flashes 3 Usethe up and down arrow buttons to change values and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit Repeat until all digits are set To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00 Press the RESET RETURN button Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN or R RUN corresponding to the desired operating mode for the timecode generator The set user bit data will be recorded for both LTC and VITC To store the user bit setting in memory The user bit setting apart from the real time is automatically retained in memory even when the power is turned off Synchronizing the timecode You can synchronize the internal timecode generator of this camcorder with an external generator for the regeneration of an external timecode You can also synchronize the timecode Setting the Time Data gene
251. ing LCD monitor Monochrome backlight LCD backlight H High select this to view Lit the LCD monitor outdoors in the daytime M Brightness between H Lit and L L Low select this to view L the LCD monitor indoors or outdoors at night OFF Off the display is also Off off it Status Display on the LCD monitor and monochrome LCD The following display appears on the LCD monitor display which is set to STATUS with the DISP SEL EXPAND button and on the monochrome LCD Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 23 MeIAJOAQ Je deuo 24 01 23 45 MIN SEC BOLI EI SENENNNIE LCD monitor Monochrome LCD Resolution Indication Field or frame Scan mode rate 29 9P 29 97 frames per Progressive second If PAL AREA is selected Indication Field or frame Scan mode rate 50i 50 fields per Interlace second 50 50 frames per Progressive second 25P 25 frames per Progressive second 1 Selected by COUNTRY setting on the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu see page 136 There may be no indication displayed when this unit cannot identify the system frequency for example when playing back a disc recorded with other equipment Audio format Indicates the format of audio being currently Indicates the resolution of HD output video played back or recorded Indication Resolution horizontal x vertical Indication Quantization bit rate
252. ing the BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket By fitting a BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket not supplied you can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder suoneiedeJjg z sajdeu9 1 Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the previous section Moving the viewfinder shoe up to detach the viewfinder slide assembly 2 Attach the BKW 401 with the supplied bolts Bolts supplied with the BKW 401 3 Adjust the front to back position so that the arm of the BK W 401 does not touch the handle when it is raised Attaching the Viewfinder 39 suoneredejd 40 Adjust position so that arm does not touch handle Detaching the eyepiece Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the screen from further away It is also easy to remove dust from the viewfinder screen and mirror when the eyepiece is detached 1 Tum the eyepiece locking ring fully counterclockwise to align the red marks on the locking ring and the viewfinder barrel Q Locking ring Locking ring match mark Match mark on the viewfinder barrel 2 Detach the eyepiece Match mark on end of eyepiece Attaching the Viewfinder To reattaching the eyepiece 1 Align the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the viewfinder barrel 2 Align the red mark on the end of the eyepiece end with the red marks on the eyepiece locking rin
253. ion see Assigning user defined clip titles automatically page 88 Clip lists You can use the scene selection function to select clips from the clips saved on a disc and create a cut edit list called a clip list Clip lists have numbers beginning with E for example E0001 Up to 99 clip lists can be saved on a disc Sub clips clips in clip lists Clips or parts of clips that have been added to a clip list are called sub clips Sub clips are virtual editing data that specify ranges in the original clips You can use them without modifying the original data The following figure illustrates the relation between clips and sub clips Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 4 C0001 C0002 C0004 Clip list E0001 Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3 In the above example the whole of clip 2 has been added as sub clip 1 and the whole of clip 4 has been added as sub clip 2 Sub clip 3 is part of clip 3 Therefore when clip list E0001 is played back clip 4 is played after clip 2 and then the part of clip 3 shown in gray color is played Clips on disc Clip list editing current clip list To edit a clip list you need to load the clip list from the disc into the unit s internal memory The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory is called the current clip list The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation and editing Clip list playback also uses the current clip list After cre
254. ion software vary An FTP client that supports UTF 8 is required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII characters Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF 8 Standard commands In the command syntax column SP means a space entered by pressing the space bar and lt CRLF gt means a new line entered by pressing the Enter key USER Send this command to begin the login process Syntax USER SP username lt CRLF gt Input example USER admin PASS After sending the USER command send this command to complete the login process Syntax PASS SP password lt CRLF gt Input example PASS pdw 700 QUIT Terminates the FTP connection If a file is being transferred terminates after completion of the transfer Syntax QUIT lt CRLF gt PORT Specifies the IP address and port to which this unit should connect for the next file transfer for data transfer from this unit Syntax PORT SP lt h1 h2 h3 h4 p1 p2 gt lt CRLF gt h1 most significant byte to h4 least significant byte IP address 1 most significant byte p2 least significant byte Port address Input example PORT 10 0 0 1 242 48 IP address 10 0 0 1 Port number 62000 PASV This command requests this unit to Listen on a data port which is not its default data port It puts this unit into passive mode waiting for the remote computer to make a data connection Syntax PASV lt CRLF gt TYPE Specifies the type
255. is product includes technology from Monotype Imaging Inc including iType and certain fonts About a Memory Stick What is Memory Stick Memory Stick is a new compact portable and versatile IC Integrated Circuit recording medium with a data capacity that exceeds a floppy disk Memory Stick is specially designed for exchanging and sharing digital data among Memory Stick compatible products Because it is removable Memory Stick can also be used for external data storage Memory Stick is available in two sizes standard size and compact Memory Stick size Types of Memory Stick Memory Stick is available in the following five types to meet various requirements in functions Memory Stick R Stored data are not overwritten You can write data to Memory Stick R with Memory Stick R compatible products only Copyright protected data that requires MagicGate copyright protection technology cannot be written to Memory Stick R Memory Stick Stores any type of data except copyright protected data that requires the MagicGate copyright protection technology MagicGate Memory Stick Equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection technology Memory Stick ROM Stores pre recorded read only data You cannot record on Memory Stick ROM or erase the pre recorded data Memory Stick PRO Equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection
256. isc drive section General Usable disc PFDSODLA Professional Disc capacity 50 0 GB PFD23A Professional Disc capacity 23 3 GB Data transfer rate Max 72 Mbps Recording playback time MPEG IMX 50 Mbps PFDSODLA Approx 95 minutes PFD23A Approx 43 minutes Digital video Sampling frequency Y 74 176 MHz 59 941 74 25 MHz 50i 25P Pb Pr 37 088 MHz 59 941 37 125 MHz 50i 25P Quantization 8 bits sample Compression MPEG 2 4 2 2P HL 50 Mbps Audio with standard playback machine Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz 40 5 dB 1 0 dB Dynamic range 8 93 dB min 9 2 Distortion THD 0 08 max Cross talk 70 dB max Wow and flutter Below measurable limit Input output connectors Signal inputs AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 XLR type 3 pin female 60 dBu 4 dBu 0 dBu 0 775 Vrms MIC IN XLR type 5 pin female 60 dBu GENLOCK IN BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 unbalanced TC IN BNC type 0 5 V to 18 Vp p 10 Signal outputs TEST OUT BNC type VBS Y component 1 0 Vp p 75 unbalanced SDI OUT 1 2 BNC type HD SDI SD SDI 0 8 Vp p unbalanced AUDIO OUT XLR type 5 pin male 0 dBm TC OUT BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 Q EARPHONE minijack 8 Q to 18 dBs variable Others DC IN XLR type 4 pin male 11 to 17 V DC Specifications 227 xipueddy 228 DC OUT 4 pin 11 to 17 V DC maximum rated current 0 5A LENS 12 pin REMOTE 8 pin LIGHT 2 pin i
257. ive letter will differ depending on the number of other peripherals connected to the remote computer 2 Use Explorer to perform file operations on the disc loaded in this unit You can operate in the same way that you operate on local drives and files on network computers If you power this unit off during a FAM connection the data transferred thus far is discarded All file operations are not possible for some types of files For details see File operation restrictions page 196 To eject discs from a remote computer Right click the icon representing this unit in Explorer and select Eject from the menu which appears Exiting file operations Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to 3 1 Dooneofthe following on the 5 or icon displayed in the remote computer s taskbar Double click Right click to display the context menu and select Safely Remove Hardware from the context menu The Safely Remove Hardware dialog appears 2 Select Sony XDCAM PDW 700 IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device and click Stop The Stop a Hardware device dialog appears 3 Select Sony XDCAM PDW 700 IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device and click In Windows XP Sony XDCAM PDW 700 IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device is deleted from the list of hardware devices In Windows Vista the message This device can be safely removed from your computer appears This unit can now resume normal operations The limitations described i
258. last recorded clip ATW Assigns the function that turns auto tracing white balance ON and OFF RETURN Assigns the function that VIDEO displays in the viewfinder the HD Y 1080i signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector LENS RET Assigns the functions executed by the RET button on the lens recording review and so on REC SWITCH Assigns the function that starts and stops recording TURBO Assigns the turbo gain SWITCH function ZEBRA Assigns the zebra pattern display function FREEZE MIX Assigns the function that mixes a still picture monochrome and camera video color effective for framing shots COLOR TEMP Assigns the function that SW 3200K switches the white balance to 3200K COLOR TEMP Assigns the function that SW 4300K switches the white balance to 4300K COLOR TEMP Assigns the function that SW 5600K switches the white balance to 5600K COLOR TEMP Assigns the function that SW 6300K switches the white balance to 6300K ELECTRICAL Assigns the function that CC switches between electrical CC filters 3200K 4300K 5600K 6300K CC 5600K Assigns the function that applies an electrical 5600 K filter Adjustments and Settings From Menus Function Description ZOOM TELE For use with a lens that WIDE 9 supports serial communications assign the ZOOM TELE setting to ASSIGN 3 and the WIDE setting to ASSIGN 4 ZOOM WIDE For use with a lens that TELE 9 supports serial communica
259. lay VBS 1 1 Does not appear when the optional CBK SC02 Analog Composite Input Board is not installed After you complete this setting you can record external video signals by inputting analog composite signals to the GENLOCK IN connector Advanced Operations for Shooting y 95 Su89J9S ND ui suonejedQ Ja deuD 96 PW Operations in GUI Screens Overview You can perform scene searches play the searched scenes and select scenes edit clip list in Graphical User Interface GUI screens The Switching between GUI screens The most important GUI screens are Clip thumbnail screen Displays thumbnails of clips on the disc Clip is displayed as the title at the upper left of the screen see page 97 Clip list thumbnail screen Displays thumbnails of sub clips in a clip list Clip List is displayed as the title at the upper left of the screen see page 97 There are also two playback screens Clip playback screen Playback screen for normal video Clip list playback screen Playback screen for clip list video You will use the THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK button and the SUB CLIP DISC MENU button to switch between these four screens Each press of these buttons switches between the screens as shown in the following figure The THUMBNAIL and SUB CLIP indicators light as follows according to the type of screen that is currently displayed To switch between these f
260. layed ON or OFF STATUS Displays ON or hides SYSTEM OFF the SYSTEM menu STATUS Selects whether or not the FUNCTION FUNCTION window is displayed ON or OFF STATUS Selects whether or not the AUDIO STATUS AUDIO window is displayed ON or OFF Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Adjustments and Settings From Menus Adjustments and Settings From Menus Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions You can set the gain values for the L M and H positions of the GAIN selector which switches the gain of the video amplifier How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select the item for the switch position then press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the GAIN SW page Item Description GAIN Sets the gain value LOW corresponding to the L position of the GAIN selector GAIN MID Sets the gain value corresponding to the M position of the GAIN selector GAIN Sets the gain value HIGH corresponding to the H position of the GAIN selector GAIN Sets the gain value TURBO corresponding to TURBO GAIN function Item Description TURBO OFF When you operate t
261. le the EDIT page contains factory preset items the EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19 pages are all blank in their initial state You can register up to 10 items including blank lines on each of these pages How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the TOP menu see page 164 2 Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the menu appears eC ONTENTS Y Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 1 OXDONOUUSQN OOOOOOCCOGU 4444441441 Ccccccecc QUOOUUOUO OD PMG DAAAADAAAAM WONOUIAWN If the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been used before the last accessed page appears 3 If the CONTENTS page is displayed press the MENU knob Then select one of EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19 and press the MENU knob If a different page other than the CONTENTS page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears then press the MENU knob Example when the EDIT USER 9 page is selected ETOOEDIT USER 9 ES Press the MENU knob Then select the line where you want to add an item and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears EDIT FUNCTION T E ESC 5 Select INSERT and press the MENU knob The following menu appears OO eCONTENTS OOOOOOOOO c U 1 0 2 0 3 S 4 1 5 R 5 80 X P 8 U g U
262. leted the message COMPLETE appears The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file If no file is present with a particular file number this is shown as NO FILE To load scene files from the Memory Stick into the camcorder memory You can load up to five scene files stored in the Memory Stick into the camcorder memory all in a single operation How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select SCENE RECALL and press the MENU knob The SCENE RECALL page appears 3 Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE RECALL page which contains the desired scene files appears and press the MENU knob Select SFILE LOAD 5 and press the MENU knob The message RECALL OK YES NO appears 5 carry out the load recall select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO When loading is complete the message COMPLETE appears and the access indicator goes off The scene files loaded from the Memory Stick overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory To load the scene file saved in the camcorder memory when the Memory Stick is inserted return to the POO SCENE RECALL page and load the desired scene file in the camcorder memory When th
263. llow a RNFR command with a RNTO command Syntax RNFR lt SP gt lt path name before change gt lt CRLF gt RNTO lt SP gt lt path name after change gt lt CRLF gt Input example RNFR General info txt RNTO General clip_info txt DELE Deletes the specified file on this unit Depending on the directory and file type deletion may not be possible For details see File operation restrictions page 196 Syntax DELE SP lt path name gt lt CRLF gt Input example DELE Clip C0099 MXF STAT Sends information about properties of the specified file or about data transfer status from this unit to the remote computer The following property information is sent depending on the file type MXF file File name File type CODEC type Frame rate Number of audio channels Duration UMID non MXF file File name Syntax STAT SP path name lt CRLF gt The following data is transferred depending on whether a file is specified with lt path name gt File specified The properties of the specified file No specification The size of the data transferred thus far unit bytes Input example STAT Clip C0001 MXF ABOR Requests this unit to abort a file transfer currently in progress Syntax ABOR lt CRLF gt SYST Displays the system name of this unit Syntax SYST lt CRLF gt HELP Displays a list of the commands supported by this unit or an explanation of the specified
264. log Composite Input Board CBKZ MD01 SD Record and Playback Soft ware Other peripheral devices HDCA 702 MPEG TS Adaptor Equipment for maintenance and easier handling LC 777 Hard Carrying Case LC DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case VCT 14 Tripod Adaptor Maintenance Manual Design and specifications are subject to change without notice Always make a test recording and verify that it was recorded successfully SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER Specifications xipueddy 229 Chart of Optional Components and Accessories LCD monitor perm 6805 678 BVM L230 LMD series monitor 674 Microphone xipueddy CAC 12 20 Microphone Holder XDCAM HD series recorder PDW HD1500 PDW F75 HDVF 20A 200 C35W Viewfinder HDCAM series recorder HDW 2000 series recorder HDW S280 WR
265. may have poor quality because of an inherent characteristic of CCDs Before using ECS mode check the shooting conditions Setting the Electronic Shutter The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the current system frequency Selecting the shutter mode and shutter speed Switching the shutter mode and the shutter speed in standard mode Repeatedly flick the SHUTTER selector to the SELECT side see the next section Switching the shutter speed in ECS mode and SLS mode Select ECS mode or SLS mode with the SHUTTER selector and then turn the MENU knob see page 63 MENU knob SHUTTER selector You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu to narrow the range of choice in advance or to select in advance whether or not you use ECS or SLS To set the shutter mode and standard mode shutter speed Once the shutter speed is selected it is retained even when the camcorder power is turned off 1 Follow the procedure described in Selecting the display items on page 172 to set the VF DISPLAY MODE item to 2 or 3 on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu 2 Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT The current shutter setting indication appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen Examples SS 1 250 ECS 60 0 Hz Before the shutter setting indication disappears flick the SHUTTER selector
266. me Assign the name TITLES TXT to the file Input format Enter title prefixes one at time separated by newline CRLF characters Prefixes can be up to 10 characters long A prefix file can contain up to 20 prefixes Allowable characters Digits 0 to 9 Alphabetic characters a to z A to Z The following symbols 96 amp G semicolon comma period _ underscore Space Advanced Operations for Shooting 89 Bunooug y je1deuo 90 Title prefix list example Tennis lt CRLF gt Basketball lt CRLF gt Skiing_1 lt CRLF gt Skiing_2 lt CRLF gt To transfer a title prefix list to the internal memory of the camcorder How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Copy the title prefix file TITLES TXT to the following folder on the Memory Stick WMSSONY PRO XDCAM GENERAL VA L_LIST This folder is created when you insert a Memory Stick into the camcorder Do not create this folder yourself on a computer Insert a Memory Stick with the title prefix file TITLES TXT into the Memory Stick slot of the camcorder On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu see page 138 select LOAD PREFIX DATA and then press the MENU knob MEMORY STICK ACCESS appears and the file on the Memory Stick TITLES TXT is transferred to the internal memory of the unit The message
267. mines or CBK SCQ2 option whether the signal is treated as a board is installed wide signal AUTO When wide picture information is detected in the input signal treat the signal as a wide signal and set the up converter operating mode to squeeze mode Record wide picture information when recording SD When wide picture information is not detected set the up converter operating mode to edge crop mode and do not record wide picture information 16 9 Always treat the signal as a wide signal and set the up converter operating mode to squeeze mode Record wide picture information when recording SD SETUP REMOVE 0 096 7 5 96 Selects whether to modify the When the COUNTRY setup level of input video signals item is set to 7 5 Remove the setup Select NTSC J AREA or when signals with 7 5 NTSC AREA and the setup are input CBK SC02 option 0 0 Do not remove the setup board is installed Select when signals without setup are input 26 UMID SET COUNTRY CODE Blank up to 4 characters For details see Setting the ORGANIZATION Blank up to 4 characters UMID data on page 184 USER CODE Blank up to 4 characters TIME ZONE 00 to 3F Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 1 2 137 pue s ejds q 9 4 2 138 No Page Item Settings Description 27 CLIP TITLE TITLE DSABL ENABL For details see Assigning user SELECT PREFIX EX
268. n Operation limitations during FAM connections on page 201 no longer apply 4 Disconnect the i LINK cable as required suonejedo e 8 2 File Operations in File Access Mode for Windows 201 e 8 202 To make a reconnection To reconnect after exiting file operations do one of the following depending on whether an i LINK cable is connected i LINK cable is not connected Connect this unit and a remote computer with an i LINK cable i LINK cable is connected Disconnect the i LINK cable from either this unit or the remote computer wait for at least 10 seconds and then reconnect the disconnected cable The unit is powered off and an i LINK cable is connected Power the unit on File Operations in File Access Mode for Macintosh File access mode operating environment Operating system requirements for file operations by file access mode are as follows Computer operating system Mac OS X v10 4 11 or higher Preparations Do the following on the remote computer and this unit Install the FAM driver on the remote computer see the next item Set i LINK FAM on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu to ENABL see page 182 To install the FAM driver Insert the supplied CD ROM XDCAM Application Software into the CD ROM drive of your computer and execute the FAM Driver gt Mac dmg file of the FAM Driver then follow the installation instr
269. n in the counter display on each of the LCD monitor and monochrome LCD is changing The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on The RF and SERVO indicators on the color LCD are off 6 Press the REC START button again Check that recording stops and that the REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off 1 Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6 this time using the VTR button on the lens Press the RESET RETURN button and check that the indication in the counter display on each of the LCD monitor and monochrome LCD is 00 00 00 00 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting 8 Press the F REV button then press the PLAY PAUSE button Check that fast reverse playback and normal playback are performed 9 Press the STOP button then press the F FWD button Check that playback stops and fast forward playback are performed 10 Press the STOP button again then press the PREV button Check that the image of the beginning of the current or previous clip is displayed 11 Press the NEXT button and check that the image of the beginning of the next clip is displayed 2 Testing the automatic audio level adjusting functions 1 Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches to FRONT 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches to AUTO Set the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches to F FRONT 4 Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector at a suitable sound source Check that the level indications for channels 1 to 4 correspond to the so
270. n the VDR SAVE STBY switch is set to SAVE putting the VDR into power save mode warning indicator This indicator lights when any of the following conditions occurs with the corresponding item set to ON on the LED page of the OPERATION menu The gain is set to other than 0 dB The SHUTTER selector is set to ON The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST ATW is enabled The lens extender is used The FILTER selector is set to other than ND 1 The reference value of auto iris adjustment is not the standard value Layout of the status display on the viewfinder screen The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder settings and operating status a center marker a safety zone marker etc When the menu screen is not displayed and the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY ASPECT switch is set to ON the items for which an ON setting was made on the VF DISP 1 VF DISP 2 or VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION menu or with related switches are displayed at the top and bottom of the screen The messages that give details of the settings and adjustment progress and results can also be made to appear for about three seconds while settings are being changed during adjustment and after adjustment For details about the display item selection see Selecting the display items on page 172 For details about setting change and adjustment progress messa
271. n the on position the video light is turned on automatically while the camcorder is recording MANUAL Youcan turn the video light on or off manually using its own switch When this switch is set to AUTO at the beginning of the recording the picture is recorded even though the lighting may fluctuate until the video light comes on If the beginning of the recording is important you should set this switch to MANUAL To ensure proper operation of the video light Sony recommends the use of the BP GL95 L80S Battery Pack with the camcorder POWER switch Turns the main power supply on and off Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 15 MeIAJOAQ Je deuo 16 DC IN DC power input connector XLR type 4 pin male To operate the camcorder from an AC power supply connect an optional DC power cord to this terminal and then connect the cord to the DC output terminal of the BC L70 BC M150 or another battery charger El DC our 12V DC power output connector 4 pin female Supplies power for a WRR 860A 861 862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner not supplied maximum 0 5 A Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF synthesized diversity tuner Battery attachment shoe Attach a BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S Battery Pack Alternatively you can attach an AC DN2B DNIO AC Adaptor to operate the camcorder on AC power supply For details about how to attach the battery or AC adaptor see Preparing a Powe
272. n which recording is done repeatedly at a specified interval after the button is pressed A pre lighting function is available in Auto Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode This function automatically turns on the light before recording starts which allows you to record pictures under stable light and color temperature conditions Interval Rec settings cannot be made while this unit is in the following states The disc exchange cache function is enabled SCAN MODE on the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu is set to 23 9P Advanced Operations for Shooting y 8 Operation limitations during recording Item Description 1 G LINK Cannot be used S400 connector Time code The internal time code generator runs in R RUN mode regardless of how the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set Audio signals Not recorded Playback control Auto Interval Rec mode and buttons the consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode The EJECT F REV F FWD NEXT PREV PLAY PAUSE and STOP buttons are disabled To use these buttons stop recording by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens The single shot mode of Manual Interval Rec mode The F REV F FWD NEXT PREV PLAY PAUSE and STOP buttons are disabled To use these buttons exit the Interval Rec mode by pressing the EJECT button Bunooug y je1deuo Menu operations The s
273. names that begin with F Append to directory names The following data is transferred depending on whether path name specifies a directory or file Directory specified A list of the files in the specified directory File specified Information about the specified file FTP File Operations No specification A list of the files in the current directory The wildcard characters any string and any character may be used in lt path name gt Input example 1 LIST a Clip Input example 2 LIST Clip MXF NLST Sends a list of file names from this unit to the remote computer with no other information Syntax NLST SP options or path name gt lt CRLF gt The following options may be specified when no path name is specified e a Also display file names that begin with I Display information other than file name gives the same result as the LIST command F Append to directory names The following data is transferred depending on whether lt path name gt specifies a directory or file Directory specified A list of the file names only in the specified directory No specification A list of the file names only in the current directory The wildcard characters any string and any character may be used in lt path name gt Input example 1 NLST I Input example 2 NLST Clip MXF RETR Begins transfer of a copy of
274. nd contact a Sony service representative a Asterisks are replaced by digits in the display b During recording c During playback fast forward fast reverse or stop d During recording pause e During recording or pause f 1 flash s g 4 flashes s Operation alarm messages Operation and alarm messages are displayed in the operation alarm message display area see page 34 of the viewfinder screen h During recording displayed in the LCD monitor only When the DISP SEL EXPAND button is set to STATUS For details about the warning displays and alarm messages on the viewfinder see the next item Operation Warnings 6 1 219 AUTO The unit is operating in Auto Disc Damage INTERVAL Interval Rec mode M S S M S Indicates the shooting interval in E minutes and seconds Non AV Full e MANU The unit is operating in the single MAX Files INTERVAL shot mode of Manual Interval Rec Over DUR 3 FRAME mode FRAME Indicates the DI read err o z number of frames recorded in one Read err 3 shot DRV ADJ err INTERVAL The unit is operating in the Run Salvage S consecutive mode of Manual FRAME Interval Rec mode S M H Indicates the trigger interval in seconds minutes or hours A disc that cannot be recorded was inserted To record exchange the disc The disc is full Exchange or format the disc
275. ndicated in the following table Cannot Expand Clip any Further Selected Essence Mark Does not Exist Sub Clip is Invalid Set Appropriate IN OUT Points Duration of One Clip List must be Less than 24 Hours No More Sub Clips can be Added to the Clip List Sub Clip does not Exist Clip List does not Exist The clip cannot be expanded into more blocks This alarm appears when the DISP SEL EXPAND button is pressed when the number of blocks is maximum or when the duration of an expanded thumbnail is one frame The selected essence mark does not exist This alarm appears in the essence mark selection screen when the specified essence mark does not exist on the disc The temporal relationship between the specified In and Out points in a TRIM operation see page 118 is not correct Reset so that the value of the Out point timecode is larger than the value of the In point timecode The total duration of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of 24 hours as the result of an Add Sub Clips see page 116 or Trim Sub Clip see page 118 operation The total number of the sub clips of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of 300 as the result of an Add Sub Clips see page 116 or Trim Sub Clip see page 118 operation An attempt is made to execute a Move Sub Clips see page 117 Trim Sub Clip see page 118 Delete Sub Clips see page 118 or Set Start Time
276. ng the lens file The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows you to change the lens file according to the lens in use Adjustments and Settings From Menus sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsig 9 1 2 183 pejrejeq pue s ejdsig nua 9 Ja deyo 184 How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the LENS FILE page of the USER menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 The LENS FILE page shows the name F ID of the currently selected lens file The lens name L ID and manufacturer L MF appear when a lens that supports serial communications is mounted U17OLENS FILE 2LENS FILE SELECT e F ID No Offset 2 Select LENS FILE SELECT and press the MENU knob 3 Turn MENU knob to change the setting and press the MENU knob Setting the UMID data What is a UMID The UMID Unique Material Identifier is a unique identifier for audio visual material defined by the SMPTE330M 2003 standard The UMID may be used either as the 32 byte Basic UMID or as the Extended UMID which includes an additional 32 bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes For details refer to SMPTE 330M Globally unique ID is automatically recorded in clip units The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional information such as location time date company and so on Using the
277. nge the order of sub clips in a clip list Delete sub clips Use the Delete Sub Clips command to delete specified sub clips from a clip list Trim sub clips Use the Trim Sub Clip command to adjust the In and Out points of a sub clip This function can also be used to adjust the overall duration of the clip list Set the start timecode Use the Set Start Time Code command to set the timecode at the start of a clip list 3 Play the clip list Use the PLAY PAUSE button and other playback controls to play the current clip list and check its contents Save the clip list Use the Save Clip List or Save Clip List as command to save the newly created clip list to the disc To reedit clip lists on the disc Use the Load Clip List command to load the clip lists you want to edit and perform the steps 2 to 4 in the previous section You can also delete clip lists on the disc For details see Managing clip lists page 120 Clip lists can be created and edited even when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording disabled However if you need to save the clip list set Write Inhibit tab to enable recording before you create or edit the clip list To add sub clips You can add sub clips to clip lists from with the clip thumbnail screen or the clip list thumbnail screen However you must use the clip list thumbnail screen to edit clip lists Scene Selection Clip List Editing Adding s
278. nimum position Maximum Minimum MONITOR monitor volume adjustment knob Controls the volume of the sound other than the warning tone that is output via the built in speaker or optional earphones When the knob is turned to the minimum position no sound can be heard MONITOR audio monitor selection switches By means of combinations of the two switches you can select audio that you want to hear through the built in speaker or optional earphones Position of down side switch CH 1 2 Position of up side Audio output switch CH 1 CH 3 Channel 1 audio MIX Channels 1 and 2 mixed audio stereo CH 2 CH 4 Channel 2 audio Position of down side switch CH 3 4 Position of up side Audio output switch CH 1 CH 3 Channel 3 audio MIX Channels 3 and 4 mixed audio stereo CH 2 CH 4 Channel 4 audio Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 19 14 1 2 20 By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE jack on the rear of the unit you can hear the audio in stereo On the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu HEADPHONE OUT must be set to STEREO al VDRSAVE STBY VDR save standby switch Switches the status of the power supply to the VDR while recording is stopped STOP or paused REC PAUSE SAVE The disc stops rotating and some functions are disabled Power consumption is lower than when the camcorder is in STBY mode Batter
279. nnels 3 and 4 sss 67 Setting the Time Data eee eee 69 Setting the rmiecode iuo dad snare ee bete 69 Setting thesuser bits ee 69 Synchronizing the timecode see 70 Chapter 4 Shooting honus 73 Discs used for recording and playback sss 73 Notes on handling Write protecting discs Loading and unloading a disc sse 74 Formatting a disc i eoe nte ede epis 75 Handling of discs when recording does not end normally salvage ines L 75 Basic Procedure for Shooting eese eee eee eee eee ee sensn 77 Playing back the recorded clip sse 79 Table of Contents 7 Deleting the recorded clip eee 80 Advanced Operations for Shooting eee eerte 81 Recording essence marks 81 Setting clip flags with switches 8l Setting the thumbnail image at recording time 82 Starting a shoot with a few seconds of pre stored picture data Picture Gach 4e eme ette eden a 82 Time lapse video Interval Rec function ssssss 83 To exchange discs while recording Disc Exchange Cac
280. not go to the TOP menu In this case follow the procedure in To display the TOP menu page 164 166 Menu Operations To display the TOP menu when another menu is displayed Move to displayed at the top right of each page of the menu and press the MENU knob Or flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch repeatedly to ESCAPE until the TOP menu is displayed Using the USER menu example menu operation This section explains menu operations using the USER menu as an example The operations are the same for the ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE and DIAGNOSIS menus For details about how to operate the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu see Editing the USER menu page 168 1 Setthe MENU ON OFF switch to ON Normally the USER menu appears If it does not turn the MENU knob to move to USER in the TOP menu and press the MENU knob If the USER menu has been used before the last accessed page appears In this case go to step 2 If this is the first time the USER menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the USER menu appears In this case follow the procedure below Press the MENU knob Then turn the MENU knob to move to the desired page number OOOOOOOOO ls 2 3 4 2 B Fam 8 Sg D This indicates that the menu Screen can be scrolled 2 Press the MENU knob again The page selected in is displayed Go to step 3 When you set items on the ALL OPERATION PAINT
281. nt inserting carriage returns only at the indicated carriage return locations and inserting no unspecified spaces If the UTF 8 format string is longer than 52 characters the ASCII format string is used as the clip name string Advanced Operations for Shooting Bunoous y 93 Bunooys y je1deuo 94 Setting clip names 1 Loada planning metadata file containing clip names into the unit s memory see page 122 2 Carry out steps 2 to 5 of To assign clip names on this unit page 92 3 Turn the MENU knob to display PLAN and then press the MENU knob Each time that you start recording the unit automatically creates clip names using the names specified in the planning metadata file An underscore _ and a three digit serial number 001 to 999 is appended to each clip name Examples of automatically generated clip names Clip names displayed in the viewfinder Typhoon 001 Typhoon 002 The actually recorded clip names Typhoon Strikes Tokyo 001 Typhoon Strikes Tokyo 002 D 1 When display of the ASCII format clip name has been selected see page 124 The serial numbers return to 001 on the next recording operation if you reach number 999 Serial numbers are not reset when you power the unit off or exchange discs newly generated numbers are continuous on the old ones If the ASCII format clip name string is longer than 14 characters it is displayed in the viewfinder as t
282. nto the camcorder memory Data that can be saved in a scene file You can save the following data in a scene file Values adjusted using the PAINT menu Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and ECS mode The white balance data included in a scene file depends on the SCENE WHITE DATA setting on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu Saving a scene file To save a scene file to the Memory Stick insert the Memory Stick into the Memory Stick slot before starting the following operation How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operation see Basic menu operations on page 164 FO4 SCENE FILE To set a file ID for the data to be saved Set the file ID before going to step 2 For details on setting the file ID see To set the file ID on page 188 2 Select SCENE STORE and press the MENU knob The SCENE STORE page appears 3 Press the MENU knob then select the desired file number and press the MENU knob again The file to be saved is selected When no Memory Stick is inserted Select the desired memory number and press the MENU knob When the save is completed the SCENE FILE page appears again When you select a file number where data has already been saved The message OVERWRITE OK YES
283. numbers Do one of the following Press the up or down arrow button Turn the MENU knob To confirm selections Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Thumbnail Operations You can use thumbnail screens to display clip information and to find protect and delete clips The thumbnails provide visual confirmation of these and other operations Selecting thumbnails The thumbnail selection frame see page 98 indicates the currently selected thumbnail To move the thumbnail selection frame Turn the MENU knob or press the arrow buttons To skip quickly through thumbnails Skip Scroll function When you have a large number of thumbnails like in expand thumbnail screen you can use the Skip Scroll function to skip through them quickly See page 104 for more information about operations in thumbnail screens 1 mthescreenslike clip thumbnail screen or expand thumbnail screen display the Thumbnail Menu 2 Select Skip Scroll and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A small popup window appears on the scrollbar to indicate the position of the currently selected thumbnail within the set of all thumbnails Expand 007 235 0 01 2010929001 T DUR 0 00 00 01 i ms ma we DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 Seashore Thumbnail Operations su 199 MD ul 1e1deu 105 MH suonejedo 1 1 2 106 3 Turn
284. of data to be transferred Syntax TYPE lt SP gt lt type code options delimited by lt SP gt gt lt CRLF gt FTP File Operations suonejedo e 8 2 205 suoneJedo 8 saideyo 206 lt type code gt can be any of the following However for XDCAM data is always transferred as regardless of the type code specification A ASCII N Non print T Telnet format C ASA Carriage Control E EBCDIC N Non print T Telnet format C ASA Carriage Control I IMAGE Binary default L LOCAL BYTE SIZE byte size Input example TYPEI STRU Specifies the data structure Syntax STRU SP lt structure code gt lt CRLF gt lt structure code gt can be any of the following However for XDCAM the structure is always F regardless of the structure code specification F File structure default R Record structure P Page structure Input example STRU F MODE Specifies the transfer mode Syntax MODE SP mode code lt CRLF gt lt mode code gt can be any of the following However for XDCAM the mode is always S regardless of the mode code specification S Stream mode default B Block mode C Compressed mode Input example MODE S LIST Sends a list of files from this unit to the remote computer Syntax LIST SP options SP path name lt CRLF gt lt options gt can be any of the following e a Also display file
285. of the Memory Stick with anything including your finger or metallic objects Do not strike bend or drop the Memory Stick About a Memory Stick 235 xipueddy 236 Do not disassemble or modify the Memory Stick Do not allow the Memory Stick to get wet Do not use or store the Memory Stick in a location that is Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun Under direct sunlight Very humid or subject to corrosive substances Memory Stick access indicator If the access indicator is turned on or is flashing data is being read from or written to the Memory Stick At this time do not shake the computer or product or subject them to shock Do not turn off the power of the computer and product or remove the Memory Stick This may damage the data Precautions To prevent data loss make backups of data frequently In no event will Sony be liable for any loss of data Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the provisions of copyright law When you use a Memory Stick that has been pre recorded be sure that the material has been recorded in accordance with copyright and other applicable laws The Memory Stick application software of the camcorder may be modified or changed by Sony without prior notice Note that there are certain restrictions on recording stage performances and other entertainment events even if they are recorded for personal use only
286. olor on the LCD monitor Viewing color playback on a video monitor You can view the recording in color on a color video monitor without the need for any external adaptor You can also view palyback video during a fast forward or reverse search For details about the switches and controls used to select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio level see page 19 and page 27 To freeze a picture during playback The following operation can also be done from the RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit 1 Pressthe PLAY PAUSE button to start playback 2 Press the PLAY PAUSE button again at the instant when you want to freeze the picture The playback pauses and frozen picture appears The timecode of the frozen frame is displayed in the counter display and the PLAY PAUSE indicator now flashes one flash second To restart playback Press the PLAY PAUSE button once again To display camera video in the viewfinder during playback Live amp Play function During playback the viewfinder normally displays the playback video But you can enable this function to view live camera video instead This is a convenient way to frame the next shot and adjust the focus and exposure while viewing recorded video on the LCD monitor or an external monitor How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the OUTPUT 2 page of the OPERATION menu For details on men
287. operation when all clips are already locked An attempt is made to execute an Unlock All Clips operation when all clips are already unlocked A file name that was specified in a Set Clip Name operation already exists An attempt was made to rename a clip with Set Clip Name when NAMING FORM is not set to FREE see page 92 Operation Warnings Flash Drive In the media selection screen of the Load Planning Metadata Select Drive command USB Flash Drive was selected with no USB flash drive connected Operation Warnings 6 1 223 xipueddy 224 Appendix Important Notes on Operation Use and storage Do not subject the unit to severe shocks The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped Do not cover the unit while operating Putting a cloth for example over the unit can cause excessive internal heat build up After use Always turn off the POWER switch Before storing the camcorder for a long period Remove the battery pack Shipping Remove the disc before transporting the unit f sending the unit by truck ship air or other transportation service pack it in the shipping carton of the unit Care of the unit Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lenses or optical filters using a blower If the body of the unit is dirty clean it with a soft dry cloth In extreme cases use a cloth steeped in a lit
288. or i manufacturing sales of any storage media storing MPEG 4 Visual video information ii distribution broadcasting of MPEG 4 Visual video information in any manner such as online video distribution service internet broadcasting TV broadcasting Other usage of this product may be required to obtain license from MPEGLA Please contact MPEG LA for any further information MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 http www mpegla com MPEG 2 Video Patent Portfolio License ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG 2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING Trademarks and Licenses VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG 2 PATENT PORTFOLIO WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 PACKAGED MEDIA means any storage media storing MPEG 2 video information such as DVD movie which are sold distributed to general consumers Disc replicators or sellers of the PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for their own business from MPEG LA Please contact MPEG LA for any further information MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 http www mpegla com About IJG Independent JPEG Group This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Character display software iType Th
289. or 4 3 When the CBKZ MD01 is installed DISP Di splays the reception level LVL of the wireless microphone DISP REC Displays the recording FORMAT format DISP CLIP Displays clip information NO PB DISP Displays the timecode TIMECODE a When an Anton Bauer battery system or a BP GL65 GL95 battery pack is installed the remaining battery power is shown as a percentage value according to the setting of this item INT When one of the above batteries is installed the remaining power is shown as a percentage value when there is a change in the value or when the power is low AUTO The remaining power is shown as a percentage value when one of the above batteries is installed Otherwise the voltage VOLT is displayed continuously VOLT The voltage VOLT is displayed continuously ALL PRESET or other functions as absolute values 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting ON OFF or value and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Change confirmation adjustment progress messages You can limit or suppress the messages that give details of setting changes and adjustment progress and results by setting a display mode The conditions under which messages are displayed and their correspondence with the display mode are as follows Y Message is displayed N Message is not displayed
290. our screens a disc with recorded clips must be loaded in the unit The GUI screens can display clip name titles and other information in European languages and Japanese but they cannot display Chinese Overview GUI screens are your gateways to discs and the data saved on discs Clip playback screen 2 Unlit THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK Unlit suBcuP DISC MENU Unlit Lit Clip list playback screen 9 THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK SUB CLIP DISC MENU Clip thumbnail screen Myw PA CORE TC 00 25 4t TC 00 23 00 25 a E TC 00 25 49 23 E YEN 00280600 TC00282202 rm 30 NOV 2005 13 38 0 0 Lit THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK Unlit DISC MENU Clip list thumbnail screen P Clip List E0001 TCoo002808 TC0D903535 700009816 TG 00 01 06 18 DArE amp TIME 28 JUL 2006 19 55 Lit THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK Lit SUB CLIP IMD suonejedo DISC MENU a The playback screens appear when the LCD monitor is switched to display of video with CHAR or without MOND superimposed text Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button to switch the LCD monitor to these modes see page 22 b The clip list playback screen appears when a clip list is loaded into the unit s memory see page 120 The other thumbnail screens are Expand thumbnail screen Cha
291. peaker Youcan select monaural or stereo on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu LINE AES EBU MIC selectors These select the audio source of the audio input signals input to the AUDIO IN CHI CH2 connectors LINE Line input audio equipment AES EBU AES EBU format audio signal MIC Microphone input When these switches are in the MIC position and the 48V OFF switch is set to 48V if you inadvertently connect any audio device other than a microphone to the AUDIO IN CHI CH2 connectors the device may be damaged 48V OFF switches Select either of the following positions for the microphones to be connected 48V For a microphone to use an external power supply OFF For a microphone to use an internal power supply Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls El REMOTE connector 8 pin Connect an RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit which makes it possible to control the camcorder remotely Before connecting disconnecting the Remote Control Unit to from the camcorder be sure to turn off the camcorder POWER switch E SDI OUT 1 connector BNC type Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal with embedded audio To switch between HDSDI and SDSDI output use the SDI OUT 1 SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu SDI OUT 2 connector BNC type Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal with embedded audio To switch between HDSDI and SDSDI output use the SDI OUT 2 SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPER
292. pears when HDSDI REMOTE I F in the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to CHARA and this unit is controlling recoding by an external device connected to the SDI OUT 1 2 connectors HDSDI output P 1 SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be set to HDSDI Electric color temperature filter Appears when the CC 5600K function is set to ON Filter Indicates the currently selected filter type see page 18 When the function that switches between electrical CC filters has been assigned to an ASSIGN switch see page 60 and when a remote control unit has been connected the electrical CC filter position A B C or D appears to the right side of the ND filter display 1 to 4 White balance memory Indicates the currently selected white balance automatic adjustment memory A Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A B Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B P Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST or when the preset button on an RM B150 has been pushed T Displayed when ATW is being used 3200 Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW 3200K function is set to ON Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 4300 Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW 4300K function is set to ON 5600 Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW 5600K function is set to ON 6300 Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW 6300K function is set to ON Timecode Indicate
293. peat step 2 as required Assign the electrical CC filter switching function ELECTRICAL CC to an ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch the COLOR TEMP button or the RET button on the lens see page 179 White balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is next adjusted There are two sets of white balance memories A and B and adjustments for each of the ND filters can be automatically stored in the memory corresponding to the setting A or B of the WHITE BAL switch The camcorder has four built in ND filters so a total of eight 4 x 2 adjustments can be stored However the memory contents are not linked to the ND filter settings in the following cases When the number of memories allocated to each of A and B is limited to one by setting the FILTER WHT MEM item on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu to OFF When the electrical CC filter switching function has been assigned to an ASSIGN switch or when a remote control unit has been connected In these cases the contents of white balance memory are linked to electrical CC filter positions to D If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B and on the WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION menu the WHITE SWITCH B item is set to ATW the ATW function is activated to automatically adjust the white balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting conditions If a memory error occurs If the error message STORED DATA NG
294. perations See Selecting thumbnails page 105 for more information Using the expand function to find scenes The expand function allows you to divide a selected clip into equally sized blocks and to display thumbnails of the first frame in each block This is a quick and efficient way to review the selected clip and search for target scenes You can specify 12 144 or 1728 divisions The maximum number of blocks may be other than 1728 when the recorded duration of the clip is short In this case the frame interval of expanded thumbnails is fixed at 1 frame This allows you to view expanded thumbnails at equal intervals See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip that contains the scene you want to find 2 Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button The selected clip is divided into 12 blocks and a list appears in the expand thumbnail screen see page 99 with the first frame of each block displayed as a thumbnail 3 Select the thumbnail that you want to expand further 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 up to 2 times as required Thumbnails cannot be further expanded when they already have the minimum duration 1 frame To return to the previous expansion level Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button with the SHIFT button held down To display the expand thumbnail screen of the previous or next clip With the expand thumbnail screen still
295. perations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select DISPLAY MODE and press the MENU knob Select the desired type of file information and press the MENU knob Display type Description ALL File ID 10 characters and date year month day EID File ID 16 characters DATE Date saved year month day hours minutes seconds MODEL Information on the model Loading saved data from a Memory Stick The data loaded from the Memory Stick overwrites the data saved in the camcorder How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select USER FILE LOAD and press the MENU knob The USER LOAD page appears Turn MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears then press the MENU knob 4 Select the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message LOAD OK YES NO appears 5 To carry out the load select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO The access indicator lights When the load is completed the message COMPLETE appears and the access indicator goes off If data cannot be loaded If one of the following error messages appears during or after the load operation then the data was no
296. play only DELAYED Appears when FOCUS MAG is set to ENABLE In this state the phase of HD Y output from this unit does not match the phase of the GENLOCK IN signal When multiple PDW 700 units are daisy chained via this unit see page 71 inter system phases do not match Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 1 2 139 pue s ejds q 9 4 2 140 PAINT menu No Page Item Settings Description 01 SWSTATUS GAMMA OFF ON Turns the gamma correction on or off BLACK GAMMA OFF ON Turns the black gamma correction on or off MATRIX OFF ON Turns the linear matrix correction and user set matrix correction functions on or off KNEE OFF ON Turns the knee correction on or off WHITE CLIP OFF ON Turns the white clipping correction on or off DETAIL OFF ON Turns the detail signal on or off APERTURE OFF ON Turns the aperture function on or off FLARE OFF ON Turns the flare function on or off TEST SAW OFF ON Selects the test signal 02 WHITE COLOR TEMP A Displays reference color Sets the color temperature of temperature WHITE A C TEMP BAL A 99 to 99 Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN A 99 to 99 Only the value of R GAIN is changed B GAIN A 99 to 99 Only the value of B GAIN is
297. play the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Lock Unlock Clip A message appears asking you to confirm the unlocking Unlock Clip C0004 Unlock this Clip 4 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob In step 1 you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down To unlock all clips 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Lock or Delete All Clips and then select Unlock Clips A message appears asking you to confirm that you want to unlock all clips 3 Select OK to execute the unlock or Cancel to cancel it and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Deleting clips You can delete clips while checking their contents e Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position Locked clips cannot be deleted e If a deletion target clips is referenced by clip lists on the disc all of those clip lists are deleted as well Ifa deletion target clip is referenced in the current clip list only those referencing sub clips are deleted at the same time as the deletion target clip See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 In the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to delete 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Delete Clip A window appears asking you to confirm the deletion The window displays thumbnails of four frames
298. pointer used in Speed the software keyboard screen from among the following 5 Fast 4 3 Middle 2 1 Slow Select USB Keyboard Selects the language of the USB keyboard used in the Language software keyboard screen To display the Disc Menu To display the Disc Menu press the SUB CLIP DISC MENU button with the SHIFT button held down in one of the following screens Clip thumbnail screen Clip list thumbnail screen Clip playback screen Clip list playback screen To return to the original screen press the RESET RETURN button RESET RETURN button DISPSEL HOLD RESET DISPLAY BRIGHT EXPAND CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U BIT QOO e aca 20 eco V eG Q 19 SHIFT button SUB CLIP DISC MENU button Clip list thumbnail screen 002 013 pom TC 00 00 12 04 TC 00 00 46 08 a ram TC00 0059 6 TC 00 01 06 18 TC 00 01 13 11 TC 00 01 17 27 paTEaTIME 28 JUL 2006 19 55 00 01 31 16 Clip List E0001 TC 00 00 53 22 TC 00 00 28 08 TC 00 00 35 15 Disc Menu Save Clip List Save Clip List as Delete Clip List Clear Clip List Load Planning Metadata Select Drive Planning Metadata Properties r Planning Metadata Overview GUI screen operations MENU knob DISPSEL HOLD RESET O CHAPTER RETUI o THMBw Up down arrow buttons SET S SEL button To s
299. press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The timecode of the new In point appears in the timecode display and the Total total duration and DUR clip duration displays are updated Scene Selection Clip List Editing 7 8 When you find the point that you want to make the end point select OUT and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The timecode of the new Out point appears in the timecode display and the Total total duration and DUR clip duration displays are updated To cue up the In point or Out point Display the Thumbnail Menu select Cue up Inpoint or Cue up Outpoint and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To cancel the In point or Out point setting Display the Thumbnail Menu select Reset Inpoint or Reset Outpoint and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The In point or Out point setting returns to the previous value Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required Save the clip list see page 119 To delete sub clips See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Select the clips to delete in the clip list thumbnail screen multiple selections possible Display the Thumbnail Menu Select Delete Sub Clips and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A message appears asking you to confirm the deletion Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button
300. pter thumbnail screen Essence mark thumbnail screen Information and controls in thumbnail screens Clip thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of clips on the disc in the order that they were recorded You can Overview 97 MH suonejedo 1 1 2 98 use this screen to work with clips deleting or locking them selecting their index pictures adding them to clip lists and so on Clip name Displays the name of the selected clip When the clip has a title it is displayed as TITLE00001 see page 88 Clip names can be displayed in European languages when the area of use see page 41 is set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA To display the clip title Settings gt Display Title in the Disc Menu needs to be set to On Selection frame Indicates that the thumbnail is selected To select another thumbnail move the frame see page 105 Multiple selection frames appear when multiple thumbnails are selected see page 105 Clip number total number of clips Displays the total number of clips on the disc and the number of the selected clip E Scrollbar When not all of the thumbnails can be displayed in the thumbnail display area the position of the slider shows the relative position of the currently displayed clips and the length of the slider shows the relative length of currently displayed clips within all of the clips When you have a large number of th
301. r pictures of back lit subjects or to prevent blown out highlights The reference value for the lens iris can be set within the following range with respect to the standard value 0 25 to 1 increasing by increments of 0 25 About 0 25 to 1 stop further open e 0 25 to 1 decreasing by increments of 0 25 About 0 25 to 1 stop further close Also you can set the area where light detection Occurs To change the reference value How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the AUTO IRIS page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 0160AUTO IRIS OUERRIDE x SPEED HIGH LIGHT WINDOW WINDOW IND YAR WIDTH YAR HEIGHT VAR H POS VAR V POS 5 5 S S S S S S 2 Check that the mark is at the IRIS OVERRIDE position and then press the MENU knob on the left of the selected item changes to and on the left of the setting changes to 2 Turn MENU knob until ON appears then press the MENU knob on the left of the selected item changes to and on the left of the setting changes to e The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to ON Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the screen Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not ECS The
302. r Supply on page 36 For information about attaching a synthesized tuner see Attaching a UHF portable tuner for a UHF wireless microphone system on page 47 For your safety and to ensure proper operation of the camcorder Sony recommends the use of the following battery packs BP GL95 BP GL65 BP L60S and BP L80S Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Accessory attachments Shoulder strap fitting Attach the supplied shoulder strap see page 51 Light fitting shoe Attach an optional accessory such as a video light see page 51 Viewfinder front to back positioning lever To adjust the viewfinder position in the front to back direction loosen this lever and the LOCK knob After adjustment retighten this lever and the LOCK knob Viewfinder left to right positioning ring Loosen this ring to adjust the left to right position of the viewfinder see page 38 Viewfinder fitting shoe Attach an optional viewfinder g viewfinder connector 20 Connect an optional viewfinder Consult a Sony representative for information about available viewfinders Lens mount securing rubber After locking the lens in position using the lens locking lever fit this rubber over the lower of the two projections This fixes the lens mount preventing it from coming loose E Viewfinder front to back positioning knob LOCK knob Loosen this knob to adjust the front to back position of the
303. r text Connect the Japanese keyboard if the area of use has been set to NTSC J AREA Connect a European language keyboard if the area of use has been set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA 1 Some USB keyboards or USB mice may not be used In this case the message Unknown USB appears To change the keyboard language In the Disc Menu select Settings Select USB Keyboard Language and then select the desired keyboard from among the following English United Kingdom English United States French France German Germany Italian Italy Polish Programmers Poland Russian Russia Spanish Spain See List of Supported USB Keyboards page 232 for the characters that can be entered on the various language keyboards The keyboard language cannot be changed when the area of use is set to NTSC J AREA The keyboard icon on the software keyboard is highlighted when a USB keyboard has been recognized and enabled for use with this unit and the mouse icon is highlighted and a mouse pointer appears when a USB mouse has been enabled SetTitle of Clip 001 041 zt qwe 45 rt CapsLock a d f 2 X cv Engish USA Use the proper keyboard for the area of use Some characters may not be entered correctly if you use a keyboard designed for use in another area It is not possible to enter Japanese even on a Japanese keyboard USB keyboard special functions keys In addition to the spec
304. rators of other camcorders VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder Connections for timecode synchronization Connect both the reference video signal and the external timecode as illustrated below Example 1 Synchronizing with an external timecode Reference video signal GENLOCK IN 9 O TC IN a Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu if GENLOCK is set to OFF Example 2 Interconnecting a number of camcorders or timecode synchronization pipi To another camcorder to be synchronized TEST OUT OUT OTCIN GENLOCK IN Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu if GENLOCK is set to OFF To lock the timecode to an external source 1 Turnon the POWER switch 2 Setthe PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN Set the DISPLAY switch to TC 5 Supply a timecode signal and a reference video signal complying with the SMPTE standard and in proper phase relationship to the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN connector respectively Setting the Time Data Bunoous 104 suyas pue sjueunsn py e 71 Bunooys 104 86 pue sjuewjsnipy e Ja deyo 72 This operation synchronizes the internal timecode generator with the external timecode After about 10 seconds you can disconnect the ex
305. red to use Unicode characters other than ASCII characters Command prompt FTP commands do not support UTF 8 When the first letter of the title setting on the CLIP AUTO TITLING menu is a space or period the clip name is the title string minus the first letter To use clip names and clip list names by FAM and FTP Carry out steps 2 to 4 of To assign clip names on this unit page 92 It is now possible to write transfer and rename clips and clip lists with user defined names over file access mode FAM connections see page 200 and FTP connections see page 204 User defined clip names can be used by FAM and FTP Sakura SMI User defined clip list names can be used by FAM and FTP To set clip names by using planning metadata Planning metadata is a file that contains metadata about the clips to be shot and recorded The following two types of clip name strings can be written in a planning metadata file The ASCII format name that appears in the viewfinder P The UTF 8 format name that is actually registered as the clip name 2 1 It is also possible to display the UTF 8 format name or no name see page 124 2 When no UTF 8 format name string is specified the ASCII format name string is registered as the actual clip name By loading a file from one of the following locations into the unit s memory before starting to shoot you can register the names in the file as clip names To load file
306. remaining characters 5 When the input is complete turn the MENU knob to move the W mark over END then press the MENU knob This ends the input and returns to the original SHOT ID page To insert a space In step above move the mark over INS and press the MENU knob To cancel inserting a space move the mark over RET then press the MENU knob To delete a character In step 3 of Setting the shot ID page 176 move the mark over DEL and press the MENU knob This deletes the character under the Bl mark in the shot ID row To cancel deleting the character move the mark over RET and press the MENU knob To cancel changing shot ID Before executing step 5 of Setting the shot ID page 176 move the mark over ESC then press the MENU knob or flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to ESCAPE Displaying the status confirmation screens You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on the LCDs by displaying the following four screen ABNORMAL screen This window allows you to confirm why the warning indicator lights in the viewfinder You can use the LED page of the OPERATION menu to set whether or not the warning indicator lights SYSTEM screen This screen displays information such as the system frequency the recording format whether output from the TEST OUT connector is on or off and the type of output signal FUNCTION screen This screen displays th
307. ressing the COLOR TEMP button The color temperature to which the white balance is set when the COLOR TEMP button is pressed can be selected from among 3200K 4300K 5600K and 6300K on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu You can also assign color temperatures to the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switches and the RET button on the lens For details of automatic white balance adjustment see page 57 To change the color temperature when the ND filter is switched You can assign electrical CC color correction filters to ND filters see page 18 This allows you Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 59 104 sBunjes pue sjuewjsnipy e Ja deyo 60 to change the color temperature automatically when the ND filter is switched 1 Display the WHITE FILTER page of the MAINTENANCE menu M1S5OUHITE FILTER ND FILTER CTEMP ND FLT CTEMP 1 ND FLT CTEMP 2 4 ELECTRICAL CC lt A gt ELECTRICAL CC B ELECTRICAL CC C ELECTRICAL CC lt D gt For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select ND FILTER CTEMP and turn the MENU knob to display ON 3 To assign an electrical CC filter to FILTER selector position number 1 select ND FLT CTEMP lt 1 gt To assign it to positions 2 to 4 select ND FLT CTEMP 2 4 Turn the MENU knob to display the desired color temperature As you turn the MENU knob the color temperature changes as follows 3200K
308. ressive image sensors with 2 2 million pixels for full HD resolution 1920 x 1080 Newly developed PowerHAD FX CCDs featuring a signal processing ASIC with 14 bit A D converters These new image sensor technologies enable the capture of very high quality images with F11 59 941 and F12 501 sensitivity and an SN ratio of 59 dB P 1 With noise suppression on off value is 54 dB Noise suppression uses proprietary Sony signal processing technology to suppress noise in high frequency regions Mechanisms for high reliability A new duct cooling system prevents overheating inside the unit and on its surfaces for greater reliability in high temperature environments Reliability is also enhanced by the drip proof design Recording can continue even when the unit is subjected to jarring shocks because data is stored in shockproof memory before being recorded to the media Reliable recording is ensured by a recording verification function similar to the confidence playback function of tape recorders qualifying the unit for use in demanding broadcast applications Multi format support The unit supports six system frequencies 1080 59 941 1080 29 97p 1080 50i 1080 25p 720 59 94p and 720 50p offering the flexibility needed for worldwide HD recording The optional CBKZ MD01 SD Record and Playback Software 2 can be installed to enable recording and playback of SD signals both NTSC and PAL allowing
309. rial To use the image search function at Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls approximately four times normal playback speed press the F REV button or F FWD button during playback At this time the PLAY indicator and F REV or F FWD indicator light F FWD fast forward button and indicator This plays back at high speed in the forward direction The indicator lights during high speed playback in the forward direction PREV button This jumps to the first frame of the current clip During the jump the F REV indicator flashes If you press this together with the F REV button the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded clip on the disc STOP button Press this button to stop disc playback NEXT button This jumps to the first frame of the next clip During the jump the F FWD indicator flashes If you press this together with the F FWD button the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded clip on the disc DISP SEL display selection EXPAND expand function button With each press of this button the display in the LCD monitor changes as follows Display indication Meaning Video with The LCD monitor displays superimposed the same text information information CHAR as the viewfinder Video without The video only appears superimposed information MONI Status display Counter indications STATUS warnings audio levels and similar information appear No video image appears
310. rs can be used for the title See To edit clip information page 110 for information about operations Using planning metadata Planning metadata is a file that contains metadata about the clips to be shot and recorded To use planning metadata you will need to save a file in advance in the specified location of a media and insert the media into this unit For details see To set clip names by using planning metadata page 93 To load planning metadata files See page 104 for more information about GUI screen operations 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Load Planning Metadata Select Drive and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A media selection screen appears Disc Menu Load Planning Metadata Select Drive Return to Upper Menu 4 D Professional lt gt USB Flash D 3 Select the media where your planning metadata file is stored and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A list of the planning metadata files stored on the media appears Disc Menu Planning Metadata 22 Professional Disc 04 AUG 10 39 Name amp Date Sorted by Name 4 Select the desired planning metadata file and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The selected planning metadata file is loaded into the unit s memory and the Planning Metadata Properties screen appears D Check the information that appears and press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To
311. rstrahlung F r Kunden in Europa Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE Kennzeichnung und erf llt die EMV Richtlinie der EG Kommission Angewandte Normen EN55103 1 Elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit St raussendung EN55103 2 Elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit St rfestigkeit F r die folgenden elektromagnetischen Umgebungen E1 Wohnbereich E2 kommerzieller und in beschr nktem MaBe industrieller Bereich E3 Stadtbereich im Freien und E4 kontrollierter EMV Bereich z B Fernsehstudio Der Hersteller dieses Produkts ist Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku Tokyo Japan Der autorisierte Reprasentant f r EMV und Produktsicherheit ist Sony Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70327 Stuttgart Deutschland Bei jeglichen Angelegenheiten in Bezug auf Kundendienst oder Garantie wenden Sie sich bitte an die in den separaten Kundendienst oder Garantiedokumenten aufgef hrten Anschriften Table of Contents Foreword Before e teta nin oreet ees e pe RE ead 12 Using the CD ROM manual eere 12 Chapter 1 Overview jo 13 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls ee 15 50 eie eher Accessory attachments Operating and connectors section sessseeeneeerene 18 HDVF 20A viewfinder optional eese 31 Status display on the viewfinder screen
312. rt a disc that Handling Discs was not recorded normally The XXXX in the message is a code for XDCAM devices that can salvage the disc Refer to the table below and use one of the indicated devices to salvage the disc SALVAGE DISC CANNOT BE RECORDED FORMAT DISC OR CONTACT SERUICE TO RUN CLIP SALVAGE PROGRAM PUSH ESCAPE SWITCH OR ROTARY ENCODER Code XXXX Model name 0002 PDW 1500 530 510 R1 PDW F70 F350 F330 0200 PDW F75 F355 F335 0300 9 PDW HD1500 700 a Does not appear on this unit To cancel the message and return to normal operation exchange the disc for a usable disc and flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch to the ESCAPE side or press the MENU knob Basic Procedure for Shooting This section describes the basic procedures for shooting and recording Before a shooting session ensure that the camcorder is functioning properly For details see Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting on page 210 Basic procedure for shooting from power supply to disc loading 2 3 1 Attach a fully charged battery pack For details see Preparing a Power Supply on page 36 Set the POWER switch to ON Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button to switch the LCD monitor to status display and check that the following conditions are met The HUMID indicator is not showing If it is wait until it disappears The battery status indicator shows at least five segments
313. ry A gt mark appears before the date of creation or modification when a disc is write inhibited You can create clip lists when the disc is write inhibited but you cannot save them Total duration Displays the total duration of all sub clips in the clip list Expand thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of equally sized divisions of the selected clip map 00019800 B8 4 TC00013711 7 00 01 37 24 TC00 01 38 06 TC 00 01 38 22 Selection frame See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 97 Clip number total clips x number of divisions Displays the number of the selected clip the total number of clips on the disc and the number of times that the selected clip has been divided to display the expansion thumbnails Overview su 199 ND ul 1e1deu 99 MH suonejedo 1 1 2 100 Thumbnail number total thumbnails Displays the total number of expanded thumbnails and the number of the selected thumbnail E Scrollbar See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 97 Clip name Displays the name of the expanded clip When the clip has a title it is displayed as TITLE00001 see page 88 Clip names can be displayed in European languages when the area of use see page 41 is set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA To display the clip title Settings gt Displ
314. s eee RR eie e edere ne etn 124 jne 125 Table of Contents Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Menu Organization eee TOP menu and top level menus j OPERA TION iare tee etes dete EA ei eee ve eO E de PAINT menu MAINTENANCE menu TIAA STA c n Sees Ceteri eter m Io A DIAGNOSIS roh e P eee o eere tee eo de ERR Menu Operations eee eese eee esee ee tenente tn enata tatnen stata tasa enata en en etna sno Displaying menus nennen ettet en eee iere nn Basic menu operations essent terne Using the USER menu example menu operation 167 Editing the USER menu eere 168 Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings 171 Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD jU 172 Selecting the display items 172 Change confirmation adjustment progress messages 173 Setting the marker display sse 174 Setting the viewfindet 5 eec eas nennen 175 Recording shot data superimposed on the color bars 175 Setting th shot ID horaire treo eres euet dete eh nea 176 Displaying the status confirmation 177 Adjustments and Settings From Menus cerent ennt 178 Setting gain v
315. s 4 flashes second and the message AUTO INTERVAL M S flashes on the viewfinder screen When the camcorder is capturing the picture in memory the REC recording red tally indicator in the viewfinder lights After the length of time for recording on the disc REC TIME has elapsed the camcorder automatically stops recording To interrupt shooting Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens Disc access may occur for recording picture data already stored in memory To continue shooting Press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens again To exit Auto Interval Rec mode Do either of the following Set the POWER switch to OFF Set CACHE INTVAL REC to OFF on the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu Time required for shooting and time required for recording on the disc Auto Interval Rec mode is effective for shooting objects that move very slowly To use this function you need to set the total time for shooting TAKE TOTAL TIME and the length of time for recording on the disc REC TIME The time required for shooting is the time required to capture the very slowly moving subject and the camcorder must be arranged so that during this time the subject is always in the frame The disc recording time indicates the running time of the completed recording The camcorder calculates the time lapse interval from these two times Advanced Operations for Shooting y
316. s use a GUI screen see page 122 File creation rules File location File name Professional Disc Format that can be used in General Sony the General directory see Planning page 199 directory a Extension XML USB Flash drive ASCII characters up to General Sony 63 characters including the extension Extension XML Planning directory a The General Sony Planning directory is generated automatically when you format a disc Clip name string format In a text editor modify the two fields in the Title tag that contain the clip name strings the shaded fields in the example below Entera name in the first field in ASCII format up to 52 characters and enter another name in the second field in UTF 8 format up to 52 bytes Clip name string example lt xml pversion 1 0 pencoding UTF 8 gt lt Plannin gMetadata xmIns http xmins sony net pro metadata plannin gmetadata assignId P0001 creationDate 2008 01 20T17 00 00 09 00 lastUpdate 2008 03 28T10 30 00 09 00 load false version 1 00 gt 4 Properties propertyId assignment update 2008 01 20T09 00 00 09 00 modifiedBy Chris gt 4 lt Title usAscii Typhoon xml lang en gt Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo lt Title e Properties PlanningMetadata In the above example sp indicates a space and 4 indicates a carriage return When creating a file write each line as a single stateme
317. s assigned in the Assign menu Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2 slide type switch Function Content OFF Assigns no function FRONT MIC Assigns the function that switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected PICTURE Assigns execution of CACHE recording in picture cache mode SUPER Assigns a mixing switch VFDISP amp M function that selects mixing or ENU no mixing of superimposed viewfinder and menu text data into the video signals output from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT connector when SDI OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu are set to ON MARKER Assigns the function that displays or hides all markers REC VIDEO Switches the recording target SOURCE video between the video shot by the camera and the video input from an external device VBS or SD SDI HD SDI ZEBRA Assigns the zebra pattern display function FREEZE MIX Assigns the function that mixes a still picture monochrome and camera video color effective for framing shots DIGITAL Assigns the function that EXTENDER 9 electronically magnifies the central part of the picture video output is magnified including recorded video UADI to UA10 Assigns the items assigned in the ASSIGN SEL menu Adjustments and Settings From Menus sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 JajdeyD 181
318. s registered with each organization locally It is usually not centrally registered When the country code is less than 4 bytes enter the country code from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter the space character 20h in the remaining strings This user code is determined by the organization The methods used depend on the organization User code cannot be entered when no organization code has been entered TIME ZONE Set the time difference from UTC The UTC is calculated based on the local time using the time zone If the time zone is not set the UTC is not recorded correctly When you change the time zone adjust the internal clock to local time and turn the power of the camcorder off and then the power on again Adjustments and Settings From Menus sBumes pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 1 2 185 geq 1es pue 2 186 chapter A Handling the Memory Stick The Memory Stick can be inserted to or removed from the camcorder with the power turned on or off Memory Sticks usable with this camcorder With this camcorder you can use a Sony Memory Stick Memory Stick Duo Memory Stick PRO whose capacity does not exceed 4 GB and Memory Stick PRO Duo For details see About a Memory Stick on page 235 Inserting a Memory Stick 1 Open the cover of the menu operating section 2 Hold the Memory Stick with t
319. s the elapsed recording playback time timecode user bits or other information selected by the DISPLAY switch see page 23 Gain value Indicates the gain value in dB of the video amplifier as set by the GAIN selector Shutter speed Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode However if SHUTTER selector see page 18 is set to OFF nothing is displayed For details of the displayed shutter speed see Setting the Electronic Shutter on page 61 Operation alarm message display area For details see Operation alarm messages on page 219 Audio level Indicates the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2 The peak indication of the VDR level meter is related as follows to the audio level 80000 20 12 EH EH HH HH 52 dB Audio channel 1 level indicator Audio channel 2 level indicator VDR level meter indicator The segment colors change from gray to white at or above the AU REF LEVEL set on the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu This setting does not affect the relationship between the number of lit segments and the audio levels The example in the above figure shows the colors when AU REF LEVEL is set to 20 dB Remaining disc capacity Indicates the remaining recording time in minutes of the disc Examples of remaining recording time indication Indication Remaining recording time 110 lt 120 to
320. selector is used with the menu item for filter selection display set to ON see page 173 the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds You can change a MAINTENANCE menu setting so that different white balance settings can be stored for different FILTER selector positions This allows you to automatically obtain optimum white balance for the current shooting conditions in linkage with the filter selection For details see Adjusting the white balance on page 57 MENU knob Changes the page selection or a setting within the menu For details about how to use the MENU knob see Menu Operations on page 164 EARPHONE jack monaural minijack You can monitor the E E sound during recording and playback sound during playback When an alarm is indicated you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone You can use this with the EARPHONE jack on the rear of the unit at the same time Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built in speaker 1 E E Abbreviation of Electric to Electric In mode video and audio signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal electric circuits only This can be used to check input signals J AUTO W B BAL automatic white black balance adjustment switch Activates the automatic white black balance adjustment functions WHT Adjusts the white balance automatically If the WHITE BAL switch see page 20 is
321. ser bits of an external timecode Turns the automatic time correction function of the internal clock on or off UBIT GROUP ID 000 101 Selects the U BIT GROUP ID INS LINE 1 NTSC 12Hto Selects the line into which VITC is to be inserted When the CBKZ 16H to 19H MDO is installed PAL 9H to 19H to 22H VITC INS LINE 2 NTSC 12H to When the CBKZ 18H to 19H MDO is installed PAL 9H to 21H to 22H 11 ESSENCE RET SHOT OFF ON For details see Recording essence marks on MARK MARK I page 81 RET SHOT OFF ON MARK 2 INDEX PIC POS OSEC to 10SEC in 1 sec steps For details see Setting the thumbnail image at recording time on page 82 Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq 9 1 2 153 pue s ejds q 9 4 2 154 Item Settings Description 12 CAM CONFIG 1 REC TALLY BLINK OFF ON Turns the tally illumination control on or off when the battery is almost exhausted or the disc is almost full REC START BEEP OFF ON Turns on or off the REC START STOP alarm sound SUB LCD MODE TIMER OFF SEL CONT Sets the timecode TC display after poweroff as follows TIMER The TC display turns off after the elapse of the time set by the SUB LCD TIMER below OFF Not displayed CONT Displayed SUB LCD TIMER 1H 3H 8H Sets the duration of time after which the TC display is to be turned off aft
322. set to A or B the white balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory If the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST the automatic white balance adjustment function does not operate BLK Adjusts the black set and black balance automatically MIC microphone LEVEL control Adjusts the input level of audio channels 1 2 3 and 4 For details see Adjusting the Audio Level on page 66 Right side near the front ESCAPE ASSIGN assignable 1 2 switches You can assign the desired functions to these switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu Nothing is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory equivalent to a selection of OFF in the menu For details see Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches on page 179 COLOR TEMP color temperature button Press to light the button and change the color temperature for shooting You can use this as an ASSIGN assignable switch see page 179 ALARM alarm tone volume adjustment knob M Q Je deuD Controls the volume of the warning tone that is output via the built in speaker or optional earphones When the knob is turned to the minimum position no sound can be heard However if the MIN ALARM VOL item on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to SET the alarm tone is audible even when this volume control is at the mi
323. signed to the ASSIGN 2 switch Video breakup may occur around the switch if you switch the input during recording Camera video is recorded if you switch to external input without inputting an external video signal to the SDI IN OPTION connector or the GENLOCK IN connector It is not possible to record external input video with a changed aspect ratio To record SDI signals with the CBK HD01 installed When the optional CBK HD01 HD SD SDI Input Board is installed in this unit you can record HD SDI or SD SDI signals input to the SDI IN OPTION connector When an HD recording format MPEG HD422 50 or MPEG HD420 HQ SP is selected SD SDI signals are upconverted to HD signals before recording Itis not possible to record HD SDI signals when an SD recording format MPEG IMX 50 40 30 or DVCAM is selected The system frequency and resolution HD SDI input only of input signals must match the current settings of this unit Otherwise the input signals cannot be recorded Only audio signals embedded in SDI signals are recorded regardless of the settings of the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switches 1 Display the SOURCE SEL page of the OPERATION menu 0265OSOURCE SEL TOP FRONT MIC SELECT STREO REC UIDEO SOURCE CAM EXT VIDEO SOURCE HDSDI AUTO 7 9 WIDE MODE EXT SETUP REMOVE For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select REC VIDEO SOURCE and turn the
324. sing a PC How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select M S FORMAT and press the MENU knob A confirmation screen appears Select YES and press the MENU knob Saving and Recalling User Files The camcorder is equipped with a Memory Stick slot which enables you to save the settings in the USER menu as a user file onto the Memory Stick You can load these files from the Memory Stick for immediate recall of a particular setting configuration In addition to user files you can save scene files reference files lens files and ALL files in a Memory Stick When a menu is displayed inserting a Memory Stick displays the appropriate file related menu page automatically Saving user menu data to the Memory Stick You can save USER menu settings held in the camcorder as user files in the Memory Stick You can save up to 100 user files in the Memory Stick Insert the Memory Stick then proceed as follows How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 FOI USER FILE TOP
325. ssecseesessessessessessese 226 10 Table of Contents ERREUR 226 Video camera section esses netten 226 Optical disc drive section essere 227 Supplied accessories ere or ere pieces 228 Recommended additional equipment sss 228 Chart of Optional Components and Accessories 230 Using PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software ceret 231 List of Supported USB Keyboards eere eerte ee eentntne 232 Trademarks and Licenses reser retener eene terne enn tntn ene raantn 234 MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License 234 MPEG 2 Video Patent Portfolio License we 234 About Independent JPEG Group see 234 Character display software iT ype sss 234 About a Memory Stick esee eene eese esten eta ena etae 235 237 Table of Contents 11 12 Foreword Before use After purchasing this unit before operating it is necessary to set the region of use Unless this setting is made the unit will not operate For details of these settings see Setting the Area of Use on page 41 Before attaching removing optional components or accessories to from the camcorder be sure to turn the
326. steps 1 and 2 described in the previous item to display the AUTO IRIS page Turn the MENU knob to move to IRIS WINDOW IND then press the MENU knob on the left of IRIS WINDOW IND changes to and on the left of the setting changes to Turn the MENU knob until appears then press the MENU knob changes to and changes to The currently selected auto iris window appears on the screen If it is not necessary to display the auto iris window on the screen set to OFF Turn the MENU knob to move to IRIS WINDOW then press the MENU knob changes to and changes to 5 Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris window appears then press the MENU knob 3 4 5 6 l SS Sea The shaded parts indicate the area where light detection changes to and changes to If you select VARIABLE the following items become effective and you can set the window of the desired size Set each item to the desired size Item Setting IRIS VAR WIDTH The width of the window IRIS VAR HEIGHT The height of the window IRIS VARH POS The position of the window in the horizontal direction IRIS VAR V POS The position of the window in the vertical direction B Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen
327. t 195 File operation restrictions seeseeeeeeeeeneetreeneen nennen 196 File Operations in File Access Mode for Windows 200 Making FAM connections eese 200 Operating on files oerte ete eee tie nn 201 Exiting file operations iere e ee tiet 201 File Operations in File Access Mode for Macintosh 202 Making FAM connections 202 retten ee ee ene en Exiting file operations FTP File Operations scscssssssscsssscsssscsssscsesessscssssssssesessessesessesseseses Making FTP connections Command list eene aeree ee ene Ren RR Recording Continuous Timecode With FAM and FTP Connections 209 Chapter 9 Maintenance Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting Preparations for testing a Testine th camera Jet tete tbe ree een Testing the VDR eese eost rer Cleaning the viewfinder esee Note about the battery terminal eere Operation Warnings ee eee eee eere rentes enata tosta tna tn sense esten enses sna suae Appendix Important Notes on Operation 4 eeeee eese eerte eene teens en eene tn enano 224 Specifications cccscsscsscscescescesccccsccscsscsscsscssessesscsse
328. t OK to delete the mark or Cancel to cancel the deletion and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To adjust the position of shot marks at chapter positions You can use the chapter thumbnail screen to adjust the position of shot marks Shot and Shot Mark2 at chapter positions The positions of Rec Start essence marks cannot be adjusted 1 m the chapter thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the shot mark whose position you want to adjust 2 Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Move Shot Mark The Move Shot Mark screen is displayed 0002 0002 Move Shot Mark ShotMark2 Ab TCR 00 28 23 14 You can perform playback and searches in this screen Use the PLAY PAUSE button or F REV F FWD buttons to display the frame you want You can also perform jog playback by turning the MENU knob 5 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To display the chapter thumbnail screen of the previous or next clip with chapters With the chapter thumbnail screen still active press the PREV button or the NEXT button The unit searches in the reverse or forward direction for the next clip with chapters beginning with the previous or next clip Using essence marks to find scenes See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1m the clip playback screen or the clip thumbnail screen press the Thumbnail Operations su 199 MD ul
329. t frame as the index picture Sar Set Index Picture 00 01 38 00 Cancel 4 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob After pressing the RESET RETURN button to return to the clip thumbnail screen check to make sure that the newly selected frame is displayed as the index picture Checking clip properties You can check clip properties such as the title timecode duration date and time of creation and date and time of the more recent modification See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip thumbnail screen 2 Select Clip Properties The Clip Properties screen appears Thumbnail Operations su 199 ND ul Je deup 109 MH suonejedo 1 1 2 110 Clip Properties Clip No 001 035 T l visionLCD Title Capping Literally years of spe R troprpjecteurs BRAVIA 00 25 04 9 22 30 NOV 2005 13 35 00 00 20 MAY 2006 15 02 00 00 Rec Device PDW 700 SN 10001 Horizontal Scroll 4 Created Modified Clip No Clip number total number of clips Name Clip Title Title Title2 Title 2 P TC Timecode of first frame DUR Recording time Created Date and time of creation Modified Date and time of most recent modification Rec Device Name of device that created clip product number 1 Titles can be displayed in
330. t loaded Saving and Recalling User Files geq pue 7 189 geq 1es pue 2 190 Error Cause Action message NO No Memory Insert or reinsert MEMORY Stick is the Memory STICK inserted Stick flashing MEMORY Circuit or Recheck and STICK Memory Stick consult a Sony ERROR fault service flashing representative FILE The Memory Data saved to a ERROR Stick contains Memory Stick flashing data that cannot using a be loaded into camcorder this camcorder whose model is not the same as this camcorder cannot be loaded into this camcorder Returning the user file settings to the standard settings How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select USER PRESET and press the MENU knob Saving and Loading Scene Files Saving and Loading Scene Files You can save various settings for shooting a particular scene as a scene file By loading the scene file you can quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files in a Memory Stick You can also load data from the Memory Stick i
331. tail function The following items depend on the selected type of the color detail function SKIN DETAIL OFF ON Turns the color detail function on or off for the type selected in the above item SKIN DETAIL LVL 99 to 99 Sets the level of the color detail signal SKIN DTL SAT 99 to 99 Adjusts the saturation level of the hue possessed by the color detail function SKIN DTL 0 to 359 Adjusts the center phase of the hue possessed by the color detail function SKIN DTL WIDTH 0 to 39 to 359 Adjusts the width of the hue possessed by the color detail function 11 MTX LINEAR MATRIX OFF ON Turns the linear matrix correction and user set matrix correction functions on or off MATRIX USER OFF ON Turns the user set matrix correction function on or off MATRIX PRESET OFF ON Turns the preset matrix correction function on or off MATRIX PRST SEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 Selects the preset matrix correction function MATRIX USER R G 99 to 99 Sets the arbitrary R G user se matrix coefficients MATRIX USER R B 99 to 99 Sets the arbitrary R B user se matrix coefficients MATRIX USER G R 99 to 99 Sets the arbitrary G R user se matrix coefficients MATRIX USER G B 99 to 99 Sets the arbitrary G B user se matrix coefficients MATRIX USER B R 99 to 99 Sets the arbitrary B R user se matri
332. tails on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 DO20T IME DATE 2 ADJUST 2 Press the MENU knob The TIME ADJUST setting window appears HOUR Sets the hour value MIN Sets the minutes value SEC Sets the seconds value YEAR Sets the year MONTH Sets the month DAY Sets the day Turn the MENU knob to move to the item you want to set and press the MENU knob on the left of the selected item changes to and on the left of the setting changes to 2 Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value and press the MENU knob changes to and changes to 5 To continue the remaining settings repeat steps 3 and 4 6 When you finish settings turn the MENU knob to move to OK then press the MENU knob The internal clock is set with the date and time set in steps 3 to 5 The TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears again The time set on the TIME ADJUST setting window is displayed To cancel the setting Before executing step 6 move to ESC at the top right of the window and press the MENU knob Alternatively flick the CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side settings or changes are discarded and the TIME DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears Mounting the Lens First power off the camcorder and then mount the lens using the following procedure For information about using the lens refer to the operation manual
333. tched on While recording in Manual Interval Rec mode the TALLY green tally indicator in the viewfinder flashes 2 or 4 flashes second and the message MANU INTERVAL SEC FRAME flashes on the viewfinder screen To exit Manual Interval Rec mode Do one of the following In the single shot mode press the EJECT button Inthe consecutive mode press the REC START button or the lens VTR button to stop recording Set the POWER switch to OFF After the camcorder has exited from Manual Interval Rec mode it records picture data stored in memory to the disc To exchange discs while record ing Disc Exchange Cache func tion Even if you run out of free disc capacity while recording you can continue recording by using the Disc Exchange Cache function This function enables seamless recording over extended recording sessions too long to fit on one disc by recording to the unit s internal memory while you exchange the disc The unit s internal memory is not unlimited so the video and audio may be interrupted if it takes too long to exchange the disc To enable the Disc Exchange Cache function 1 Display the REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select DISC EXCHG CACHE and turn the MENU knob to display ON The TALLY green tally indicator lights in the viewfinder To exchange discs with the function enabled
334. technology designed for use only with equipment compatible with Memory Stick PRO Available types of Memory Stick With this camcorder you can use a Sony Memory Stick Memory Stick Duo Memory Stick PRO whose capacity does not exceed 4 GB and Memory Stick PRO Duo Note on data read write speed Data read write speed may vary depending on the combination of the Memory Stick and Memory Stick compliant product you use What is MagicGate MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses encryption technology xipueddy Before using a Memory Stick Terminal Write protect tab Labeling position When you set the Memory Stick write protect tab to LOCK data cannot be recorded edited or erased Memory Stick Duo and Memory Stick PRO Duo do not have this function Data may be damaged if You remove the Memory Stick or turn off the unit while it is reading or writing data You use the Memory Stick in a location subject to the effects of static electricity or electric noise Werecommend that you make a backup copy of important data that you record on the Memory Stick Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to the Memory Stick labeling position Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the labeling position Carry and store the Memory Stick in its case Do not touch the connector
335. tecting clips In a clip thumbnail screen you can lock the selected clips so that they cannot be deleted or altered Locking prevents the following operations on clips Deletion Renaming by FTP Changing the index picture Adding and deleting shot marks Setting and clearing clip flags Locked clips are deleted along with other clips when a disc is formatted Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position To lock clips See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnails of the clips that you want to lock Display the Thumbnail Menu 3 Select Lock Unlock Clip Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob A lock icon see page 99 appears on the thumbnail of the locked clips In step 1 you can also perform a shortcut operation by pressing the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down To lock all clips 1 Display the Disc Menu 2 Select Lock or Delete Clips and then select Lock All Clips A message appears asking you to confirm locking all clips Select OK to lock all clips or Cancel to cancel it and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob To unlock a specific clip See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to unlock 2 Dis
336. ternal timecode without losing the synchronization However there will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or disconnect the timecode signal during recording When you finish the above procedure the internal timecode is immediately synchronized with the external timecode and the counter display will show the value of the external timecode However wait for afew seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before recording If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the same as the system frequency of the camcorder the camera cannot be correctly genlocked In such a case the internal timecode is not correctly synchronized with the external timecode When the GENLOCK ON OFF item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu the timecode cannot be synchronized with the reference video signal In this case set the GENLOCK item to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu User bit settings during timecode synchronization When the timecode is synchronized only the time data is synchronized with the external timecode value Therefore each camcorder can have its own user bit settings You can lock the users bits of this camcorder to the user bits of external timecode by setting EXT LK UBIT in the TIMECODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu to EXT To release the timecode synchronization First disconnect the external timecode then set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to R RUN To change the power s
337. the MENU knob or press the left or right arrow button The current position moves by an amount equal to 1 10 of the total number of thumbnails Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob at the new position The thumbnail at the position indicated in the small popup window appears in a thumbnail screen like the following P Expand 007 235 1 a 1 DUR 0 00 00 00 0 DUR 0 00 0 7 0 00 DUR 0 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 DUR 0 00 00 01 Seashore DUR 0 00 00 01 1 Expand thumbnail screen To select multiple thumbnails Move the selection frame to the first thumbnail that you want to select Then with the SHIFT button held down Turn the MENU knob or press the right arrow button To cancel the multiple selection move the selection frame without the SHIFT button held down Clip Navigating sibling relati bate TC 0028 1923 TC 00 Em E 00 304013 00 09 43 1 1600243427 25 DATETIME 30 2005 14 14 pun 0 23 22 26 TC 0024 46 22 Searching with thumbnails By using the thumbnails that appear in the various thumbnail screens you can easily cue up and play clips and sub clips Using thumbnails to find clips The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails of all clips recorded on the disc You can use this screen to cue up the selected clip and to carry out playback see page 108 Thumbnail O
338. the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen The window consists of four pages which are switched each time the switch is pushed upward Each page is displayed for about 10 seconds OFF To clear the page immediately after display push this switch down to the OFF position You can select the pages to be displayed on the menu For details see Displaying the status confirmation screens on page 177 MENU ON OFF switch To use this switch open the cover This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen Closing the cover automatically sets this switch to OFF ON Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen OFF Removes the menu from the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen CANCEL PRST preset ESCAPE switch To enable this switch set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF CANCEL PRST Flicking this switch up to this position displays the message to confirm whether the previous settings are cancelled or settings are reset to their initial values depending on the menu operating condition Flicking this switch up to this position again cancels the previous settings or resets the settings to their initial values ESCAPE Use this switch when the menu page which has a hierarchical structure is opened Each time the switch is flicked to this position the page returns to one stage h
339. the title specified in planning metadata as the clip name according to the setting of Planning Clip Name in Clip Info Area in the Disc Menu see page 124 During clip list playback Displays the name of the clip list the sub clip number and the total number of sub clips Wireless microphone reception level When a UHF portable tuner is installed in the camcorder W appears together with four segment reception level indicators for each of the channels 1 or 2 channels that can be used by the tuner The indications are as follows Normal use The number of white segments indicates the strength of the signal level Muted The number of gray segments indicates the strength of the signal level Reception level over peak is displayed instead of the indicators P Tuner battery is low The channel number and indicator of the corresponding channel flash P Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 33 M Q 14 1 2 34 1 DWR SOID only Power source voltage battery remaining capacity When the unit is powered from a battery pack indicates the remaining capacity of the power source voltage When the unit is powered from a battery connected to the DC IN connector or AC adaptor attached to the battery attachment shoe indicates the power source voltage El External battery Appears if the power is supplied from an AC adaptor connected to the DC IN connector E Controlling external device Ap
340. ther device that is connected to this unit FTP connection Use the STOR command to transfer clip files from the computer that is connected to this unit If you issue the SITE UMMD command immediately before the STOR command the original timecode of the transferred file is recorded regardless of the setting of PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch Recording Continuous Timecode With FAM and FTP Connections suonejedo e 8 2 209 6 Ja deuD 210 chapter Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for a shooting session preferably by operating the camcorder together with a color video monitor Preparations for testing Attach a fully charged battery pack Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the HUMID indicator does not appear and that the BATT indicator shows at least five segments If the HUMID indicator appears wait until it disappears If the BATT indicator does not show at least five segments replace the battery pack with a fully charged one Check that there are no obstructions near the disc compartment and then press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting After confirming that the disc is not write protected load the disc and close the disc compartment lid Testing the camera Set the switches and selectors as follows IN
341. theses should be used with all menus closed Thumbnail Menu submenus The Thumbnail Search Menu contains the basic commands for thumbnail searches The Thumbnail View Menu contains the basic commands for moving to other menus Overview Disc Menu The Disc Menu allows you to do the following Item Operation Setting Load Clip List Load clip list into this unit s memory Save Clip List Save a clip list to the disc under its current name overwriting the old contents Save Clip list as Save a clip list to the disc under a new name Delete Clip List Delete a clip list from the disc Clear Clip List Clear the current clip list from the unit s memory Load Planning Select a media disc or drive and load planning Metadata Select Drive metadata into this unit s memory Planning Metadata Properties Display the properties of the currently loaded planning metadata Clear Planning Metadata Clear the currently loaded planning metadata from the unit s memory Lock or Delete All Clips Sub Item Lock Clips Lock all clips Unlock AII Clips Unlock all clips Delete Clips Delete all clips Disc Properties Display the properties of the currently loaded disc Or edit the user disc ID title and title 2 Format Disc Format initialize the currently loaded disc Settings Sub Item SET Key on Thumbnail Selects the behavior of the unit when the SET S SEL button or ME
342. this setting when it records video from external devices see page 94 To set the audio recording format when IMX 50 IMX 40 or IMX 30 is selected Select AU DATA LEN IMX on the FORMAT page or AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu and turn the MENU knob to select the desired audio recording format As you turn the MENU knob the audio recording format changes as follows 16bit 24bit Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance To ensure excellent image quality when using this camcorder conditions may require that both the black balance and the white balance be adjusted Black balance adjustment The black balance will require adjustment in the following cases When the camcorder is used for the first time When the camcorder has not been used for a long time When the camcorder is used under conditions in which the surrounding temperature has changed greatly When the GAIN selector L M H values have been changed by using the USER menu It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when using the camcorder after it has been off White balance adjustment Always readjust the white balance when the lighting conditions change Viewfinder screen displays If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started messages that report on the progress and results are displayed on the viewfinder screen when the VF DISP MODE item is set
343. thout displaying a menu shortcut operations Shortcuts are available for the following functions The plus sign indicates that one button is held down while another is pressed for example SHIFT RESET RETURN The same shortcut may access different functions depending on the screen that is active when it is executed Function Operation Clip List Thumbnail display clip list thumbnail screen SUB CLIP DISC MENU Expand Thumbnail display expand thumbnail screen DISP SEL EXPAND Chapter Thumbnail display chapter thumbnail screen HOLD CHAPTER Essence Mark Thumbnail display essence mark thumbnail screen SHIFT THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK Add Sub Clip add sub clip SHIFT SET S SEL Delete Clip delete clip SHIFT RESET RETURN Lock Unlock Clip lock or unlock clip SHIFT STOP Set Inpoint set In point Left arrow SET S SEL Set Outpoint set Out point Right arrow SET S SEL Cue up Inpoint cue up In point Left arrow PREV or left arrow NEXT Cue up Outpoint cue up Out point Right arrow PREV or right arrow NEXT Reset Inpoint reset In point Left arrow RESET RETURN Reset Outpoint reset Out point Right arrow RESET RETURN Cue up cue up SET S SEL Cue up amp Play cue up and play PLAY PAUSE Page Down switch to next page SHIFT down arrow or F FWD Page Up switch to previous page
344. tings differ FREQUENCY 59 9P 50P depending on the setting of SCAN MODE 59 9 23 9 E SIEM i ki aey see Only when SYSTEM the Recording Format LINE is set to 720 and page 55 SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 59 9P REC FORMAT HD422 50 HD420 HQ HD420 SP IMX50 IMX40 IMX30 DVCAM IMX50 IMX40 IMX30 and DVCAM are displayed when the CBKZ MDOI is installed ASPECT RATIO SD 16 9 4 3 The selectable settings differ When the REC depending on the setting of REC FORMAT item is set to FORMAT For details see IMX50 IMX40 Setting the Recording Format IMX30 or DVCAM page 55 AU DATA LEN IMX 16bit 24bit When the REC FORMAT item is set to IMX50 IMX40 or IMX30 COUNTRY NTSC J AREA NTSC For details see Setting the Area AREA PAL AREA of Use on page 41 Menu List Settings Description 25 SOURCE SEL FRONT MIC SELECT MONO STREO Input mode selection for front When stereo microphone microphone is connected REC VIDEO SOURCE CAM EXT For details see Recording video When the CBK HD01 from external devices page 94 or CBK SC02 option board is installed EXT VIDEO SOURCE VBS SDSDI HDSDI When the CBK HDO1 VBS is displayed when or CBK SCO2 option the CBK SC02 is board is installed installed SDSDI and HDSDI are displayed when the CBK HD01 is installed WIDE MODE EXT AUTO 16 9 When the input signal is SD When the CBK HD01 select the method that deter
345. tion Action to take MAX Clips DISC FULL 9 Near MAX The upper limit of 300 recorded clips reached Cannot record Exchange the disc Operation Warnings Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY indication indicator 3c 5 Sep 9 Problem VDR operation Action to take The upper limit of files reached Cannot record Exchange the disc State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY indication indicator flash 9 w 93 9 w 9 w 5 Problem VDR operation Action to take Battery almost exhausted Operation continues Replace the battery Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT a indication indicator and E flash 9 So w E Problem VDR operation Action to take m Battery exhausted Operation stops Replace the battery Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator oy w Problem VDR operation Action to take 25 Internal temperature high Operation continues Power the unit off and move it to a cool place Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator w ey w Problem VDR operation Action to take ACC Sensor Skew Sensor Internal drive sensor error Operation continues Protect the unit from shocks and vibrations turn off the power a
346. tion indicator n co 9 5 0 Problem VDR operation Action to take Shockproof memory overflow Recording continues but may be Protect the unit from shocks substandard and vibrations Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator x 9 e 5 xo Problem VDR operation Action to take Input sync error Recording continues but may be Turn off the power and substandard contact a Sony service representative This indication may be given momentarily when a GENLOCK signal is connected or disconnected but this does not indicate a problem Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY BATT indication indicator x 9 e e 5 x9 Problem VDR operation Action to take An error was detected in the Recording continues but may be Exchange the disc signals recorded on the disc substandard Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY indication indicator Jeng nd Eu Problem VDR operation Action to take Cache memory became full Video and audio recording may be Exchange the disc quickly during a Disc Exchange Change interrupted mode operation Operation Warnings 217 eoueuejure N 6 Ja deuD 218 Warning State WARNING Warning sound REC TALLY indication indicator 9 e e e x b Problem VDR operation Action to take A disc defect was detected Recording continues avoiding the defect but
347. tions assign the ZOOM WIDE setting to ASSIGN 3 and the TELE setting to ASSIGN 4 SHOT MARK Assigns the function that records a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark SHOT 2 Assigns the function that records a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark CLIP FLAG Assign the functions that set OK or clear OK NG and KEEP CLIP FLAG flags during recording or NG playback CLIP FLAG KEEP FOCUS MAG Assigns the function that magnifies the central part of the viewfinder picture for easier focus adjustment This function does not affect recorded video or other signal output DIGITAL Assigns the function that EXTENDER electronically magnifies the central part of the picture All video output is magnified including recorded video UAOI to Assigns the items assigned UA10P in the ASSIGN SEL menu a Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switches allow you to display or not to display all markers b This function cannot be assigned to the RET button on the lens c Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION menu you can use this switch to display the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder d Only the Assign 3 SEL and Assign 4 SEL screens appear Video momentarily becomes black and audio is momentarily muted when the digital extender is switched on and off f This does not appear if nothing i
348. tle neutral detergent then wipe dry Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinners as these may cause discoloration or other damage to the finish of the unit In the event of operating problems If you should experience problems with the unit contact a Sony representative Use and storage locations Store in a level ventilated place Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places nexcessive heat or cold operating temperature range 0 to 40 C 32 F to 104 F Important Notes on Operation Remember that in summer in warm climates the temperature inside a car with the windows closed can easily exceed 50 122 F n damp or dusty locations Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain Locations subject to violent vibration Near strong magnetic fields Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong electromagnetic fields n direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and interference with audio and video signals It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this unit be powered off Vote on laser beams Laser beams may damage the CCDs If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam be careful not to let the laser beam be directed into the lens of the c
349. tle2 1 ASCII characters can be used for Title 2 Press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob An input screen appears for the selected item An English keyboard appears if the area of use setting NTSC AREA or PAL AREA A Japanese keyboard appears if the area of use setting is NTSC J AREA SetTitle of Clip 001 041 2118 4 Shit 2 X C EmgiUSA Cancel 3 Edit the string in the edit box To enter characters Use the arrow buttons or turn the MENU knob to select a key and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob Functions of special keys Key Function lt gt Move the cursor one character forward or back Move the cursor to Home or le gt I End position Back Space Deletes the character in front of the cursor CapsLock Turns the Shift key on permanently until pressed again and enables input of capital letters and symbols 4Shift Enables input of capital letters and symbols Turns off after entry of one character 4 Select OK and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob You return to the Clip Properties screen and the results of the editing are reflected in the clip information To enter text using a USB keyboard or USB mouse You can connect a Windows USB keyboard or a Windows USB mouse to the USB connector see page 29 D and use them together with the software keyboard to ente
350. to 2 or on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu Black balance and white balance adjustment values that are automatically set by the camcorder and the various settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained even when the power is turned off Adjusting the black balance In automatic black balance mode adjustments are performed in the following order black set and black balance Manual black balance adjustment can be selected from the setup menu For details of manual black balance adjustment refer to the Maintenance Manual OUTPUT DCC switch AUTO W B BAL switch Set the OUTPUT DCC switch to CAM 2 Flick the AUTO W B BAL switch to BLK and release the switch The switch returns to the center position and the adjustment is executed During adjustment the following message is displayed on the viewfinder screen ABB EXECUT ING BLACK SET The messages change in the following sequence BLACK SET BLACK BALANCE The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds with the message and the adjustment value is automatically stored in memory During the black balance adjustment the iris is automatically closed During the black balance adjustment the gain selection circuit is automatically activated so you may see flickering on the viewfinder screen but this is not a fault If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be made If the bl
351. u operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select LIVE amp PLAY and then turn the MENU knob to display ON The camera video appears in the viewfinder even during playback You can still check the playback video on the LCD monitor Playback signals are output from the video output connectors Disc playback start position Although this unit uses optical discs it is designed to offer the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs One of these is the playback start position which works in the same way as with tape as described below After playback stop The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was pressed Press the PLAY PAUSE button to resume playback at the stop position After recording The unit stops at the position where recording ended Basic Procedure for Shooting y je1deu 79 Bunooug y je1deuo 80 To play back a clip press the PREV button to move to the start frame of any clip or press the F REV button to move to any position After disc insertion The unit stops at the position of the disc when it was most recently ejected Press the PLAY PAUSE button to resume playback at the most recent position The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is ejected which allows playback to start at that position whenever it is loaded into any XDCAM player The playback position is not recorded to the disc if the disc is write protected
352. u screen Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item 1 Display the VF SETTING page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 2 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the VF SETTING page Item Description ZEBRA Turns the zebra display on or off 9 ZEBRA Selects ZEBRA 1 ZEBRA 2 or SELECT BOTH ZEBRA 1 Adjusts the level of the zebra 1 DET LVL 20 to 70 to 107 display ZEBRA 1 Adjusts the aperture level of the APT LVL zebra 1 display 1 to 10 to 2096 ZEBRA 2 Adjusts the level of the zebra 2 DET LVL 52 to 100 to 109 display VF DETAIL Adjusts the sharpness of the LEVEL viewfinder 99 to 99 VFASPECT Specifies whether to set the SD viewfinder screen and LCD monitor aspect ratio automatically or to set it to 16 9 when the IMX50 40 30 or DVCAM recording format is selected When 16 9 is selected then the screen is always displayed as a 16 9 screen before being cut out to 4 3 even when ASPECT RATIO SD is set to 4 3 a When you use the viewfinder which is not equipped with the ZEBRA switch turns the display on or off using this item When you use the viewfinder with the ZEBRA switch the most recent operation of the ZEBRA switch and this menu operation is effective Turn the MENU knob to change the setting an
353. ub clips from the clip thumbnail screen The following procedure explains operations in the clip thumbnail screen You can proceed in the same way in the expand thumbnail screen and the chapter thumbnail screen Expanded blocks are added as sub clips in the expand thumbnail screen and chapters are added as sub clips in the chapter thumbnail screen See page 104 for more information about thumbnail screen operations 1 m the clip thumbnail screen select the clip that you want to add as a sub clip multiple selections possible Display the Thumbnail Menu Select Add Sub Clips and then press the SET S SEL button or the MENU knob The Add Sub Clip screen appears The clip s selected in step 1 appear in the upper part of this screen and the clip list appears in the lower Scene Selection window The I cursor in the Scene Selection window indicates the location where the currently selected sub clip s will be inserted 002 lt 017 035 d Es a TC 01 01 28 25 Add Sub Clip TC 00 30 40 13 TC 00 09 43 14 E NX TC00244622 TC 00 24 56 24 00 13 48 24 E s gt TC00242429 TC00243427 Scene Selection gt To display the total duration after addition of the selected clip Press the SHIFT button 4m the Scene Selection window move the I cursor to the location where you want to insert the clip The existing thumbnails arrange themselves to the left and right of the I cursor 9 Press the SET S S
354. uctions For details refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD ROM disc To check the FAM driver version Connect this unit to your computer with an i LINK cable and then with a disc loaded start the system profiler utility of the application The version appears to the right of prodisk fs when you select Advanced Functions under Software Making FAM connections 1 If there is a disc loaded in this unit put the unit into the following state Recording playback search and other disc operations Stopped THUMBNAIL indicator Off Disc access by clip deletion disc formatting or other operation Stopped Picture Cache function and Interval Rec function Off File Operations in File Access Mode for Macintosh MENU ON OFF switch OFF Unsaved current clip list Save or clear 2 If this unit is connected to a remote computer by FTP log out from the FTP session see page 205 3 Connect the i i LINK S400 connector on this unit to the i LINK IEEE1394 connector on the remote computer using an i LINK cable When a disc is inserted into this unit the remote computer recognizes this unit as a removable disc The following icon appears in the Finder on the remote computer indicating that the computer is now able to perform file operations Untitled Operation limitations during FAM connections With the exception of the EJECT button recording buttons and playback control buttons are disabled Do
355. ug ALIAS BUP eLPR DISCINFO XML DISCINFO BUP un pu DISCMETA XML EDTR INDEX XML INDEX BUP File operation restrictions This section explains which operations are possible on files stored in each directory When required the following operation tables distinguish reading and writing from partial reading and writing Read Read data sequentially from the start to the end of the file Partial read Read only a part of the data in the file Write Write data sequentially from the start to the end of the file Partial write Write data to a part of the file only Operations other than Read and Partial read are possible only when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording enabled Overview Root directory File name Content Operations Read Write Rename Create Delete Partial Partial read write INDEX XML Contains data for management of the Yes No No No No material on the disc ALIAS XML 9 Contains conversion tables for assigning Yes No No No No user defined names to clips and clip lists DISCMETA XML Contains metadata to indicate the disc Yes Yes No No No properties MEDIAPRO XML Contains a list of materials on the disc Yes No No No No basic properties related information and information about access methods SYSPRO XML Contains system setting information and Yes No No No No menu setting information for the devices
356. umbnails you can save time by using the Skip Scroll function to jump directly to the thumbnail you want see page 105 Overview Clip date and time Displays the date and time when the selected clip was shot and recorded n Duration Displays the duration recording time of the selected clip Thumbnail display items Index picture Displays an image to stand for the content of the clip The index picture is normally the first frame of the clip Index picture changed mark This mark like the folded over corner of a page that you want to remember appears when the index picture has been changed to any frame other than the first frame of a clip see page 109 When you cue up a clip the unit always cues up the first frame even when the index picture has been changed to a different frame S mark This mark appears when shot marks or multiple Rec Start essence marks have been set in the clip see page 81 The chapter thumbnail screen can be displayed for clips that show this mark see page 100 Clip flag icon Displays the corresponding icon when a clip flag OK NG KP KEEP is set in the clip see page 112 Clip and frame information Displays the clip or frame information selected with the Clip Information item in the Thumbnail Menu see page 108 The factory default selection is the timecode of the first frame or the timecode of the thumbnail frame Lock icon
357. und level respectively 3 Testing the manual audio level adjusting functions 1 Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches to FRONT 2 Turn the MIC LEVEL control Check that the channel 1 and 2 audio level meters on the LCD monitor and monochrome LCD show more and more segments as you turn the control counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder 4 Testing the earphone and speaker 1 Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the speaker volume changes accordingly 2 Connect an earphone to the front or rear EARPHONE jack Check that the speaker sound is cut off and that you can hear the sound from the microphone in the earphone 4 Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that the earphone volume changes accordingly 5 Connect the earphone to the other EARPHONE jack Check the earphone as in step 3 5 Testing external microphones 1 Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors 2 Setthe 48V OFF switches as follows If the connected microphone is of the internal power supply type set the switch to OFF If the connected microphone is of the external power supply type set the switch to 48V 3 Set the AUDIO IN switches to REAR Aim the microphones at a sound source 5 Check that the audio level meters on the LCD monitor and monochrome LCD and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level 6 Checking the XLR connection automat
358. units of hours reset possible 02 TIME DATE ADJUST For details see Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock HOUR on page 42 MIN SEC YEAR MONTH DAY Menu List No Page Item Description 03 ROM VERSION 1 PACKAGE X XX Displays ROM version SY1 X XX SY2K X XX SY2U X XX DRV X XX AT X XX X XX 04 ROM VERSION 2 LVIS X XX TSYS X XX TMBP X XX FAM X XX LABY X XX BRDG X XX PIER X XX CAVA X XX 05 ROM VERSION 3 DSP0 X XX DSP2 X XX PRXA X XX 06 DEV STATUS T O MS FP CN Displays the status of each internal device of this unit DCP VF D A DCPI DCP2 DCP3 EEPROM CN DCP DR FRAM AT FAN MB LSI DCP1 DCP2 DCP3 DCP4 TG SCI SY RM 07 OPTION HD SD SDI INPUT appears when the optional CBK HD01 HD SD SDI Input Board is installed COMPOSITE INPUT O appears when the optional CBK SC02 Analog Composite Input Board is installed SD REC amp PB O appears when the optional CBKZ MD01 SD Record and Playback Software is installed Menu List pejrejeq pue s ejdsig nuey 9 JajdeyD 163 pejrejeq pue s ejdsiq nua 9 Ja deyo 164 Menu Operations Displaying menus Viewfinder LCD monitor DISP SEL EXPAND button MENU ON OFF switch Q POWER switch To use the MENU ON OFF switch open the cover of the menu operating section When the camcorder is powered on
359. up the lens locking lever When no lens is mounted keep this cap fitted for protection from dust camera adapter connector 50 pin Remove the connector cover and connect the 50 pin connector of the HDCA 702 MPEG TS Adaptor Refer to the operation manual of the HDCA 702 for more information about how to mount it Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls MeIAJOAQ JE deUD 17 MeIAJOAQ Je deuo 18 Operating and connectors section Front REC START recording start button Press to start recording Press it again to stop recording The effect is the same as that of the REC button on the lens SHUTTER selector Set to ON to use the electronic shutter Flick to SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter mode setting within the range previously set with the menu When this switch is operated the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area for about three seconds For details about the shutter speed and shutter mode settings see Setting the Electronic Shutter on page 61 FILTER selector Selects from the four neutral density ND filters built into this unit Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Position number ND filter 1 CLEAR 2 14 ND attenuates light to approximately 14 3 1716 ND attenuates light to approximately 1 16 4 la ND attenuates light to approximately 1 64 When this
360. upply from the battery pack to an external power supply during timecode synchronization To maintain a continuous power supply connect the external power supply to the DC IN connector before removing the battery pack You may lose timecode synchronization if you remove the battery pack first Camera synchronization during timecode synchronization During timecode synchronization the camera is genlocked to the reference video signal input from the GENLOCK IN connector Setting the Time Data Shooting Handling Discs Discs used for recording and playback The following Professional Discs D can be used for recording and playback on this unit PFD23A capacity 23 3 GB PFD50DLA capacity 50 0 GB 1 Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation tis not possible to use the following discs for recording or playback on this unit Blu ray Disc Professional Disc for Data PFDSODLA discs can be used only by XDCAM devices with the DL mark see the following illustration They cannot be used by XDCAM devices without this mark eo Professional Disc Notes on handling Handling The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge and is designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or fingerprints However if the cartridge is subjected to a severe shock for example by dropping it this can result in damage or scratching of the disc If the disc is scratched it may be impossible to record video au
361. used by the load shift of the computer power and this may cause a malfunction 1 Equipment that can be powered through i LINK cable DV cable HDVF 20A viewfinder optional Plug Connect to the VF connector on the camcorder Stopper Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the camcorder when it is slid from side to side Camera operator tally indicator Lights up while camcorder is recording This indicator can be covered when not in use This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings in the same manner as the tally indicator and the REC indicator in the viewfinder Eyecup Indicators and status display For details see Status display on the viewfinder screen on page 32 Diopter adjustment ring Allows for optimal focus adjustment Tally indicator Lights up while camcorder is recording Set the TALLY switch to OFF when not in use The brightness can also be adjusted with the TALLY switch This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings in the same manner as the camera operator tally indicator and the REC indicator in the viewfinder El PEAKING control Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture sharpness and makes focusing easier This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder E CONTRAST control Adjusts the contrast of the screen This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder BRIGHT control Adjusts the brightness o
362. vel adjustment selects MODE 9dB 12dB the limiter saturation level for loud input signals 15dB 17dB AU OUT OFF ON Turns the audio output limiter on or off LIMITER Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 08 AUDIO 3 AU SG 1KHz ON OFF AUTO Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone during the Color Bar mode or not ON A 1 kHz test tone is output during the Color Bar mode OFF A 1 KHz test tone is not output during the Color Bar mode AUTO A 1 KHz test tone is output only when the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 switch on the inside panel is in the AUTO position LEVEL SIDE1 FRONT When recording the front microphone sound on F S1 CH 1 selects which control is to be used for the level adjustment SIDE 1 LEVEL control left side FRONT MIC LEVEL control F S1 LEVEL control left side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other MIC CH2 LEVEL SIDE2 FRONT When recording the front microphone sound on F S2 CH 2 selects which control is to be used for the level adjustment SIDE 2 LEVEL control right side FRONT MIC LEVEL control F4S2 LEVEL control right side or the MIC LEVEL control The two controls are linked to each other REARI WRR SIDE1 FRONT Selects any of these controls to adjust the audio LEVEL F S1 level of the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and whatever is connected to the AUDIO IN CHI connector on the rear panel SIDE 1 LEVEL control left side F
363. warnings see page 22 in the same manner as the REC TALLY indicator in the viewfinder For details see Operation Warnings on page 216 TALLY switch Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator function USB connector This is a USB 2 0 connector Connect a Windows USB keyboard or mouse see page 111 or a USB flash drive to access planning metadata stored on the drive see page 122 zi network connector RJ 45 type This is a IOBASE T 100BASE TX connector for network connection Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls M Q 1 2 29 14 1 2 30 When you connect the network cable of the unit to peripheral device use a shielded type cable to prevent malfunction due to radiation noise ATTENTION Lors de la connexion du c ble r seau de l appareil au p riph rique utilisez un c ble blind afin d emp cher tout dysfonctionnement d au bruit de rayonnement Verwenden Sie beim Anschlie en des Netzwerkkabels des Ger ts an ein Peripherieger t ein abgeschirmtes Kabel um Fehlfunktionen aufgrund von St rungen zu vermeiden EARPHONE jack stereo minijack You can monitor the E E sound during recording and playback sound during playback When an alarm is indicated you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone You can use this with the EARPHONE jack on the front of the unit at the same time Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built in s
364. where data has already been saved The message OVERWRITE OK YES appears Tostop overwriting press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO To overwrite select YES and press the MENU knob You can select the information displayed on each USER SAVE or USER LOAD page For details see To select the file information items to be displayed on page 189 About the USER menu settings to be saved in the Memory Stick Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are saved in the Memory Stick as a user file Saving and Recalling User Files If data cannot be saved If one of the following error messages appears during or after the save operation then the data was not saved Error message Cause Action NO MEMORY No Memory Insert or STICK Stick is reinsert the flashing inserted Memory Stick MEMORY The LOCK Set the LOCK STICK switch on the switch to the LOCKED Memory write enable Stick is set to position the write protect position MEMORY Circuit or Recheck and STICK ERROR Memory flashing Stick fault consult a Sony service representative To set the file ID You can set an file ID before you save your data as a user file This will help you identify the user file quickly The file ID that has been set is saved together with the data Set the file ID before saving data in the Memory Stick Otherwise the file ID is not saved with the
365. witch COLOR TEMP button or RET button on the lens RECSTART button and the VTR button on the lens and the button to which the recording start stop function has been assigned ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch COLOR TEMP button or RET button on the lens when the RM REC START item on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to RM Buttons to which the COLOR TEMP SW 3200K 4300K 5600K 6300K functions have been assigned ASSIGN 1 3 4 switches COLOR TEMP button and RET button on the lens Paint adjustment when the remote control unit is connected The settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled suonejedeJjg z e1deuj Function of the recording start stop buttons when the remote control unit is connected When the remote control unit is connected you can make a setting to determine which of the recording start stop buttons you will use This setting is made using the RM REC START item on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu Relationship between the setting of the RM REC START item and the function of recording start Stop buttons Recording start Settings of RM REC stop button START RM CAM PARA Camcorder s REC Disabled Enabled Enabled START button Lens VTR button Disabled Enabled Enabled Button to which Disabled Enabled Enabled recording start stop function has been assigned camcorder ASSIGN 1 3 4 swit
366. with an i LINK cable i LINK cable is connected The unit is mounted automatically so you do not need to do anything The unit is powered off and an i LINK cable is connected Power the unit on File Operations in File Access Mode for Macintosh suoneiedo aji4 8 1e1deuj 203 e 4 8 204 FTP File Operations File operations between this unit and a remote computer can be carried out by the File Transfer Protocol called FTP below Preparations 1 Connect the network connectors of this unit and a remote computer with a network cable Or connect this unit to the network to which the remote computer is connected 2 the NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu set the IP address and other network setting items for this unit P For details on menu operations see Basic menu operations on page 164 If network settings have already been made Check the IP address of this unit 1 This unit is able to acquire an IP address automatically from a DHCP server It also supports an Auto IP function to assign an IP address automatically when access from this unit to the DHCP server times out You can check DHCP settings and the assigned IP address on the NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu If this unit is directly connected to a computer running Windows Vista with a network cable change the setting as follows 1 Network and Sharing Center 2 Manage network connections
367. x coefficients MATRIX USER B G 99 to 99 Sets the arbitrary B G user se matrix coefficients Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 12 MTX MULTI MATRIX OFF ON Turns the linear matrix correction and multi matrix correction functions on or off MATRIX MULTI OFF ON Turns the multi matrix correction function on or off MATRIX AREA IND OFF ON Turns the zebra indication on or off in the area corresponding to the currently selected setting MATRIX COLOR DET Moves to color detection Detects color page MTX MULTI PRESET EXEC Return MTX MULTDHUE and MTX MULTDSAT values to preset values for each of the 16 axes MTX MULTI AXIS Sets 16 hue axes as the targets of R R YL YL YL G the multi matrix correction G G CY CY B function MTX MULTI HUE 99 to 99 Sets hue correction values for each of the 16 axis modes MTX MULTI SAT 99 to 99 Sets saturation correction values for each of the 16 axis modes 13 V V MOD OFF ON Turns the V modulation function MODULATION on or off MASTER VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts the master V modulation level R VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts the R V modulation level G VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts the G V modulation level B VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts the B V modulation level TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the output signal of the TEST OUT connector 14 SATURATI
368. y camera video in the viewfinder during playback Live amp Play function on page 79 DOWN CON MODE CROP LETTR SQEZE Sets the conversion mode for LETTR is displayed down converted output when the LETTER BOX item on the SELECT FUNCTION page is set to ENABL WIDE ID THROU AUTO Specifies whether to add wide picture information to the SD output signal THROU Output the video signals without adding wide picture information AUTO When the DOWN CON MODE item is set to SQEZE add wide picture information to the output video signals 03 SUPER IMPOSE SUPER VFDISP OFF ON When the SDI OUT 2 SUPER SUPER MENU OFF ON item or the TEST OUT SUPER SUPER TO OFF ON item on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to ON turn the output of text superimposed information from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT connector on or off for each item SUPER MARKER OFF ON When the TEST OUT SUPER item on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to ON turns the marker display output from the TEST OUT connector on or off 04 LCD LCD COLOR 99 to 99 Adjusts the LCD color LCD OFF ON Turns the marker and zebra MARKER amp ZEBRA display in the LCD monitor on or off Menu List No Page Item Settings Description 05 REC FUNCTION CACHE INTVAL REC OFF CACHE A INT For details see Starting a shoot M INT with a few seconds of pre stored CACHERECTIME 0 25 2 45 4 65 6 85 8 Picture data Picture Cache 10S 18 2
369. y life is extended STBY Recording to the disc starts immediately when the REC START button is pressed An internal operating sound may be recorded at the start of recording when the VDR SAVE STBY switch is set to SAVE GAIN selector Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the lighting conditions during shooting The gains corresponding to the L M and H settings can be selected in the menu The factory settings are L 0 dB M 6 dB and H 12 dB When this switch is adjusted the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about three seconds For details see Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions on page 178 El OUTPUT DCC output signal dynamic contrast control switch Switches the video signal which is output to the video disc drive referred to as VDR viewfinder and video monitor from the camera section between the following two BARS Outputs the color bar signal CAM Outputs the video signal from the camera When this is selected you can switch DCC D on and off 1 DCC Dynamic Contrast Control Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject objects in the background will be lost in the glare The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is particularly effective in the following cases Shooting people in the shade on a sunny d
370. yed as TITLE00001 see page 88 Clip names can be displayed in European languages when the area of use see page 41 is set to NTSC AREA or PAL AREA To display the clip title Settings gt Display Title in the Disc Menu needs to be set to On Duration Displays the time from the first frame of the selected chapter to the first frame of the next chapter Essence mark thumbnail screen This screen displays thumbnails of the specified essence mark found by searching all clips on the disc TC00262211 TC 00 27 19 25 00 27 5125 TC00280617 Essence mark name Displays the name of the essence mark Shot Mark1 here Selection frame See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 97 Essence mark number total essence marks Displays the total number of essence marks and the number of the selected essence mark The total number of essence marks is the total number of essence marks that have been set in all clips on the disc n Scrollbar See the description in Clip thumbnail screen page 97 Clip date and time Displays the date and time when the clip that contains the selected thumbnail was recorded or last modified Clip name Displays the name of the clip that contains the selected frame When the clip has a title it is displayed as TITLE00001 see page 88 Clip names can be displayed in European languages when the area of use see page 41 is set to NTSC AR
371. you record in Picture Cache mode the picture you are shooting now is recorded to disc after the picture data stored in memory equal to the Picture Cache time is recorded to disc For this reason disc access may continue for a short time after you press the REC START button to stop recording During this time the playback control buttons are disabled as in recording mode Also if you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to restart recording during this time a separate clip is recorded When you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to restart recording during disc access the start point of the recorded clip may be later than the Picture Cache time especially when there are a large number of clips recorded on the disc In Picture Cache mode you should avoid stop and start recording operations in quick succession The time disc access stops after the REC START button is pressed equals the Picture Cache time However if you start recording within the Picture Cache time immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode changing the Picture Cache time or performing playback or recording review the picture data for the duration of the Picture Cache time will not be stored in memory Thus the time disc access stops after the STOP button is pressed becomes shorter than the Picture Cache time n Picture Cache mode you cannot set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET to make timecode settings To mak

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

JVC HX-Z3 User's Manual  Triarch 31121-25 User's Manual    Epson XP-320 Quick Guide and Warranty  Chicco Turbo Touch Owner's Manual  Samsung Aspirador sin  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file